US20040001106A1 - System and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components - Google Patents
System and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20040001106A1 US20040001106A1 US10/183,830 US18383002A US2004001106A1 US 20040001106 A1 US20040001106 A1 US 20040001106A1 US 18383002 A US18383002 A US 18383002A US 2004001106 A1 US2004001106 A1 US 2004001106A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- presentation
- displaying
- user
- action
- file
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 389
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 title claims description 378
- 239000012092 media component Substances 0.000 title claims description 47
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 title claims description 27
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 claims description 332
- 238000013515 script Methods 0.000 claims description 279
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 claims description 148
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 claims description 148
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 109
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 claims description 106
- 238000013479 data entry Methods 0.000 claims description 95
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 claims description 58
- 230000008676 import Effects 0.000 claims description 30
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 28
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 18
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 claims description 14
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 claims description 13
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 11
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 claims description 8
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 claims description 6
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 238000004513 sizing Methods 0.000 claims description 3
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000010187 selection method Methods 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000007373 indentation Methods 0.000 claims 8
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims 7
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims 7
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 claims 4
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 claims 2
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 claims 2
- 230000009191 jumping Effects 0.000 claims 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 claims 1
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 claims 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 claims 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000005055 memory storage Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000006855 networking Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012549 training Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013024 troubleshooting Methods 0.000 description 2
- CDFKCKUONRRKJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(3-chlorophenoxy)-3-[2-[[3-(3-chlorophenoxy)-2-hydroxypropyl]amino]ethylamino]propan-2-ol;methanesulfonic acid Chemical compound CS(O)(=O)=O.CS(O)(=O)=O.C=1C=CC(Cl)=CC=1OCC(O)CNCCNCC(O)COC1=CC=CC(Cl)=C1 CDFKCKUONRRKJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000881 depressing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004880 explosion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007723 transport mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012384 transportation and delivery Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F16/00—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
- G06F16/40—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor of multimedia data, e.g. slideshows comprising image and additional audio data
- G06F16/48—Retrieval characterised by using metadata, e.g. metadata not derived from the content or metadata generated manually
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F16/00—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
- G06F16/40—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor of multimedia data, e.g. slideshows comprising image and additional audio data
Definitions
- the invention is related to the authoring of an educational or business presentation having multi-media components, and more particularly to a system and process for creating interactive, multi-media presentations that integrate video, audio, presentation slides, text, and other media components into a manageable production environment.
- Multimedia presentations in their simplest form involve the use of a variety of media, such as video, audio, slideshows, and text to present scripted presentations to mass audiences for such purposes as virtual classrooms or other educational and business presentations.
- media such as video, audio, slideshows, and text
- Interactive multimedia presentations have the promise of providing an all new presentation and learning environments. Rather than the traditional canned presentation or lecture, a viewer of an interactive multimedia presentation should be able to play back the presentation while interacting with it to view or review specific sections, access additional information, search and even bookmark the presentation.
- the present invention is such a tool. It will allow users to create rich multimedia presentations in an easily understood and organized fashion while speeding up and simplifying the organization, data entry, timing, metadata tracking, publication and distribution of the presentation.
- the present invention is directed toward an interactive, multi-media presentation production system and process that integrates video, audio, presentation slides, text, and other media components into a manageable production environment for the producer of a presentation.
- the production system and process is a professional grade toolkit that in its simplest implementation provides canned template starting points with semi-customization features and requires only some pointers to the media files being incorporated.
- the present presentation production system can also support ground up professional-studio customization for specialized presentations.
- other high-level production features includes a content preview, grid-based editing and manipulation tools, media import and filtering tools, graphic-based drag and drop editing features, and format and packaging features.
- templates are accessible locally through the presentation production system and process (or “tool” for short), or can be accessed remotely on one or more servers via a network connection.
- the use of templates allows the presentation production system to separate data from presentation logic.
- the tool generates a serializable, human readable, data file.
- the file's format stores metadata, organizational information, content (media) information, timing of events in relation to each other, as well as extended metadata about each piece of content. In tested versions of the tool, this file took the form of an XML data file.
- the tool itself is essentially an intelligent visual data editor for making rich media presentations. Upon publishing from the tool, the required elements are organized and edited to contain the proper metadata in a single publishing directory. More particularly, the tool consists of graphic user interfaces for easily entering the data associated with the rich media presentation. The tool is also designed to make it simple and easy to edit the data of the underlying schema.
- the custom templates are XSLT files with supporting script and XML that can be stored on a server for workgroup access or on a local machine.
- a template selection window is presented which the user employs to browse the available templates stored both locally and remotely. Picking the desired template, entering a name for the project and then a location for the project to be built, will copy the associated templates files to the selected build location.
- a presentation tool window is presented to the user.
- the presentation tool window includes a variety of sectors that the user employs to craft the presentation.
- One of these sectors is the project file sector which is used to display and manage all of the media imported into the presentation, such as video, audio, documents, and other source files that will be used to create the presentation.
- a document tree format is employed to facilitate the foregoing task.
- One of the tree elements is the media folder that contains the master track video or audio file.
- the program contained in the master track file will drive the timeline of events in the presentation. All indexing, timing, and associated master track metadata will also be stored in this file.
- the video preview sector is generally used to provide a playback of the master track program, and includes controls for at a minimum playing and pausing the video or audio program.
- FIG. 1 Another media element imported and displayed using the project file sector is a presentation slideshow deck.
- thumbnails for each slide are generated for preview in the presentation slide preview sector of the tool window.
- Using the control arrows displayed in the slide preview sector allows the user to scan through the associated slides. Double clicking on a slide thumbnail launches the presentation slide creation program used to create the slide so that it can be edited.
- the presentation tool window also includes a presentation properties sector that is used to view and modify the layout appearance and functionality attributes of the selected template via a series of property grids that are accessible by selecting the appropriate tab.
- a presentation properties sector that is used to view and modify the layout appearance and functionality attributes of the selected template via a series of property grids that are accessible by selecting the appropriate tab.
- One of these grids is the template editor property grid which loads all of the selected templates customizable data.
- Editable features include access to the colors of the template, font, layout features, images, presentation slides export options, slide thumbnail export options, and video and audio playback options, among others.
- the metadata property grid will expose all of the customizable metadata that can be entered into the selected template. Each template can define its own list of customizable metadata that will be exposed to the grid. Default metadata is also populated into the metadata property grid.
- a list of “schemas” is selectable to allow the user to enter information from a pre-defined schema. Selecting a schema from a drop-down menu will populate the grid with the associated schema information. Users will be able to enter the information that is relevant to their presentation and it will be written into the finalized presentation data file. Users can also choose a language from a drop-down menu. All available language code keys will be listed in the drop-down.
- the user can enter the associated metadata in that language into the data grid and it will be stored in the presentation data file with an associated language key. This enables the playback viewer to display metadata in different languages based on the user's language selection.
- a player property grid is also accessible in the presentation properties sector.
- the player property grid allows the user to edit and view the details of the master track media file.
- the master track media file is the video or audio file that serves as the main presentation timeline. Some of the settings associated with this file are displayed for informational purposes only and cannot be edited. However, other settings are available to edit, such as the playback size, as well as the dimensions and quality settings of the master track. Information in this property grid is stored in both the presentation data file and the media file upon building the project.
- the presentation tool window further includes a work sector where various data entry grids and informational panes are displayed. Each of these can be accessed by selecting a tab displayed in the work sector.
- the data entry grids allow the user to enter the information into the presentation data file and the master track media file that is needed to drive the timeline of the presentation.
- the first of these grids which is displayed by default once the master track program has been imported, is the scripts grid.
- the scripts grid is where the user enters events called script commands that will be triggered during the playback of the presentation. Script commands can include presentation slide flips, launching a demo, displaying documents, opening a URL, accessing a web service, or any other custom functionality that is designed into the selected template.
- Script commands can be created by the user entering a time code, a script type (e.g., slide, demo, etc.), and a script parameter specifying the particular slide, demonstration program, and the like that is involved. Script commands can also be edited through the use of this grid.
- a script type e.g., slide, demo, etc.
- a script parameter specifying the particular slide, demonstration program, and the like that is involved. Script commands can also be edited through the use of this grid.
- a markers grid is also accessible in the work sector by selecting the associated tab.
- the markers grid allows for the editing of the table of contents of the presentation.
- Major divisions or events along the timeline can be titled for fast navigation and indexing to a time code representing an elapsed time of the master track presentation.
- Typical presentations include a contents marker for each major slide change, or change in topic within the presentation.
- Sub-topics are also marked in the markers grid, and can be arranged into hierarchies under the contents tab as will be described shortly.
- To add content markers to the grid the user enters the time code and associated content marker text into the data grid. Information within the grid can be edited just as in the scripts grid.
- the transcription grid is where the user can enter a line-by-line transcription of the presentation in multiple languages for display in the final presentation. Users can enter transcript information by entering the text into the grid with an associated start-time time code. The user can choose how granular the timeline should be with the transcript grid. Transcription can be spaced close together in short sentences or widely apart in large paragraph blocks. A language dropdown box will also allow the user to select the associated language key with which this transcription data gets stored.
- the finalized presentation data file can store multiple language transcriptions, indexed by language keys.
- the data can be entered by importing it via a formatted text-based file.
- This method of entering the data is especially useful with the transcription grid in that users can dramatically speed up the process of entering transcription information compared to manual entry methods.
- the file will be in a human readable format for easy integration with word processing, and spreadsheet applications. Users import the file into the presentation production system and select the associated language key. The data is then parsed into the presentation data file and is available for editing in the associated data grid.
- the next feature that can be displayed in the work sector by selecting its tab is the contents/links editor.
- the contents/links editor provides a two-part display with one side showing a table of contents tree that includes a graphical representation of the contents markers organized according to their time code, and the presentation slides scheduled via a scripts command to be shown during the part of the presentation applicable to each contents marker. This tree can be edited by the user to reflect the hierarchy of the contents markers.
- the other side of the display is a links grid for adding related links at the global, contents marker or slide level.
- links are displayed in the presentation during the appropriate times (i.e., throughout the presentation in the case of a global link, during the part of the presentation related to a contents marker if a marker link, or during the time a slide is displayed if a slide link).
- the user selects a global link node, or the desired marker or slide node, in the table of contents tree, and then enters the name of the link and its associated URL in the entry fields of the links grid.
- certain informational panes can be displayed in the work sector by selecting the appropriate tab.
- a presentation data file preview pane is available to the user for reviewing the underlying data file that is being generated by the presentation tool as the user crafts the presentation.
- Another informational pane that can be displayed is the output panel.
- the output panel details build information and status, as well as error reporting during the build process. When a build is initiated this panel automatically appears and details information of each step in the build process. Errors are reported to this panel for easy troubleshooting during the build process.
- a preview display can be accessed and shown in the work sector.
- the preview display allows the user to view the presentation that is being authored for the purpose of review. Selecting the preview display tab causes the presentation tool to do a rapid build of the project and display it in the work sector. The author can then confirm the selections of color, font, layout, and timing that they have made. This allows the user to check quality and review their work within the tool itself.
- the presentation tool also has a visual timeline editor.
- the visual timeline editor provides a graphic representation of the scheduled script commands, contents markers and transcription segment entries in a “visual” timeline format.
- the foregoing events are represented by icons displayed in separate horizontally oriented script command, markers and transcription bands.
- An elapsed time timeline ruler disposed above the bands can be used to determine the time code associated with each scheduled event in relation to the master track program. As such, it allows the user to easily see these scheduled events and obtain basic information about them, without having to resort to the previously-described data grids.
- the timeline editor gives the user the capability to move the scheduled events right from the timeline. Specifically dragging an event icon updates the underlying time code displayed in the data grids, and changes the presentation data file.
- dragging a current elapsed time bar through the timeline updates the current position of the master track playback and allows the user to preview where events happen.
- the master track stays in sync.
- the slide events are updated and previewed in the slide preview window. The user can also access the various data grids directly from the timeline to edit the scheduled events.
- a presentation template is selected as described previously using the template selection window.
- the template file associated with the selected template specifies layout features and interactive functionality for an interactive presentation window which when rendered displays the presentation being authored.
- a presentation tool window is displayed to the user and it is populated with the selected template's layout and functionality data.
- the presentation tool window provides a graphic user interface to assist the user in tasks including specifying media files to be imported, modifying the layout and functionality data and entering scheduling information associated with the presentation.
- the user first employs the presentation tool window to import media files making up the multi-media content of the presentation.
- the user also modifies or adds to the layout and functionality data associated with the selected template as desired, and inputs scheduling data specifying when each component of the multi-media content is to be played or displayed in the presentation window.
- the presentation tool creates a presentation data file including all the layout and functionality data, as well as scheduling data, associated with the presentation.
- a presentation package is then built. This includes exported versions of the imported media components, and a presentation file which is executable by a viewer of the presentation and when executed renders the aforementioned presentation window for viewing the presentation. It is noted that the presentation file is created by incorporating the data contained in the presentation data file into the file associated with the selected template.
- this includes indexing the master track program file by first eliminating any existing un-needed metadata from the header of the file, and then writing the aforementioned scheduling data, as well as player settings, into the header.
- the indexed master track program file is then exported.
- the user-established link indicators that identify when in the master track video or audio program a particular user-identified link is to be displayed in the presentation are also exported.
- a links file is created for the user-established link indicators.
- Any demonstration, animation, document, or HTML files that were imported and scheduled are also exported. All the foregoing exported files are exported to a project directory whose name and location were specified by the user in the template selection window as part of the process of selecting a template.
- the aforementioned presentation file is also stored in this directory.
- the output panel is displayed in the work sector of the presentation tool window, as discussed previously. This panel provides information and a status regarding the progress of the building process. This includes a description of any error encountered during the process.
- the presentation can be previewed in the presentation tool window as described previously. If the user desires to make changes, the presentation package can be edited by changing the layout and functionality data and/or the scheduling data in the presentation data file using the presentation tool window, or by importing additional media files or presentation slides, or both. The presentation package is then rebuilt and can be previewed once again.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram depicting a general purpose computing device constituting an exemplary system for implementing the present invention.
- FIG. 2 shows a user interface screen according to the present invention for selecting a presentation template.
- FIG. 3 shows a user interface screen according to the present invention for authoring an interactive, multi-media presentation.
- FIG. 4 shows an enlarged view of the project file sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 5 shows an open file dialog box user interface window for importing media components which is accessed via the project file sector of FIG. 4.
- FIG. 6 shows an enlarged view of the video preview sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 7 shows an enlarged view of the presentation slide preview sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 8A shows an enlarged view of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a portion of the template editor property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 8B shows an enlarged view of a part of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a different portion of the template editor property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 8C shows an enlarged view of a part of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with an expanded template attribute of the template editor property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 9 shows an enlarged view of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the metadata property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 10 shows an enlarged view of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the player property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 11 shows an enlarged view of the work sector and the visual timeline editor of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the scripts grid being displayed in the work sector.
- FIG. 12A is an exemplary script command list from an imported scripts file.
- FIG. 12B is an exemplary contents marker list from an imported contents marker file.
- FIG. 13 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the scripts grid and a pop-up script command editing window being displayed.
- FIG. 14 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the markers grid being displayed.
- FIG. 15 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the markers grid and a pop-up contents marker editing window being displayed.
- FIG. 16 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the transcription grid being displayed.
- FIG. 17 shows an enlarged view of part of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a portion of the transcription grid and a pop-up transcription entry editing window being displayed.
- FIG. 18 shows an offset time code user interface window used for correcting time code offsets between an imported scheduling data list and the master track program.
- FIG. 19 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the content/links editor being displayed.
- FIG. 20 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the presentation data file preview pane being displayed.
- FIG. 21 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the output panel being displayed.
- FIG. 22 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the preview display being displayed.
- FIG. 23 shows an enlarged view of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 24A shows an enlarged view of part of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a pop-up scripts command details window being displayed.
- FIG. 24B shows an enlarged view of part of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a pop-up contents marker details window being displayed.
- FIG. 24C shows an enlarged view of part of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a pop-up transcription entry details window being displayed.
- FIG. 25 shows a user interface screen according to the present invention for saving a modified presentation template.
- FIGS. 26 A-B show a flow chart diagramming an overall process for authoring an interactive, multi-media presentation in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 27 shows a flow chart diagramming a process for building a presentation package that implements the building action of FIG. 26B.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating the relationships among the components of the presentation package.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a LRN formatted imsmanifest.xml file.
- FIG. 1 illustrates an example of a suitable computing system environment 100 .
- the computing system environment 100 is only one example of a suitable computing environment and is not intended to suggest any limitation as to the scope of use or functionality of the invention. Neither should the computing environment 100 be interpreted as having any dependency or requirement relating to any one or combination of components illustrated in the exemplary operating environment 100 .
- the invention is operational with numerous other general purpose or special purpose computing system environments or configurations.
- Examples of well known computing systems, environments, and/or configurations that may be suitable for use with the invention include, but are not limited to, personal computers, server computers, hand-held or laptop devices, multiprocessor systems, microprocessor-based systems, set top boxes, programmable consumer electronics, network PCs, minicomputers, mainframe computers, distributed computing environments that include any of the above systems or devices, and the like.
- the invention may be described in the general context of computer-executable instructions, such as program modules, being executed by a computer.
- program modules include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types.
- the invention may also be practiced in distributed computing environments where tasks are performed by remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network.
- program modules may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices.
- an exemplary system for implementing the invention includes a general purpose computing device in the form of a computer 110 .
- Components of computer 110 may include, but are not limited to, a processing unit 120 , a system memory 130 , and a system bus 121 that couples various system components including the system memory to the processing unit 120 .
- the system bus 121 may be any of several types of bus structures including a memory bus or memory controller, a peripheral bus, and a local bus using any of a variety of bus architectures.
- such architectures include Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, Micro Channel Architecture (MCA) bus, Enhanced ISA (EISA) bus, Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) local bus, and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus also known as Mezzanine bus.
- ISA Industry Standard Architecture
- MCA Micro Channel Architecture
- EISA Enhanced ISA
- VESA Video Electronics Standards Association
- PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
- Computer 110 typically includes a variety of computer readable media.
- Computer readable media can be any available media that can be accessed by computer 110 and includes both volatile and nonvolatile media, removable and non-removable media.
- Computer readable media may comprise computer storage media and communication media.
- Computer storage media includes both volatile and nonvolatile, removable and non-removable media implemented in any method or technology for storage of information such as computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data.
- Computer storage media includes, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory or other memory technology, CD-ROM, digital versatile disks (DVD) or other optical disk storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium which can be used to store the desired information and which can be accessed by computer 110 .
- Communication media typically embodies computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any information delivery media.
- modulated data signal means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics set or changed in such a manner as to encode information in the signal.
- communication media includes wired media such as a wired network or direct-wired connection, and wireless media such as acoustic, RF, infrared and other wireless media. Combinations of the any of the above should also be included within the scope of computer readable media.
- the system memory 130 includes computer storage media in the form of volatile and/or nonvolatile memory such as read only memory (ROM) 131 and random access memory (RAM) 132 .
- ROM read only memory
- RAM random access memory
- BIOS basic input/output system
- RAM 132 typically contains data and/or program modules that are immediately accessible to and/or presently being operated on by processing unit 120 .
- FIG. 1 illustrates operating system 134 , application programs 135 , other program modules 136 , and program data 137 .
- the computer 110 may also include other removable/non-removable, volatile/nonvolatile computer storage media.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a hard disk drive 141 that reads from or writes to non-removable, nonvolatile magnetic media, a magnetic disk drive 151 that reads from or writes to a removable, nonvolatile magnetic disk 152 , and an optical disk drive 155 that reads from or writes to a removable, nonvolatile optical disk 156 such as a CD ROM or other optical media.
- removable/non-removable, volatile/nonvolatile computer storage media that can be used in the exemplary operating environment include, but are not limited to, magnetic tape cassettes, flash memory cards, digital versatile disks, digital video tape, solid state RAM, solid state ROM, and the like.
- the hard disk drive 141 is typically connected to the system bus 121 through an non-removable memory interface such as interface 140
- magnetic disk drive 151 and optical disk drive 155 are typically connected to the system bus 121 by a removable memory interface, such as interface 150 .
- the drives and their associated computer storage media discussed above and illustrated in FIG. 1, provide storage of computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules and other data for the computer 110 .
- hard disk drive 141 is illustrated as storing operating system 144 , application programs 145 , other program modules 146 , and program data 147 .
- operating system 144 application programs 145 , other program modules 146 , and program data 147 are given different numbers here to illustrate that, at a minimum, they are different copies.
- a user may enter commands and information into the computer 110 through input devices such as a keyboard 162 and pointing device 161 , commonly referred to as a mouse, trackball or touch pad.
- Other input devices may include a microphone, joystick, game pad, satellite dish, scanner, or the like.
- These and other input devices are often connected to the processing unit 120 through a user input interface 160 that is coupled to the system bus 121 , but may be connected by other interface and bus structures, such as a parallel port, game port or a universal serial bus (USB).
- a monitor 191 or other type of display device is also connected to the system bus 121 via an interface, such as a video interface 190 .
- computers may also include other peripheral output devices such as speakers 197 and printer 196 , which may be connected through an output peripheral interface 195 .
- a camera 163 (such as a digital/electronic still or video camera, or film/photographic scanner) capable of capturing a sequence of images 164 can also be included as an input device to the personal computer 110 . Further, while just one camera is depicted, multiple cameras could be included as input devices to the personal computer 110 . The images 164 from the one or more cameras are input into the computer 110 via an appropriate camera interface 165 .
- This interface 165 is connected to the system bus 121 , thereby allowing the images to be routed to and stored in the RAM 132 , or one of the other data storage devices associated with the computer 110 .
- image data can be input into the computer 110 from any of the aforementioned computer-readable media as well, without requiring the use of the camera 163 .
- the computer 110 may operate in a networked environment using logical connections to one or more remote computers, such as a remote computer 180 .
- the remote computer 180 may be a personal computer, a server, a router, a network PC, a peer device or other common network node, and typically includes many or all of the elements described above relative to the computer 110 , although only a memory storage device 181 has been illustrated in FIG. 1.
- the logical connections depicted in FIG. 1 include a local area network (LAN) 171 and a wide area network (WAN) 173 , but may also include other networks.
- LAN local area network
- WAN wide area network
- Such networking environments are commonplace in offices, enterprise-wide computer networks, intranets and the Internet.
- the computer 110 When used in a LAN networking environment, the computer 110 is connected to the LAN 171 through a network interface or adapter 170 .
- the computer 110 When used in a WAN networking environment, the computer 110 typically includes a modem 172 or other means for establishing communications over the WAN 173 , such as the Internet.
- the modem 172 which may be internal or external, may be connected to the system bus 121 via the user input interface 160 , or other appropriate mechanism.
- program modules depicted relative to the computer 110 may be stored in the remote memory storage device.
- FIG. 1 illustrates remote application programs 185 as residing on memory device 181 . It will be appreciated that the network connections shown are exemplary and other means of establishing a communications link between the computers may be used.
- the person who is producing the presentation (hereinafter the “user”) is presented with a template selection window, which is typically displayed on the screen of the computing device hosting the production tool program.
- the template selection window provides one or more layouts for the presentation that is to be created.
- the layout of the presentation refers to where in the presentation window the video is displayed, where the presentation slides are displayed, where a contents section is displayed and so on.
- the layouts correspond to various templates that in essence are custom XSLT files with supporting script and XML. These templates are designed to render a particular presentation window configuration capable of playing a presentation and interacting with the viewer, once populated with media components and scheduling data.
- buttons 202 , 204 are mutually exclusive in that when one is selected the other is not.
- the local button 204 When the local button 204 is selected, only the layouts associated with those templates residing in the memory of the host computer are presented for the user's selection. If, however, the server button 202 is selected, and the host computer is connected to a network, the presentation production system will find templates stored on remote servers accessible from the network and which are listed in a configuration file found in the system's root directory. The layouts of the templates found in this search are then presented to the user. It is noted that if the host computer is “offline”, the local templates are displayed by default.
- the layouts of the local or remotely-located templates are presented to the user in the layout display sector 206 of the template window 200 .
- the layout display sector 206 has a separate horizontal strip 208 dedicated to each available template, with the strips being stacked vertically.
- a standard graphic user interface (GUI) scroll bar 210 is provided at one side of the display sector 206 to allow the user to scroll up or down to view all the layout strips 208 if there are too many available to fit them all in the vertical space allotted to the sector.
- Each layout strip 208 includes a series of columns providing information about the associated template. The first column provides a thumbnail image 212 of the layout associated with the template. Thus, the user can see in miniature what the presentation window would look like if that template were chosen.
- the second column has the title “Name” above it in a descriptor bar 214 residing at the top of the layout display sector 206 .
- This name column 216 provides the name given the template.
- This description column 218 provides a brief description of the template. The description could include a list of features offered in the template, or this information could be placed in a separate “Features” column (not shown).
- the last column in the example of the layout display sector 206 shown in FIG. 2, is entitled “Author” in the descriptor bar 214 .
- the author column 220 provides information about the person or group that created the template.
- the layout thumbnail and other information that is used to populate the columns of each layout strip 208 is parsed from metadata stored in the file containing the template. In the case of a remotely stored template, only the data needed to populate the layout strip 208 is downloaded prior to the user selecting that template.
- the template metadata is created by the author of the template, and could included additional information that can be incorporated into an existing column or placed in a new column, as desired. It is not intended to limit the present system to just those informational columns described above. Rather any number of columns can be added as desired. If the horizontal space allotted to the layout display sector is inadequate to display the entire layout strip, a scroll bar would be added at the top or bottom to allow the user to scroll and reveal any information that will not fit.
- An instruction bar 222 is located just below the layout display sector 206 .
- This bar 222 provides information and tips to the user on how to proceed with the template selection process.
- the template selection window 200 is shown as it would exist before a template has been selected.
- the instruction bar 222 states “Select a Template from the choices above”, thereby aiding the user in determining what to do next.
- the user can be given access to a standard help directory (not shown) to obtain further assistance.
- the user chooses the particular layout that he or she wishes to use in creating a presentation and selects the associated layout strip 208 .
- the selection procedure entailed placing the screen cursor over the layout strip 208 of the desired layout and “single clicking” an input device.
- the layout strip 208 is highlighted, the name of the selected template appears in a name field 224 located below the layout display sector 206 and prospective download location is provided in a location field 226 located just below the name field 224 .
- the name appearing in the name field 224 is the name that will be given to the presentation project. While it is initially filled with the name of the selected template, the user can change it to any name he or she desires.
- the prospective download location is initially set to a prescribed default.
- the default download location was the “My Mitts” folder in the “My Documents” directory of the “E” drive of the host computer.
- the download location refers to where the data constituting the selected template will be stored. The user can change this as well.
- a standard browse button 228 is provided to the right of the location field 226 to assist the user in specifying an alternate download location if desired.
- a “Project” line 230 Just below the location field 226 is . When a template is selected this line states that the project will be created at the selected (or default) download location and that the template file will be given the selected name (or default template name).
- a template selection button 232 (appearing as the “OK” button in tested versions of the present system) is selected to download the template, as well as other supporting images, code, and media files to the selected build location. It is noted that the user can also select the “Cancel” button 234 at any time during the foregoing process to exit the template window 200 .
- the user can also be given access to a category filter—for example via a “Category” button that would open a drop-down list specifying particular categories of templates.
- the user accesses this list prior to selecting a template and selects one of the categories.
- a category filter for example via a “Category” button that would open a drop-down list specifying particular categories of templates.
- the user accesses this list prior to selecting a template and selects one of the categories.
- only those templates fitting the selected categories will remain in the layout display sector.
- some templates might be design for training presentations and could be categorized under a “training category”.
- Other might be design for business presentations and be categorized under a “business” category.
- the author of the template would be required to specify in the metadata associated with the template file what prescribed category or categories apply to the template.
- the presentation tool window is opened and replaces the template window on the user's display screen.
- An example of such a window is provided in FIG. 3. This exemplary production tool window is used to define the layout and features of the presentation being created.
- a short-cut bar 316 Overlying the aforementioned sectors is a short-cut bar 316 displaying various icons for performing standard operations such as opening a presentation file, saving a file, cutting, copying and pasting, and the like, and finally above that is a menu bar 318 for accessing drop-down menu lists.
- Most of the commands found in these drop-down lists are simply alternate ways of accomplishing certain actions that will be described in the sections to follow, and so will not be expounded upon herein. However, those functions contained in the drop-down lists that are not redundant will be fully described in these sections.
- the project file section is used to enter the media components of the presentation, such as a video or audio program, electronic presentation slides (which are often referred to as the slide deck), demonstrations, documents, HTML files, or animation files (e.g., Flash files).
- the project file sector displays the components in a file tree format to the user.
- the process of entering the media components starts with the user entering a video or audio program into the presentation production system to create a “Media” file.
- This file acts not only as the audio-visual or audio portion of the presentation, but also becomes the master track of the presentation from which all the other media elements are scheduled.
- all indexing, timing, and associated master track metadata are stored in the media file as well, as will be explained in more detail later.
- the file containing the video or audio track that is to become the foundation for the presentation's media file can be entered in a number of ways.
- the user can select the media folder icon and label 404 in the project file sector (as best seen in the enlarged view of the sector 400 provided in FIG. 4.)
- the user selected the media folder was by placing the screen cursor over the icon or label and “double-clicking” with the input device.
- a standard open file dialog box 500 appears over at least a portion of the tool window.
- the user employs the dialog box 500 to find and select the file associated with the video or audio program that is to become part of the media file. This is accomplished in the typical manner, and can include files stored locally on the host computer or remote files accessible via a network connection. For instance, in the example depicted in FIG. 5, the user has specified the folder entitled “MITT2TEST_CONTENT” in the “Look in” field 502 .
- This folder contained a demo folder and a video file designated as “d201.wmv”, both of which are listed in the dialog box's display area 504 .
- the “Files of Type” field 506 lists only those prescribed types of files that are acceptable for entry into the media file, thereby acting as a filter for the file types the system can handle.
- these file types included .asf, .wmv, and .wma files.
- the system can be readily adapted to handle any file type designed for video or audio files, and is not limited to just those employed in the tested versions.
- the presentation production system copies this file into the system.
- the file tree in the project file sector is updated to display the video or audio file under the media file folder.
- the media folder 404 associated with the presentation project 402 named “test2342334” has the aforementioned video file 406 entitled “d201.wmv” associated with it.
- the user might want to enter a lower bandwidth version of a video file, or video or audio files of the same subject but in different languages.
- more than one video or audio file can be entered in the media folder, only one of the files can be the master track.
- the user must designate one of them as the master track file.
- the selected file then appears highlighted in the project file sector tree, or visually distinguished in some way (e.g., special icon, check marked, etc.).
- the user also enters a presentation slide file into a presentation slide folder 408 (which is entitled PowerPoint referring to Microsoft Corporation's PowerPoint® presentation graphics program in the example project file sector depicted in FIG. 4.). This is accomplished in the same way it was when the user entered the video or audio file into the media folder.
- the project file tree indicates that the user entered a presentation slide file 410 entitled “d201.ppt”.
- more than one presentation slide file could also be entered in the Slide folder 408 .
- the user might want to have presentation slides in different languages. As will be described later, the display of the presentation slides is timed based on what part of the master track file is being played.
- the user can optionally enter various demonstration, document, HTML and animation files which are automatically called and displayed over at least a portion of the presentation window, or are made accessible to the viewer of the presentation.
- the user can enter one or more demonstrations which are, for example, video or audio files.
- These demonstration video or audio programs are typically scheduled (as will be described later) to be played at some elapsed time of the master track program.
- a particular elapse time of the master track program is reached, it is paused and the demonstration video or audio clip is played. Once the demonstration clip is completed, the master track resumes playing.
- the user enters demonstration files in the same way he or she entered media or presentation slide files, except the demonstration files are entered into the demos folder 412 in the project file sector 400 .
- the user entered five separate demonstration files 414 , 416 , 418 , 420 , 422 , named “demo1.wmv” through “demo5.wmv”, respectively.
- the user can also enter document files in the documents folder 424 , HTML files in the HTML folder 426 and animation files in the Flash folder 428 in the project file sector.
- FIG. 4 shows a “Word” file 430 (i.e., a document file generated by Microsoft Corporation's Word® word processing program) named “d201_transcript_final.doc” that is entered in the documents folder 424 . It is noted that the example shown in FIG. 4 does not show any HTML or animation files that were entered by the user.
- the project file sector does more than just provide a quick and user friendly way of entering the media elements of the presentation being created. It also provides a convenient graphic representation of the media elements and their locations via the file tree format.
- the user can expand and collapse the various folders to show all the files in a folder or just the folder icon and label. This is done using the boxed plus signs and minus signs adjacent the folder icons. Essentially, a user can expand a contracted folder by “clicking on” the boxed plus sign that will be displayed adjacent the folder icon when files exist in the folder which are not currently displayed in the tree. Likewise, if the user wants to reduce the complexity of the tree display, he or she can collapse folders that have their associated files displayed by “clicking on” the boxed minus sign displayed adjacent the folder icon to hide the file designators.
- the video preview sector is generally used to provide a playback of the video presentation or audio program. Whenever the user enters a video or audio file into the media folder and the file is designated as the master track, it is presented in the video preview sector. It is noted that in tested versions of the present presentation production system, the first video or audio file entered into the media folder was presumed to be the master track and so was automatically displayed in the video preview sector. However, if a later-entered file is designated as the master track, that video or audio file would be presented in the video preview sector in place of the initially-entered program. More particularly, as best seen in the enlarged view of the video preview sector 600 shown in FIG. 6, the video or audio file designated as the master track is displayed in a playback space 602 .
- a video is presented in the preview sector by statically displaying the first frame of the video program.
- the playback space of the preview sector could be left blank (typically all black), or a predetermined visual frame or effect could be employed.
- the playback space could display an image reading “Audio Only”, both initially and throughout the playback of the program.
- a prescribed animation sequence could be presented in the playback space 602 during the playback of an audio program. In this case, initially the first frame of the animation sequence would be statically displayed in the playback space 602 .
- the video preview sector 600 also includes control buttons 604 for controlling the playback of the video or audio program. While the number of control buttons 604 can vary, they preferably at least include buttons for playing, pausing, “rewinding”, and “advancing” the video, as shown in the exemplary view of the preview sector 600 shown in FIG. 6. Other buttons to control features such as muting the audio track of a video program, returning to the beginning of the video or audio program, and the like, can be included as well. The viewer selects the control functions by selecting the appropriate button 604 (e.g., via a “single-click” maneuver).
- the video preview sector 600 also includes a counter 606 showing both elapsed time from the beginning of the video or audio presentation and the total running time of the program.
- this counter took the form of “XX:XX:XX/XX:XX:XX”, where the numbers before the slash represent the hours, minutes and seconds respectively of the elapsed time, and the numbers to the right of the slash represent the hours, minutes and seconds of the total running time.
- the presentation slide preview sector is generally used to display the presentation slides associated with the selected slide file entered into the presentation slide folder.
- thumbnail images of each slide are generated and the thumbnail associated with the first slide is displayed in a slide display area 702 of the sector.
- Control buttons 704 are included to allow the user to move forward and backward through the slide deck with the currently selected slide being displayed in the display area 702 .
- a presentation slide counter 706 is also provided in the presentation slide preview sector.
- this slide counter 706 took the form of “SLIDE XX OF XX”, where the first number refers to the sequence number of the presentation slide then displayed and the second number refers to the total number of slides in the slide deck.
- the presentation production system also includes a feature whereby “double-clicking” on a thumbnail of a slide displayed in the presentation slide preview sector launches the presentation slide creation program that was used to create it (assuming the program resides on or is accessible by the host computer), and opens the particular presentation slide file containing the displayed slide. In this way the user can readily edit the presentation slides.
- Closing the presentation slide creation program returns the user to the presentation production system's tool window.
- the playback of the master track video or audio program is paused whenever the user launches the presentation slide creation program to edit the slides.
- the presentation slide creation program's graphic user interface window or windows could also be displayed within the aforementioned working area, rather than in a window that overlies the presentation tool window. This creates the impression for the user of never having to leave the presentation tool and makes all the information displayed in the presentation tool window available to the user while editing the slides.
- the presentation tool window When the selected template files are downloaded and the presentation tool window is opened, the window is populated with that template's default information, including information about the template's features, color settings, export options, build options, and video/audio options.
- the presentation properties sector provides listings of these settings and option in series of property grids, and allows the user to modify them so as to customize the presentation.
- the presentation properties sector 800 of the presentation tool window has three tabs at the top—namely a template tab 802 , a metadata tab 804 and a player tab 806 . When one of these tabs is selected, the related settings and options associated with that tab are displayed in the properties display area 808 below. The settings and options associated with each of these tabs will now be described in the subsections to follow.
- the template editor property grid is accessed by selecting the aforementioned template tab.
- the template editor property grid is a display of the selected template's customizable attributes.
- the grid has two columns.
- the first column of each attribute line lists the name of the attribute, while the second column lists the current setting associated with that attribute.
- the name of the first-listed attribute is “Bookmarks” 818 and appears in the first column of the attribute line.
- the current setting associated with the “Bookmarks” attribute 818 is seen in the second column of the attribute line.
- This current setting 820 is “True” indicating that the bookmarks feature is active in the selected template. This bookmarks feature is described in the aforementioned co-pending application.
- the attributes list in the template editor property grid can be presented in two different formats.
- One of these formats which is not shown in FIG. 8A, is initiated by selecting the “AZ” logo 810 located just above the properties display area 808 .
- This format organizes the attributes in alphabetical order.
- the second format is the expandable table format.
- the expandable table format is the default format, and can be reinitiated if the list is in the alphabetical format by selecting the categorized table icon 812 . This is also the format depicted in FIG. 8A.
- the attributes are group together under expandable category headings. If the category is already expanded to show all its attribute lines, a boxed minus sign appears adjacent the category heading.
- Some of the attributes lines have the boxed plus sign displayed adjacent thereto. This indicates that there is a list of sub-attributes associated with the attribute. To view these additional sub-attributes, the user “clicks on” the boxed plus sign, and the table expands to include the aforementioned sub-attributes. This is shown in the enlarged view of the image heading 822 , shown in FIG. 8C. As can be seen, the logo attribute 824 , listed under the image heading 822 is expanded (as compared to the “Image” heading shown in FIG. 8A), and includes several sub-attributes, along with their current settings.
- an attribute line When expanded an attribute line will have a boxed minus sign displayed next to it, such as the one 826 shown adjacent the “logo” attribute 824 in FIG. 8C.
- the user selects this boxed minus sign to collapse the list of sub-attributes once he or she is finished viewing or modifying them.
- the template editor property grid can be a master list of all the templates attributes, whether editable or not, with the attributes that are not editable by the user being “grayed out”. Alternately, the template editor property grid could just list those attributes that are editable by the user.
- any attribute associated with the color of a portion of the presentation window included a small rectangular color patch in the current setting column (along with a standard color code) depicting the current color setting. This can be seen in FIG. 8B where the attributes 830 listed under the color scheme heading 828 each have such a color patch 832 shown in the current setting column of the attribute line.
- a pop-up window appears over the presentation tool window showing a color pallet (i.e., typically a grid of color patches each showing a different color).
- the user can then select a color from the color pallet and the selected color becomes the current setting for the attribute under consideration.
- the pop-up window closes and the selected color appears in the form of the aforementioned color patch in the current setting column of the attribute.
- Another way a user changes some of the editable attributes in the template editor property grid is to first select the attribute that it is desired to change. This causes the column of the attribute line containing the name of the selected attribute to become highlighted, as shown in FIG. 8B where the “Bookmarks” attribute 818 has been selected.
- a down arrow 834 also appear at one end of the column of the attribute line containing the attribute's current setting. The user selects the down arrow 834 , and a drop-down list appears over the presentation tool window. This drop-down list is a list of optional settings that the user can choose from to customize the elected attribute.
- the user simply selects the desired option from the drop-down list and closes the list by selecting the down arrow once again. It is noted that when a user selects an attribute, a description of that attribute may appear in the attribute description area 836 just below the properties display area 808 .
- Examples of the type of attributes that can be modified using the template editor property grid include the templates color scheme, layout features, fonts, images, presentation slide export and thumbnail options, as well as video and audio playback options.
- FIGS. 8 A-C show some of the specific attributes that can be associated with the foregoing general attribute categories, depending on the particulars of the selected template.
- the metadata property grid 900 is accessed by selecting the aforementioned metadata tab 902 .
- This grid 900 is a display of informational items that are embedded into the presentation data file that defines the presentation being created. This information can be parsed from the file and used in a variety of ways.
- the metadata can include keywords to assist a search engine in finding the file.
- an enterprise's intranet regulations may require certain information about any file transferred or made available on the network include certain information about the file, such as the author, its origin, etc. In the present case, the required data is simply included in the presentation file's metadata so as to be available for inspection.
- the metadata is added to the presentation file by the user entering the data into the appropriate column of the metadata property grid 900 , which is displayed in the display area 904 of the presentation properties sector.
- the grid 900 itself is organized much like the template editor property grid in that metadata titles 906 appear in the first column of each data line and the data associated with the title appears in the second column 908 of the line.
- the metadata titles 906 can be displayed in alphabetical order by selecting the “AZ” button 910 , or as a categorized list with category headers in an expandable table format.
- the categories of the expandable table can be expanded or collapsed by selecting an adjacently displayed boxed plus or minus sign, respectively.
- the table format is the default format for the metadata property grid
- a categorized table icon 912 is included to switch back from the alphabetical listing mode.
- the particular metadata titles that are included in the metadata list are part of the template data that is populated into the metadata property grid when the presentation tool window is first opened.
- This default metadata listing which appears in the grid when the user selects the metadata tab 902 , can be the only data list associated with the selected template, or it can be one among multiple listings. If there are more than one set of metadata listings provided in the template data, the alternate sets can be accessed via the schema field 914 .
- the schema field 914 displays the title given to the metadata listing that is currently active in the metadata property grid, unless there is only one such listing and then the schema line can optionally be left blank, as it is in FIG. 9.
- the user can change from the default listing to another using the schema field 914 .
- the schema field 914 includes a drop-down list arrow 916 at one end. The user selects this arrow 916 and a drop-down list appears over the presentation tool window with a list of available metadata schemas. The user can select one of schemas, and upon closing the drop-down window, the metadata titles associated with the selected schema appear in the metadata property grid 900 .
- the template data can include default data selections (not shown) associated with a metadata topic. This default data is populated into the grid when the grid is opened, just like the metadata titles. Thus, the default data selection will appear in the second column of a metadata line.
- the default selection may be the only choice for a particular metadata item, or it can be one of many pre-defined choices. If the default selection is the only pre-defined choice, the user can change it by selecting the column containing the default choice and manually entering in the desired data, e.g., by using a keyboard connected to the host computer.
- the data column of a metadata line can include a drop-down list arrow (not shown), which the user selects to open a drop-down list of the available choices. The user can then select one of the choices and upon closing the drop-down list, the selected data will appear in the data column of the metadata line.
- the user would want metadata included in the presentation data file defining the presentation being created that is in a language other than English, or in more than one language.
- the template data can include a default language choice.
- the chosen language appears in the language field 920 .
- the language field 920 indicates that the chosen language for the metadata is English. If the user wants to specify metadata in a language other than the default language, he or she selects the drop-down list arrow 922 residing at the side of the language field 920 . The user selects the arrow 922 to open a drop-down list of the available language choices.
- the user can then select one of the choices and upon closing the drop-down list, the selected language will appear in the language field 920 .
- the user then enters the metadata as described previously, except in the selected language.
- the metadata portion of the presentation data file incorporates metadata of different languages by including a language designator key with the data.
- the player property grid 1000 is accessed by selecting the aforementioned player tab 1002 .
- This grid 1000 is a display of both informational and editable items associated with the master track video or audio media file discussed previously. This data is ultimately stored in both the presentation data file and in the media file.
- the grid 1000 is organized like the template editor and metadata property grids. Specifically, labels 1006 appear in the first column of each data line and the data associated with the label appears in the second column 1008 of the line.
- the labels 1006 can be displayed in alphabetical order by selecting the “AZ” button 1010 , or as a categorized list with category headers in an expandable table format that possesses the capability to expand or collapses using the previously-described boxed plus or minus signs. Also as before, while the table format is the default format for the player property grid, a categorized table button 1012 is included to switch back from the alphabetical listing mode.
- the labels included in the player property grid come from the template data that is populated into the grid when the presentation tool window is first opened.
- the informational data items associated with those player attributes that are not editable are shown in the grid (in “grayed out” form), as are any default data selections associated with a player attribute that is editable.
- the default selections may be the only choice for a particular data item, or it can be one of many pre-defined choices. If the default selection is the only predefined choice, the user can change it by selecting the column 1008 containing the default choice and manually entering in the desired data, e.g., by using a keyboard connected to the host computer.
- the data column 1008 of a metadata line can include a drop-down list arrow (not shown), which the user selects to open a drop-down list of the available choices. The user can then select one of the choices and upon closing the drop-down list, the selected data will appear in the data column 1008 of the player attribute line.
- the user can enter the called-for data by selecting the empty column 1008 adjacent a metadata title in the grid. A text cursor will appear in the column 1008 and the user enters the required data, e.g., using a keyboard.
- the player property grid includes editable attributes that allow a user to adjust the playback size, dimensions and quality of the master track.
- data lines allowing the user to enter the author's name, a description and title of the video or audio program, its copyright and its rating, can be included as shown in FIG. 10.
- the “Data Entry” grids allow the user to enter scheduling information into the presentation production system's presentation data file and the master track media file to drive the timeline of the presentation. The following sections will described each of these scheduling grids and how they are used.
- the scripts grid 1100 is essentially a scheduling table where the user enters events (sometimes referred to as script commands) that will be triggered during the playback of the presentation. Every line in the table corresponds to a scheduled event in reference to the master track's timeline. There are three columns in each event line. The first column of each event line, which is under the header 1102 titled “Time Code”, specifies the time an event is to take place. The event lines are sorted in order of the time code starting with the earliest event scheduled.
- the specified time corresponds to the elapse time of the master track.
- the second column of each event line which is under the header 1104 titled “Script Type”, specifies the type of event that is to occur.
- the third column is under the header 1106 titled “Script Param”, which is short for script parameter.
- the script parameter is a variable field that can contain any UNICODE data that should be passed to the template with the script command to implement the associated event. Typically, this will be a reference to the specific resource desired, such as a presentation slide number that is to be displayed, a file name of a file that is to be opened, or the address of a site that is to be contacted.
- script types these can include events such as changing the presentation slide displayed (which in tested versions of the presentation production system were called out as script type “Slide” in the grid), launching a demonstration video or audio program (which in tested versions of the system were called out as script type “Demo” in the grid), and various other custom code call events (which in tested versions of the system were called out as script type “Script” in the grid).
- custom events can include opening a document, HTML or animation file (e.g., pausing the presentation and opening the designated file in a separate window), opening a URL (e.g., opening a web browser to the URL which in turn pauses the presentation and opens a separate browser window), accessing a web service (e.g., contacts a web service that logs the status of the presentation to provide statistical data to the presentation's creator on it use), opening another presentation, stopping the presentation, among others.
- opening a document, HTML or animation file e.g., pausing the presentation and opening the designated file in a separate window
- opening a URL e.g., opening a web browser to the URL which in turn pauses the presentation and opens a separate browser window
- accessing a web service e.g., contacts a web service that logs the status of the presentation to provide statistical data to the presentation's creator on it use
- opening another presentation stopping the presentation, among others.
- the selected template must be designed to respond to the event and recognize the script type
- the presentation receives the “Script Type” and the “Script Param” at a specified time code corresponding to a point in the timeline of the playback of the presentation.
- the presentation responds accordingly by changing the presentation slide displayed, or by launching a demonstration video, and so on.
- the user can enter scheduling information into the Scripts grid in a variety of ways.
- One of these ways is via a manual entry process. This process begins with the user starting the master track video or audio program. The program is started using the aforementioned player control buttons of the video preview sector.
- the master track video or audio program reaches a point where the user wants to insert an event of some type, the user pauses the program using the pause button of the video preview sector (or by some other appropriate method such as depressing a so-called hot key on a keyboard connected to the host computer that has been configured to pause the program).
- the user enters the script type, script parameter, and optionally the time code.
- the presentation production system can be configured to enter the time code automatically.
- the time code appears in the time code field 1108 . If the time code is not set to be entered automatically, the user enters it in the time code field (e.g., by using a keyboard connected to the host computer). The user can read the time code that needs to be entered from the elapse time counter in the video preview sector. In either case, the time code corresponds the elapse time of the master track program and takes the form of “XX:XX:XX:X” referring to the hours, minutes, seconds and tenths of a second, respectively.
- the user enters the script type either by entering it manually in the script type field 1110 (e.g., using the aforementioned keyboard), or by selecting the drop-down list arrow 1112 at the side of the script type field and then selecting the desired script type from the drop-down list that appears.
- the drop-down list disappears and the selected script type appears in the script type field 1110 .
- the user enters the appropriate script parameter in the script param field 1114 , and then selects the “Add Script Command” button 1116 .
- the button 1116 the new script command is entered and the entered data appears as a new event line in the scripts grid 1100 in the appropriate place.
- An alternate way for the user to enter scheduling information of the type described above is by importing a pre-defined script.
- the predefined script is simply a text file (i.e., .txt file) formatted in the same way as the scripts grid with separate event lines each made up of a time code designation, script type and script parameter.
- FIG. 12A An example of such a script file is shown in FIG. 12A.
- the user selects the File menu button of the presentation tool window (see 320 of FIG. 3) which results in the appearance of a drop-down list of commands.
- the user selects the “Import” command from the list, which in turn causes a sub-list to appear that includes a “Script File” element.
- the user selects the “Script File” element and a standard open file window appears.
- the user employs this window to find and select the text file containing the pre-defined script.
- the list is then imported and the script command data appears in the scripts grid.
- timing data can be specified. This timing data is then included in the presentation slide file and can be parsed for use by the presentation production system, assuming the timing data is in the proper format as described above and relates to the elapse time of the master track program. Should this be the case, the system can be readily configured to recognize the existence of the timing data in the presentation slide file when it is entered and to automatically generate script commands and enter the data in the scripts grid by listing the time code and slide number along with identifying the event as a slide change (i.e., specifying the script type as Slide).
- the script type field 1306 has a drop-down list arrow 1310 that the user can select and then choose a script type from the resulting drop-down list.
- the save button 1312 to implement the changes in the script grid. It is also possible to delete an event line by selecting it in the scripts grid and then entering a delete command (such as by using the delete key on a keyboard of the host computer). If, however, the user decides not to make any changes to the selected event line, he or she can select the cancel button 1314 . In either case, the pop-up window 1300 disappears.
- scripts grid is automatically placed in the work sector when the master track is designated, it can also be called up by selecting the scripts tab 1118 shown in FIG. 11. This is useful when the user is working in one of the other data entry grids, and wishes to return to the scripts grid to view or edit the scheduled events.
- the markers grid is essentially used to create and edit a table of contents for the presentation. In this way, major divisions or events along the timeline can be titled for fast navigation and indexing to that time code. Typical presentations include a marker for each major slide change, or change in topic within the presentation. In addition, subtopics can be marked and arranged into hierarchies under the contents tab, as will be discussed shortly. Referring to FIG. 14, the markers grid 1400 is accessed by selecting the marker tab 1402 .
- the grid 1400 is simply a table of marker entries each having a titled time code column 1404 and a titled marker text column 1406 . The marker entries are created and edited in the same ways as the event lines in the scripts grid.
- the user can enter the marker entries manually by pausing the master track program at the point where he or she wants to insert a marker, and then entering the marker text into the marker text field 1408 .
- the time code is not automatically entered, the user enters it into the time code field 1410 .
- the user selects the “Add Marker” button 1412 .
- the data is entered and appears as a new marker entry in the markers grid 1400 in the appropriate time-ordered place.
- the user can import the marker information as a pre-defined list.
- the marker list can be a text file (i.e., .txt file) formatted in the same way as the markers grid with separate marker entries each made up of a time code designation and marker text.
- FIG. 12B An example of such a contents marker file is shown in FIG. 12B.
- the user selects the File menu button of the presentation tool window (see 320 of FIG. 3) and then selects the “Import” command.
- the user next selects the “Marker File” element from the sub-list display, and uses the resulting open file window to find and select the text file containing the pre-defined marker list.
- the list is then imported and appears in the markers grid.
- the marker entries are edited as with the event lines in the Scripts grid by first selecting the line in the marker grid.
- a marker entry pop-up window 1500 appears with the marker data of the selected entry appearing in the appropriate places in the window 1500 .
- the time code appears in the time code field 1502
- the marker text appears in the marker text field 1504 .
- the user can then change the marker data by selecting and overtyping the existing data.
- the save button 1506 to implement the changes. It is also possible to delete a marker entry by selecting it in the markers grid and then entering a delete command (such as by using the delete key on a keyboard of the host computer). Or, if the user decides not to make any changes, he or she can select the cancel button 1508 . In either case, the pop-up window 1500 disappears.
- the transcription grid is used to enter and edit a transcript of the audio portion of the master track for optional display during the presentation. Further, alternate transcriptions in different languages can be entered using the transcription grid.
- the transcription grid 1600 is accessed by selecting the transcription tab 1602 .
- the grid 1600 is a table of transcription segments displayed in a column titled “Transcription Text” 1606 with an adjacent time code listed in a “Time Code” column 1604 .
- the transcription segments can be of any length, such as a phrase, sentence, block of text, paragraph, or even a large section of text.
- the transcript entries can be entered and edited manually as follows.
- the user first pauses the master track program at the point where he or she wants to insert a transcription segment.
- the user employs a language field (not shown) to specify the language of the transcription text being entered.
- the presentation production system can store multiple language transcriptions, indexed by a language key, into the final presentation data file.
- the language field works in the same way as that employed in the previously described metadata property grid. Specifically, the default language is English. However, the user can select an alternate language designation by selecting a drop-down list arrow located at the end of the language field to reveal a list of languages to choose from. The user selects the desired language and the drop-down list closes with the selected language designation being displayed in the Language field.
- the user After the language has been designated by either entering a new language designation or maintaining the default English language designation, the user, enters the text of the transcription segment into the transcription text field 1608 . In addition, if the time code is not automatically entered, the user enters it into the time code field 1610 . The user then selects the “Add Text” button (not shown), which causes the data to be entered and appear as a new transcript entry in the transcription grid 1600 in the appropriate time-ordered place.
- An alternate and perhaps more practical method of entering the transcript data because of its speed involves importing a previously compiled text-based transcription file. Any human-readable Unicode formatted file type could the used as the transcription file, as long as it is laid out as discrete entries each having a time code and associated transcription text.
- the user To import a transcription file, the user first uses the aforementioned language field (not shown) to specify the language of the transcription text being imported. After the language has been designated by either entering a new language designation or maintaining the default English language designation, the user selects the file menu button of the presentation tool window (see 320 of FIG. 3) and then selects the “Import” command.
- the user next selects the “Transcription File” element from the sub-list display, and uses the resulting Open File window to find and select the file containing the transcription entries.
- the transcription entries are then parsed from the imported file and become part of the presentation production system file. In addition, the transcription entries are displayed in the transcription grid.
- the transcription entries are edited in the same way as the event lines in the scripts grid and the marker entries in the marker grid—namely by first selecting the entry in the transcription grid that is to be modified.
- a transcription entry pop-up window 1700 appears with the transcription text and time code of the selected entry appearing in the appropriate places in the window 1700 .
- the time code appears in the time code field 1702
- the transcription text appears in the transcription text field 1704 .
- the user can then change the transcription entry data by selecting and overtyping the existing data. Once the desired changes have been made, the user selects the save button 1706 to implement the changes in the transcription grid.
- the transcription grid also includes two additional functions. The first involves correcting for an offset time code. Sometimes when a transcription file is employed to enter the transcription data, the time codes specified in the file will be offset by some amount of time from the actual timeline of the presentation's master track program. This is often the case when the transcript file is created by logging the entries from an audio tape. An offset condition may also occur in imported scripts and marker entry files (although typically less often). To synchronize the transcript (or script or table of contents) to the master track program, an offset time code correction module is included in the presentation production system. This module is initiated by the user selecting the Tools menu button of the presentation tool window (see 322 of FIG. 3) and then selecting the “Offset Timecode” command.
- the offset time code window 1800 is shown in FIG. 18. To use the window 1800 , the user selects the blank “Apply To:” square next to the type of entry involved. Thus, if the imported transcript file's time codes are skewed, the user would select the “Transcript” square 1802 . Likewise, if it is imported script commands or marker entries that are skewed, the user would select either the “Scripts Command” square 1804 or the “Markers” square 1806 . A check mark will appear in the selected “Apply To:” square. Next, the user enters the amount of time the time codes specified in the offending imported file are offset from the actual timeline of the master track program.
- This offset can be determined by viewing the master track program and comparing its elapse time counter to the time codes listed in the work sector for the script, markers or transcript as the case may be. Alternately, in the case of a time-skewed transcript file, it is noted that a transcript of a presentation will typically start at time zero (i.e., time code 00:00:00:0). If the first transcript entry in the imported transcript file does not start at time zero, then the amount of the offset is simply the time code that is listed for this first entry. Further, the presentation production system can be configured to alert a user that the first entry in an imported transcript file does not begin at time zero and offer to correct the offset automatically.
- the user enters it into the “Enter Offset in TimeCode” field 1808 of the Offset Time Code window 1800 .
- This is accomplished via a select and overtype method, or by using the standard increase/decrease arrows 1810 , 1812 included in each segment of the field 1808 .
- the segments of the “Enter Offset in TimeCode” field 1808 correspond to the hour/minute/second/tenths of second time code format (i.e., XX:XX:XX:X).
- the user specifies whether the entered offset is to be subtracted or added to the time codes listed in the applicable imported file before being saved into the presentation data file and displayed in the work sector.
- the Offset Time Code window closes and the offsets are implemented. It is noted that the user can also exit the offset time code window without implementing an offset by selecting the “Cancel” button 1818 .
- the second of the additional functions associated with the Transcription grid involves customizing how the transcript data is displayed in the presentation.
- a user can tag the transcript data with HTML or XML tags to modify the display of the information in the finalized presentation.
- HTML or XML tags to modify the display of the information in the finalized presentation.
- a user can tag a transcript line with a custom XML tag like:
- the presentation system Upon displaying the transcript in the finalized presentation, the presentation system will parse this line of a transcript segment and alter the appearance of that segment of the transcript within the transcription window in accordance with the tag instructions.
- the contents/links editor is used for viewing and editing the hierarchy of a table of contents of the presentation, as well for adding links at a global, marker or presentation slide level.
- the contents/links editor is accessed by selecting the contents tab 324 .
- the aforementioned work sector 310 displays a two-part editor view. This two-part editor view is depicted in FIG. 19.
- the left side of the view depicts a hierarchical table of contents tree 1900 showing each topic and subtopic of the presentation and the presentations slides that are displayed while the particular topic or subtopic is being presented.
- the topics and subtopics are the markers entered in the markers grid that were discussed previously.
- One purpose of the table of contents tree 1900 is to provide a graphical representation of the flow of the presentation, and especially the hierarchy of the topics being discussed.
- the markers are entered in the markers grid, there is no provision for specifying their hierarchy.
- all the topics are depicted as having equal status.
- a user placed the screen cursor over the marker whose hierarchy was to be changes and then performed a “right-click” to make the action list appear in a pop-up window.
- the user then selected either the increase indent or decrease indent command to change the hierarchy of the selected marker in the tree.
- the markers “Does Not Compute” 1904 , “5 Common Upgrade Issues” 1906 , and “Variants” 1908 were originally all listed at the same level as the “Does Not Compute” 1904 .
- the user increased the indent of the “ 5 Common Upgrade Issues” 1906 marker one level to nest it in the subtopic level shown in FIG. 19.
- the user increased the indent of the “Variants” 1908 marker two levels to nest it in the sub-subtopic level shown in the figure.
- the presentation slides that are displayed during the presentation of these topics remain associated with the markers in the tree 1900 , even when the hierarchy of the tree is changed.
- the tree 1900 also has an expandable format. Specifically, if a marker having slides associated therewith is shown with the slide labels, a boxed minus sign 1918 appears adjacent the marker label. Selecting this boxed minus sign 1918 collapses the branch such that only the marker label is displayed, along with a boxed plus sign (not shown) which can be selected to expand the branch once again.
- the second purpose of the table of contents tree is to aid the user in establishing the links that will be listed in a links sector of the viewer's presentation window, and when.
- the user selects either the global links node 1902 , one of the marker nodes (e.g., marker 1904 ), or a slide node (e.g., slide 1910 ). If a link is added to the global node 1902 , the link will be displayed throughout the entire presentation. If the link is added to a marker node, it will be displayed in the presentation only while the topic associated with the marker is being presented. And finally, if a link is added to a slide node, it will be displayed in the presentation only during the time that the slide is displayed.
- the user To view existing links and add new ones to one of the tree nodes, the user employs the links grid 1912 on the left side of the work sector. To use the grid 1912 , the user first selects the node in the table of contents tree 1900 that he or she want to associate with a link as discussed above. This causes a list of the links currently associated with the selected node to appear in the Links grid 1912 . The link is identified by a link name listed under the column entitled “Display Text” 1914 . This is the name that is displayed in the link sector of the viewer's presentation window during the portion of the presentation corresponding to the selected node. In addition, a link is identified in the links grid by a URL address listed under the column entitled “URL” 1916 .
- the user To add a link to the selected node, the user enters the name of the link in the display text field 1922 located above the display text column 1914 , and enters the URL address of the link in the URL field 1920 located above the URL column 1916 .
- the user selects an “Add Link” button (not shown). This associates the link with the selected node and causes the link name to be displayed in the presentation window during the appropriate part of the presentation.
- the newly entered link will be displayed in the list of links associated with the selected node in the links grid 1912 .
- the links can also be edited. To accomplish this task, the user selects the global links node 1902 , a marker nodes or a slide node in the table of contents tree 1900 . This results in the list of existing links associated with the selected node being displayed in the links grid 1912 . The user then selects the link he or she wishes to change. A link pop-up window (not shown) appears with the name and URL of the selected link appearing in the appropriate places. Specifically, the link's name appears in a display text field, and the link's URL appears in the URL field. The user can then change the link data by selecting and overtyping the existing data. Once the desired changes have been made, the user selects a save button to implement the changes in the links grid.
- the presentation data file preview pane provides a listing to date of the underlying presentation data file that is being generated as the user creates a presentation with the present system.
- the presentation data file preview pane 2000 is accessed by selecting the presentation data file tab 2002 .
- the tab 2002 in FIG. 20 is labeled “XML”.
- the presentation production system displays the current listing 2004 of the presentation data file in the aforementioned work sector.
- a scroll bar 2006 is provided at one side of the work sector to allow the user to scroll through the entire file, which typically will be too long to display in its entirety within the vertical space allotted the work sector.
- a project builder module of the presentation production system takes all the data input by the user via the foregoing user interfaces and build a presentation package that can be run by the presentation viewer.
- the project builder module is invoked by the user selecting the build menu button of the presentation tool window (see 326 of FIG. 3) and then selecting either the “Build Project” command or the “Rebuild Project” command.
- the “Build Project” command is used to build new presentation packages and to re-build previous built and saved presentation packages that only have changes that can be made to the existing project file, such as changes in the template attributes or the events schedule.
- more extensive changes to an existing presentation package, particularly the introduction of a new presentation slide deck should be accomplished using the “Rebuild Project” command.
- the “Rebuild Project” command wipes out the existing project directory for the presentation package and creates a new one.
- an output panel is automatically displayed in the work sector.
- the output panel details build information and the status of each step in the build process. In addition, any errors encountered in the build process are reported for troubleshooting purposes.
- the output panel can also be accessed when the work area is being used for another function by the user selecting the output tab 2100 , as shown in FIG. 21. If the foregoing build process has not yet been attempted, the work sector of the presentation tool window will be blank when the output tab 2100 is selected. However, selecting the output tab subsequent to a build, results in the build and status information 2102 being displayed in the work sector, as depicted in FIG. 21.
- the preview display allows the user to view the presentation as it will appear to a viewer.
- selecting the preview tab 2200 causes the presentation production system to do a fast build and display the project 2202 within the work sector of the presentation tool window.
- the author can pause the preview using the pause button 2206 and restart the preview using the paly button 2204 .
- the author can then review the selections of color, font, layout, and timing that have been made to date.
- This allows the author to check the quality of and preview their work within the presentation production system itself, and to change it as needed.
- the user can pause the preview using the pause button 2206 therein, and go to the appropriate place to edit the attribute or event it is desired to change. After the desired changes are made, the user can select the preview tab 2200 once again to review the modifications.
- the visual timeline editor provides a graphic representation of the scheduled script commands, markers entries and transcription segments in a “visual” timeline format. As such, it allows the user to easily see these scheduled events without having to resort to the previously-described data grids. In addition, the timeline editor gives the user the capability to move the scheduled events right from the timeline, without having to go into the respective data entry grids.
- the aforementioned timeline 2300 is shown in FIG. 23.
- Near the top of the timeline 2300 is an elapsed time ruler 2302 .
- This ruler 2302 is graduated into equally-spaced time intervals starting with time code “00:00:00:0 and continuing to the end of the total presentation time.
- Just above the ruler are two sizing buttons.
- the first button 2304 is a boxed plus sign
- the second button 2306 is a boxed minus sign.
- the resolution of the ruler 2302 increases such that more of the presentation timeline is seen in the same horizontal space allotted to the timeline.
- the resolution of the ruler 2302 decreases such that less of the presentation timeline is shown.
- time code designations 2308 appear periodically at equal intervals along the ruler so that the user can determine where in the presentation timeline an event depicted below the ruler will occur. It is noted that the interval between these time code designations will increase as more of the timeline is shown, so that they can remain at a size that is legible to the user. In the view depicted in FIG.
- each graduation represented a two second interval and a time code designation was provided every 10 seconds.
- Below the ruler 2302 are three horizontal event scheduling bands.
- the first band 2310 depicts where a script command event will occur in the presentation timeline, whereas the second band 2312 and third band 2314 respectively depict where the aforementioned contents markers have been set and where each transcription segment begins.
- the script commands, markers and transcription segment starting points are represented by different icons.
- the icon 2316 shown in the scripts command band 2310 was used to represent a scripts command
- the icon 2318 shown in the markers band 2312 was used to represent a contents marker
- the icon 2320 shown in the transcription band 2314 was used to represent a transcription segment starting point.
- the timeline 2300 also includes a vertical bar 2322 representing the elapsed time of the presentation.
- this bar 2322 moves horizontally across the ruler 2302 and scheduling bands 2310 , 2312 , 2314 , showing the user the current elapsed time of the presentation and its relation to the scheduled events.
- the line 2322 stops moving and remains at a place representing the elapsed time of the program.
- the user can drag the bar 2322 back and forth along the timeline (e.g., using a standard graphical dragging procedure).
- the presentation production system jumps the master track program to the point corresponding to the elapsed time indicated by the line.
- the system causes the presentation slide displayed in the aforementioned presentation slide preview sector to change to the slide scheduled to be displayed at the elapsed time now indicated by the bar 2322 , assuming the bar passes a scheduled slide change as represented by the a script command icon 2316 appearing in the script command band 2310 .
- a presentation will typically be long enough that its entire timeline will not fit within the horizontal space allocated to the timeline 2300 , regardless of the sizing. Accordingly, a scroll bar 2324 is provided at the bottom of the timeline 2300 to bring into view hidden portions of the presentation timeline. It is noted that if the aforementioned vertical bar 2322 is dragged to the end of the displayed portion of the timeline 2300 , the view scrolls automatically such that the portions of the presentation timeline beyond that end are brought into view.
- the user is able to use the timeline editor to move through the presentation to review a place of interest. Further, the user can view the details of a scheduled event. Specifically, the user can place the screen cursor over an icon 2316 , 2318 , 2320 displayed in the timeline 2300 (i.e., a standard hover maneuver). This results in the appearance of a pop-up window that provides details about the event represented by an icon. For example, referring to FIG.
- a pop-up window 2402 appears that details the script type 2404 (e.g., slide), the time code associated with the event 2406 and the script parameter 2408 (e.g., [slide no.] 2).
- a thumbnail of the slide 2410 can be displayed in the pop-up window as well.
- FIG. 24B if the user hovers the cursor over a marker icon 2412 , a pop-up 2414 appears detailing the event type 2416 (namely “Marker”), the time code associated with the marker 2418 and the name of the marker 2420 (e.g., “ 5 Common Upgrades”).
- FIG. 24B if the user hovers the cursor over a marker icon 2412 , a pop-up 2414 appears detailing the event type 2416 (namely “Marker”), the time code associated with the marker 2418 and the name of the marker 2420 (e.g., “ 5 Common Upgrades”).
- FIG. 24B if the user hovers the cursor over a marker icon 2412 , a pop-up 24
- a pop-up 2424 appears detailing the event type 2426 (namely “Text” referring to transcription text),-the time code associated with transcription text 2428 and the first few words of the transcription text 2430 (e.g., “My name's Ed”).
- the user can select an icon 2316 , 2318 , 2320 in the timeline 2300 (e.g., via single-click maneuver). This results in the presentation production system displaying the data grid associated with the event represented by the selected icon in the work sector, with that event displayed and highlighted therein. In this way the user can view the full details associated with the event, rather than just the information that can fit in the pop-up.
- the user can also edit the presentation using the timeline editor. For example, the user can select and drag the script command, marker and transcription segment icons 2316 , 2318 , 2320 , within their respective bands 2310 , 2312 , 2314 to a new location in the presentation timeline.
- the presentation production system automatically update the time code associated with the event represented by the icon in the appropriate data grid, and revises the presentation data file to reflect the new schedule. For example, assume that the user repositions a script command icon 2316 representing the display of a particular presentation slide, to a location in the script command band 2310 corresponding to an earlier point in the presentation timeline.
- the presentation production system would respond by replacing the time code originally entered for that event with the time code associated with the icon's new position in the timeline 2300 .
- the user can do much more than just move events using the timeline editor.
- the user can edit the details of an event associated with an icon as well.
- One way of accomplishing this task is to select an icon 2316 , 2318 , 2320 in the timeline 2300 that it is desired to edit, as described above.
- the user can edit the event or any other associated event in the displayed data grid as described previously.
- a short-cut feature can also be invoked where the user selects an icon 2316 , 2318 , 2320 in the timeline 2300 using a double-click maneuver.
- Another way to edit the events represented by the icons 2316 , 2318 , 2320 in the timeline 2300 is using a standard “right clicking” maneuver on an icon to bring up a pop-up containing a context menu of available options for manipulating the event associated with the icon (and so the underlying data stored in the presentation data file and displayed in the associated data grid). For example, the user could delete an event associated with the icon directly from the pop-up menu, rather than having to do so in the data grid corresponding to that event. In such a case, the underlying presentation data file would be changed to eliminate the event, and the timeline and associated data grid would be altered to remove the event as well.
- the timeline could also include a band displaying thumbnails of certain frames of the master track program, assuming it is a video program.
- thumbnails of every tenth frame of the master track video program could be created via conventional techniques and displayed in the timeline (set to the appropriate size) in the aforementioned master track video frame band. More or fewer thumbnails would be displayed if the timeline is resized in its scope. These thumbnails would allow the user to more easily see the relationships between the master track video and the various events represented by the icons in the timeline.
- the video frame thumbnails could be used to perform automatic scene detection via standard methods. The detected scene changes could then be referenced on the timeline using an appropriate icon or mark. This would make it easier for the user to graphically synchronize the events with the master track.
- the template selection window 200 will reflect the settings chosen when the current template was selected.
- the horizontal strip 208 associated with the currently selected template will be highlighted in the layout display sector 206 .
- the user can then select a different template using the same procedure described previously in connection with selecting the initial template.
- the presentation production system will then re-open the presentation tool window, this time reflecting the new template choice.
- all the attributes and scheduling data entered by the user in connection with the old template that are applicable to the newly selected template will be retained. The user can then review and modify the template as desired.
- the user selects the file menu button of the presentation tool window (see 320 of FIG. 3) and then selects the “Templates” action from the action list that drops down.
- This causes a templates window 2500 to appear over the presentation tool window.
- the templates window 2500 is similar in appearance to the previously described template selection window, but with some significant differences.
- the templates window 2500 has two buttons displayed at the top, the first of which is a server button 2502 , and the other of which is a local button 2504 .
- the user selects the server button 2502 if he or she wants the modified template to be saved remotely and the host computed is connected to a network having access to the server.
- the user selects the local button 2504 if he or she wants the modified template saved on the host computer.
- an instruction bar 2506 is located just below the layout display sector 2522 to provide information and tips to the user on how to proceed with the template saving process.
- the templates window 2500 is shown as it would appear when the user first opens it.
- the instruction bar 2506 states “Save Template to Server of Local”, thereby aiding the user in determining what to do first (i.e., select the server button 2502 or local button 2504 ).
- the presentation production system also creates a thumbnail of the modified template from whatever image was last displayed in the preview display of the presentation tool window. This thumbnail is displayed in the thumbnail sector 2524 of the templates window, so that the user can review it. If the user decides that he or she would like a different thumbnail image, then the user minimizes the templates window to bring the presentation tool window back to the forefront. The user then runs the presentation to the point where the desired image is displayed in the preview display and pauses the presentation. The user then reinstates the templates window and selects the “Re-Grab” button 2526 . This causes the presentation production system to create a new thumbnail of the modified template and to display the new thumbnail in the thumbnail sector 2524 .
- the thumbnail displayed in the thumbnail sector 2524 is the thumbnail that will appear in the thumbnail column 2528 of the horizontal strip 2520 in the layout display sector 2522 that will be created for the modified template being entered.
- the aforementioned modified template as represented by its thumbnail and the identifying information entered by the user, will appear in the layout display sector 2522 of the template selection window, assuming the user has elected to access the location where the template is saved.
- a template that was downloaded from a server can be saved to local template storage by using the forwgoing process, even if it is not modified in any way.
- a user can delete a template using the templates window 2500 as well. This is accomplished by selecting the local button 2504 , and then selecting the strip 2520 associated with the template that the user wants to delete in the layout display sector 2522 . Finally, the user selects the delete button 2532 to delete the selected template.
- this authoring process involves first launching the presentation production system on the user's host computer (process action 2600 ). This brings up the template selection window, which the user employs to select a presentation template, as well as name and specify the destination of the presentation files (process action 2602 ). The selected template is then loaded by the presentation production system, and the tool window is displayed and populated with default template data. The user then enters the media content information. Specifically, the user imports the master track audio or video file (process action 2604 ) and the presentation slides file (process action 2606 ).
- the user optionally imports any demonstration files (e.g., video, audio, and the like), documents files, HTML files, and animation files, and the like into the presentation (process action 2608 ). It is noted that the optional nature of the last action, and any future actions, is indicated by a broken line box in FIG. 26.
- the user sets the properties of the template, assuming the default settings are not acceptable. This part of the process entails optionally modifying the template attributes (process action 2610 ), entering metadata (process action 2612 ) and changing the video player features (process action 2614 ). It is noted that the forgoing parts of the process involving entering the media content and setting the template properties can be reversed in the order that they are performed. Thus a user could set the template properties before importing the media content, if desired.
- the next phase of the presentation authoring process is to create the timeline of the presentation using the previously described grids.
- the user defines script commands (process action 2616 ), which dictate when in the master track video or audio program a presentation slide is displayed, a demonstration is launched, a file is opened (e.g., word processing, HTML or Flash file), or an address of a site is contacted.
- the user establishes contents markers (process action 2618 ), which represent a table of contents of the presentation and which specify when a new topic or sub-topic is begun in the presentation timeline.
- the user can enter one or more a transcriptions (in different languages) of the master track program and establish when each segment of the transcription begins in the presentation timeline.
- script commands, markers and transcription data can be entered directly using the various data grids
- the user can also import text based files that contain predefined scripts, markers, and transcription data.
- the user can optionally establish and schedule the appearance of one or more links that will be made available for access by a viewer of the presentation (process action 2622 ). It is noted that the user can also optionally organize a graphical table of contents tree to reflect the hierarchy of the topics and presentation slides (process action 2624 ), although this does not actually schedule any event in the presentation timeline.
- the user initiates a “build” of the presentation using the aforementioned project builder module (process action 2626 ).
- the presentation building procedure will be discussed in more detail shortly.
- the built presentation can then be previewed (process action 2628 ) by the user and edited (process action 2630 ) as necessary. These last two actions are optional, but would typically be performed.
- the user can edit the presentation in a number of ways. These include using the visual timeline editor and its visual timeline to edit the scheduled events to get the proper timing of the script commands, markers, and transcription elements, or using the data grids directly to change the schedule.
- the user can edit the template properties as desired.
- the user then can adjust template settings in the property grids, changing colors, output settings, as well as adding or changing metadata in multiple schema formats and languages.
- the user could introduce new presentation slides, demonstrations, and the like and schedule them in the timeline.
- the user could also change the template while retaining the scheduling and at least some of the modified attributes.
- the presentation can be rebuilt to reflect these changes and previewed once again. It is also noted that the foregoing changes could be made prior to the initial build of the presentation during the time that the attributes and scheduling in being performed.
- the previously mentioned project builder module of the presentation production system takes all the data input by the user via the user interfaces and builds a presentation package that can be run by the presentation viewer. Generally, the project builder generates the underlying presentation files, indexes the media, outputs the slides into the project directory, generates a presentation data file and transforms it using the selected template to generate a final output HTML presentation.
- the project builder generates the underlying presentation files, indexes the media, outputs the slides into the project directory, generates a presentation data file and transforms it using the selected template to generate a final output HTML presentation.
- the first process action 2700 of the project building process performed by the present system when the user initiates a build involves exporting the presentation slides to the system's project directory. This exporting is done using the export options specified in the template editor property grid.
- thumbnails generated for each slide in the presentation slide deck when the slide file was entered into the system are also stored in the presentation slide file.
- the project building process continues with the video or audio media file designated as the master track being indexed. This entails eliminating any existing un-needed metadata contained in the header of the master track media file (process action 2702 ), and then writing all the scheduling data into the header (process action 2704 ). This includes adding the script commands, contents markers and transcription data to the header of the media file.
- the master track media file is also located in the project directory of the presentation production system.
- the player settings specified in the in the player property grid are also exported and written into the header of the media file. These settings may be the default options or options entered into the aforementioned grid by the user.
- the project builder module then creates a links file containing all the link information entered by the user (process action 2706 ).
- the links file was a separate XML file also residing in the project directory.
- the project builder module of the present system generates the aforementioned presentation data file and saves it in the root of the project directory (process action 2708 ).
- the presentation data file is the final underlying data file that is generated by the presentation production system. It includes, among other things all the data specified in the property and data grids, such as the script commands, markers, transcription elements, and links, as well as template attributes and presentation metadata. The structure and contents of the presentation data file will be described in greater detail in the next section.
- the project directory includes the presentation data file, master track media file, links file (if any), and presentation slides file.
- the file associated with the selected template, any files associated with the optional demonstrations, and any files associated with the optional documents, animations and the like, are also stored in the project directory.
- the build process is not quite complete.
- the information contained in the presentation data file is incorporated into the selected template to produce a presentation file, which in tested versions of the present system was an HTML file (process action 2710 ).
- This HTML file is the file that the presentation viewers run to view and interact with the presentation as described earlier. Accordingly, referring to FIG.
- the final presentation package can be represented by the presentation file 2800 as the hub which accesses the master track media file 2802 and presentation slides file 2804 to run the presentation.
- the presentation's HTML file may also access the optional Links file 2806 , demonstration files 2808 and document files 2810 if they exist and present them in the presentation at their scheduled times.
- the presentation data file took the form of a XML file based on a standardized schema published by the IMS.
- the file is generated by the aforementioned project builder module during the build process.
- the IMS is an industry driven global consortium chartered to define and recommend standards for the e-Learning marketplace, and has developed several specifications for facilitating online distributed learning, including Learning Resource Interchange (LRN, pronounced “learn”).
- LRN is a content interchange descriptor that provides to content creators a standard way of identifying, sharing, updating, and creating online content and courseware.
- LRN is a commercial application of the IMS Content Packaging and Metadata Specifications, and supports the Advanced Distributed Learning Sharable Content Object Reference Model.
- the IMS Manifest file is the aforementioned presentation data file in tested version of the present system. To ensure that the IMS Manifest file can always be found within a package, it has a pre-defined name and location, i.e., imsmanifest.xml.
- the standard LRN manifest 2900 contains MetaData describing the presentation 2902 (such as Title or Description), organizations of the content 2904 (such as a Table of Contents) with a list of individual content items 2908 , and a resources section 2906 having a list of individual resources 2910 (such as HTML files, graphics, or other content).
- MetaData describing the presentation 2902 (such as Title or Description)
- organizations of the content 2904 such as a Table of Contents
- a resources section 2906 having a list of individual resources 2910 (such as HTML files, graphics, or other content).
- the “MetaData” section of the imsmanifest.xml contains general information about the presentation.
- the ⁇ metadata>section includes a “General Information” sub-section that provides some general information about the presentation and the imsmanifest.xml file, such as the schema (i.e., ⁇ schema>IMS CONTENT ⁇ /schema>”) and the version of the schema (i.e., ⁇ schemaversion>1.0 ⁇ /schemaversion>).
- IMS supports extensible metadata using the XML Schema Definition language (XSD, XDR) through the use of other LOM elements as an extension or as new elements (defined in a specific namespace).
- Namespace elements typically contain a meaningful prefix, such as “adl” (to represent the Advanced Distributed Learning initiative) to uniquely identify its extensions.
- IMS recommends the use of the W3C Recommendation for Namespaces.
- the “imsmanifest” file provides extended metadata sections to support video and audio, indexed markers, script commands as well as transcription and template metadata. Each of these will be described in the sections to follow.
- the “ ⁇ mittdata>” sub-section is a child of the IMS ⁇ metadata>section. This section supports two tags, “ ⁇ extendedmetadata>” and “ ⁇ ui>” data.
- This sub-section is for extensible schema's associated with user defined templates in presentation production system.
- Authors can define their own namespaces and schema definitions and add custom schemas related to their playback templates under this section.
- a “ ⁇ msstudios>” schema was defined for default template metadata, such as the title of the presentation and the speaker's name (although neither was actually specified in the example listing).
- the UI sub-section is used to store layout and user interface display information that is to be employed by the selected template.
- Authors can also define their own namespace and schema definition and add custom schemas related to their own unique presentation templates in this section.
- a “ ⁇ msstudios>” schema is defined and shows the properties associated with tested versions of the system which includes features such as font, logo, colors, and Export options for the presentation slides.
- this sub-section includes all the data entered in to the property grids by the user or populated therein by default when the template was selected.
- the IMS ⁇ organizations>element is used to describe the navigation structure for the manifest.
- Individual organization types are declared as a sub-elements nested within the ⁇ organizations>element.
- the table of contents of the presentation is a primary organizations section type and is designated by the ⁇ tableofcontents>element.
- the ⁇ tableofcontents>element has one or more ⁇ item>sub-elements that include attributes such as a contents title.
- An example of the ⁇ organizations>section of the imsmanifest.xml file can be found in the listing provided in appendix A.
- the IMS ⁇ resources>element is used to identify a series of files and content sources that are used to make up the final presentation. Individual resources are declared as a ⁇ resource>element (i.e., without an “s”) nested within the ⁇ resources>element. A ⁇ resource>element may also have a ⁇ metadata>sub-element (see 2912 in FIG. 29). The ⁇ metadata>sub-element is used to define information about the resource and used in conjunction with standard IMS metadata schema. Further, a ⁇ resource>element may have a ⁇ file>sub-element (see 2914 in FIG. 29). The ⁇ file>sub-element is used to point to the actual file and contain metadata related to this file.
- the ⁇ mittdata> element provides an area wherein further metadata related to the playback of a resource in the >>presentation production system can be extended. This section is primarily used to hold the ⁇ media> element extension, but could be utilized for other custom metadata related to other more modern media formats.
- An example of the ⁇ resources> section including a ⁇ mittdata> element is shown in the listing provided in appendix A.
- the ⁇ media> element is a custom element extension defined to hold metadata associated with the master track of the presentation. This element holds scheduling data and other information about the master track including start time, stop time, codecs used, markers, script commands, transcription entries, player setting and other metadata also stored in the master track media file. In tested version of the presentation production system, the following defined sub-elements of the ⁇ media> element were included.
- the abstract sub-element is used for a short description of the media file and what it contains.
- the lang attribute can be utilized to allow for multiple language abstract elements defined within a single ⁇ media>section.
- the contact name sub-element is used to define the name of the individual to contact regarding information about the media file
- the contact mail sub-element is used to define the Email address of the individual to contact regarding information about the media file.
- the contact name sub-element is a Boolean term used to define whether the media is protected by Digital Rights Management.
- the start time sub-element is used to define the time at which to start playing the media file from.
- the end time sub-element is used to define the time at which to stop playing the media file.
- the available bandwidths sub-element is used to list the available bandwidths.
- the codecs sub-element is used to list the codecs that are available within the media file. It is noted that ⁇ video>and ⁇ audio>are sub-elements of ⁇ codecs>.
- markers are positions within the media file that are defined within the organizations section. These can be thought of as table of contents points within the media file that a user could easily reference and seek to.
- Each markers sub-element defines the time code and an “indentifierref” attribute to find its related ⁇ item> within the ⁇ organization> section. For example, a markers sub-element would look like:
- This sub-element stores all of the script commands.
- the time code, type of command, and parameter of the command are stored as attributes of a ⁇ script> sub-element.
- a script commands sub-element could look like:
- the transcription sub-element contains multiple ⁇ transcript>sub-elements.
- the ⁇ transcription>sub-element also supports a lang key to define the language that the transcription is storing. Multiple transcription sub-elements can appear within a ⁇ media>section.
- Each transcript sub-element is used to define a segment of the transcription of the Master Track audio. For example, a transcript sub-element could look like:
- the media title sub-element is used to define the title of the media file.
- the author sub-element is used to provide information on the author of the media file.
- the redirector sub-element is used to provide the location of redirector for the master track media file in a web service application of the present presentation production system, the details of which are beyond the scope of the present application.
- the copyright sub-element is used to provide Copyright information.
- the bitrate sub-element is used to define the encoded bitrate of the media file in kbps.
- the image source width sub-element is used to define the pixel width of the video image (if one is available).
- the image source height sub-element is used to define the pixel height of the video image (if one is available).
- resource elements are used to identify the various non-master track resources associated with the presentation. For example, resource elements identifying the presentation slide file and associated thumbnails, demonstration files, document files and the links file are included.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Library & Information Science (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
- Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)
Abstract
An interactive, multi-media presentation production system and process that integrates video, audio, presentation slides, text, and other media components into a manageable production environment for the producer of a presentation is provided. In essence, the production system and process is a professional grade toolkit that in its simplest implementation provides canned template starting points with semi-customization features and requires only some pointers to the media files being incorporated. However, the present presentation production system can also support ground up professional-studio customization for specialized presentations. For example, other higher-level production features includes a content preview, grid-based editing and manipulation tools, media import and filtering tools, graphic-based drag and drop editing features, and format and packaging features.
Description
- 1. Technical Field
- The invention is related to the authoring of an educational or business presentation having multi-media components, and more particularly to a system and process for creating interactive, multi-media presentations that integrate video, audio, presentation slides, text, and other media components into a manageable production environment.
- 2. Background Art
- Multimedia presentations in their simplest form involve the use of a variety of media, such as video, audio, slideshows, and text to present scripted presentations to mass audiences for such purposes as virtual classrooms or other educational and business presentations. Though there has been a recent explosion in the use of such multimedia presentations, very little work is ongoing in the field of interactive multimedia presentations. Interactive multimedia presentations have the promise of providing an all new presentation and learning environments. Rather than the traditional canned presentation or lecture, a viewer of an interactive multimedia presentation should be able to play back the presentation while interacting with it to view or review specific sections, access additional information, search and even bookmark the presentation.
- However, the creation of an interactive multimedia presentation is no trivial matter. Currently, the process is a complex and time consuming one requiring the writing of complex HTML and DHTML pages by hand to organize and coordinate the timing of the media components of the presentation. As a result, while the promise of interactive multimedia presentations is great, their use is likely to be hindered by the lack of better tools for users to create and edit these presentations. The key then is to provide authoring tools for creating interactive multimedia presentations that reduce the burden on the author.
- The present invention is such a tool. It will allow users to create rich multimedia presentations in an easily understood and organized fashion while speeding up and simplifying the organization, data entry, timing, metadata tracking, publication and distribution of the presentation.
- The present invention is directed toward an interactive, multi-media presentation production system and process that integrates video, audio, presentation slides, text, and other media components into a manageable production environment for the producer of a presentation. In essence, the production system and process is a professional grade toolkit that in its simplest implementation provides canned template starting points with semi-customization features and requires only some pointers to the media files being incorporated. However, the present presentation production system can also support ground up professional-studio customization for specialized presentations. For example, other high-level production features includes a content preview, grid-based editing and manipulation tools, media import and filtering tools, graphic-based drag and drop editing features, and format and packaging features.
- Through the use of customizable “templates”, a variety of playback viewer interfaces can be generated from the same serialized data file. The templates are accessible locally through the presentation production system and process (or “tool” for short), or can be accessed remotely on one or more servers via a network connection. The use of templates allows the presentation production system to separate data from presentation logic. To this end, the tool generates a serializable, human readable, data file. The file's format stores metadata, organizational information, content (media) information, timing of events in relation to each other, as well as extended metadata about each piece of content. In tested versions of the tool, this file took the form of an XML data file.
- The tool itself is essentially an intelligent visual data editor for making rich media presentations. Upon publishing from the tool, the required elements are organized and edited to contain the proper metadata in a single publishing directory. More particularly, the tool consists of graphic user interfaces for easily entering the data associated with the rich media presentation. The tool is also designed to make it simple and easy to edit the data of the underlying schema.
- The custom templates are XSLT files with supporting script and XML that can be stored on a server for workgroup access or on a local machine. When the tool user first launches the tool, a template selection window is presented which the user employs to browse the available templates stored both locally and remotely. Picking the desired template, entering a name for the project and then a location for the project to be built, will copy the associated templates files to the selected build location.
- In addition, upon selection of a template, a presentation tool window is presented to the user. The presentation tool window includes a variety of sectors that the user employs to craft the presentation. One of these sectors is the project file sector which is used to display and manage all of the media imported into the presentation, such as video, audio, documents, and other source files that will be used to create the presentation. A document tree format is employed to facilitate the foregoing task. One of the tree elements is the media folder that contains the master track video or audio file. The program contained in the master track file will drive the timeline of events in the presentation. All indexing, timing, and associated master track metadata will also be stored in this file. Whenever the user enters a video or audio file into the media folder and the file is designated as the master track, it is presented in the video preview sector of the tool window. The video preview sector is generally used to provide a playback of the master track program, and includes controls for at a minimum playing and pausing the video or audio program.
- Another media element imported and displayed using the project file sector is a presentation slideshow deck. When the file containing the presentation slides is imported into the tool, thumbnails for each slide are generated for preview in the presentation slide preview sector of the tool window. Using the control arrows displayed in the slide preview sector allows the user to scan through the associated slides. Double clicking on a slide thumbnail launches the presentation slide creation program used to create the slide so that it can be edited.
- Other media elements that can be imported and managed via the project file sector include demonstrations files which are typically video or audio programs, documents of various kinds, HTML files, animations, and the like. These elements are scheduled for display during the presentation as will be discussed later.
- The presentation tool window also includes a presentation properties sector that is used to view and modify the layout appearance and functionality attributes of the selected template via a series of property grids that are accessible by selecting the appropriate tab. One of these grids is the template editor property grid which loads all of the selected templates customizable data. Editable features include access to the colors of the template, font, layout features, images, presentation slides export options, slide thumbnail export options, and video and audio playback options, among others.
- Another of the grids is the metadata property grid. The metadata property grid will expose all of the customizable metadata that can be entered into the selected template. Each template can define its own list of customizable metadata that will be exposed to the grid. Default metadata is also populated into the metadata property grid. In addition, a list of “schemas” is selectable to allow the user to enter information from a pre-defined schema. Selecting a schema from a drop-down menu will populate the grid with the associated schema information. Users will be able to enter the information that is relevant to their presentation and it will be written into the finalized presentation data file. Users can also choose a language from a drop-down menu. All available language code keys will be listed in the drop-down. Upon selection of a new language, the user can enter the associated metadata in that language into the data grid and it will be stored in the presentation data file with an associated language key. This enables the playback viewer to display metadata in different languages based on the user's language selection.
- A player property grid is also accessible in the presentation properties sector. The player property grid allows the user to edit and view the details of the master track media file. The master track media file is the video or audio file that serves as the main presentation timeline. Some of the settings associated with this file are displayed for informational purposes only and cannot be edited. However, other settings are available to edit, such as the playback size, as well as the dimensions and quality settings of the master track. Information in this property grid is stored in both the presentation data file and the media file upon building the project.
- The presentation tool window further includes a work sector where various data entry grids and informational panes are displayed. Each of these can be accessed by selecting a tab displayed in the work sector.
- In general, the data entry grids allow the user to enter the information into the presentation data file and the master track media file that is needed to drive the timeline of the presentation. The first of these grids, which is displayed by default once the master track program has been imported, is the scripts grid. The scripts grid is where the user enters events called script commands that will be triggered during the playback of the presentation. Script commands can include presentation slide flips, launching a demo, displaying documents, opening a URL, accessing a web service, or any other custom functionality that is designed into the selected template. Script commands can be created by the user entering a time code, a script type (e.g., slide, demo, etc.), and a script parameter specifying the particular slide, demonstration program, and the like that is involved. Script commands can also be edited through the use of this grid.
- A markers grid is also accessible in the work sector by selecting the associated tab. The markers grid allows for the editing of the table of contents of the presentation. Major divisions or events along the timeline can be titled for fast navigation and indexing to a time code representing an elapsed time of the master track presentation. Typical presentations include a contents marker for each major slide change, or change in topic within the presentation. Sub-topics are also marked in the markers grid, and can be arranged into hierarchies under the contents tab as will be described shortly. To add content markers to the grid, the user enters the time code and associated content marker text into the data grid. Information within the grid can be edited just as in the scripts grid.
- There is also a transcription grid that can be accessed by selecting its tab. The transcription grid is where the user can enter a line-by-line transcription of the presentation in multiple languages for display in the final presentation. Users can enter transcript information by entering the text into the grid with an associated start-time time code. The user can choose how granular the timeline should be with the transcript grid. Transcription can be spaced close together in short sentences or widely apart in large paragraph blocks. A language dropdown box will also allow the user to select the associated language key with which this transcription data gets stored. The finalized presentation data file can store multiple language transcriptions, indexed by language keys.
- It is noted that in the foregoing scripts, markers and transcription grids, the data can be entered by importing it via a formatted text-based file. This method of entering the data is especially useful with the transcription grid in that users can dramatically speed up the process of entering transcription information compared to manual entry methods. The file will be in a human readable format for easy integration with word processing, and spreadsheet applications. Users import the file into the presentation production system and select the associated language key. The data is then parsed into the presentation data file and is available for editing in the associated data grid.
- It is also noted that if the script, marker or transcription data is imported with offset time code, as is often the case when logging transcriptions from tape, the presentation tool will detect and offer to zero out the time code so that it starts at zero. The user can also perform this manually by accessing an offset time code correction feature.
- The next feature that can be displayed in the work sector by selecting its tab is the contents/links editor. The contents/links editor provides a two-part display with one side showing a table of contents tree that includes a graphical representation of the contents markers organized according to their time code, and the presentation slides scheduled via a scripts command to be shown during the part of the presentation applicable to each contents marker. This tree can be edited by the user to reflect the hierarchy of the contents markers. The other side of the display is a links grid for adding related links at the global, contents marker or slide level. These links are displayed in the presentation during the appropriate times (i.e., throughout the presentation in the case of a global link, during the part of the presentation related to a contents marker if a marker link, or during the time a slide is displayed if a slide link). To add links, the user selects a global link node, or the desired marker or slide node, in the table of contents tree, and then enters the name of the link and its associated URL in the entry fields of the links grid.
- In addition to the foregoing data grids, certain informational panes can be displayed in the work sector by selecting the appropriate tab. For example, a presentation data file preview pane is available to the user for reviewing the underlying data file that is being generated by the presentation tool as the user crafts the presentation. Another informational pane that can be displayed is the output panel. The output panel details build information and status, as well as error reporting during the build process. When a build is initiated this panel automatically appears and details information of each step in the build process. Errors are reported to this panel for easy troubleshooting during the build process.
- Finally a preview display can be accessed and shown in the work sector. The preview display allows the user to view the presentation that is being authored for the purpose of review. Selecting the preview display tab causes the presentation tool to do a rapid build of the project and display it in the work sector. The author can then confirm the selections of color, font, layout, and timing that they have made. This allows the user to check quality and review their work within the tool itself.
- The presentation tool also has a visual timeline editor. The visual timeline editor provides a graphic representation of the scheduled script commands, contents markers and transcription segment entries in a “visual” timeline format. The foregoing events are represented by icons displayed in separate horizontally oriented script command, markers and transcription bands. An elapsed time timeline ruler disposed above the bands can be used to determine the time code associated with each scheduled event in relation to the master track program. As such, it allows the user to easily see these scheduled events and obtain basic information about them, without having to resort to the previously-described data grids. In addition, the timeline editor gives the user the capability to move the scheduled events right from the timeline. Specifically dragging an event icon updates the underlying time code displayed in the data grids, and changes the presentation data file. Further, dragging a current elapsed time bar through the timeline updates the current position of the master track playback and allows the user to preview where events happen. Thus, as the user moves through the timeline the master track stays in sync. In addition, the slide events are updated and previewed in the slide preview window. The user can also access the various data grids directly from the timeline to edit the scheduled events.
- Generally, using the presentation tool to produce a presentation according to the present system and process is accomplished as follows. First, a presentation template is selected as described previously using the template selection window. The template file associated with the selected template specifies layout features and interactive functionality for an interactive presentation window which when rendered displays the presentation being authored. Next, a presentation tool window is displayed to the user and it is populated with the selected template's layout and functionality data. The presentation tool window provides a graphic user interface to assist the user in tasks including specifying media files to be imported, modifying the layout and functionality data and entering scheduling information associated with the presentation. Specifically, the user first employs the presentation tool window to import media files making up the multi-media content of the presentation. The user also modifies or adds to the layout and functionality data associated with the selected template as desired, and inputs scheduling data specifying when each component of the multi-media content is to be played or displayed in the presentation window. As the foregoing data is being entered, the presentation tool creates a presentation data file including all the layout and functionality data, as well as scheduling data, associated with the presentation.
- A presentation package is then built. This includes exported versions of the imported media components, and a presentation file which is executable by a viewer of the presentation and when executed renders the aforementioned presentation window for viewing the presentation. It is noted that the presentation file is created by incorporating the data contained in the presentation data file into the file associated with the selected template.
- As for exporting the media components, this includes indexing the master track program file by first eliminating any existing un-needed metadata from the header of the file, and then writing the aforementioned scheduling data, as well as player settings, into the header. The indexed master track program file is then exported. The user-established link indicators that identify when in the master track video or audio program a particular user-identified link is to be displayed in the presentation, are also exported. To this end, a links file is created for the user-established link indicators. Any demonstration, animation, document, or HTML files that were imported and scheduled are also exported. All the foregoing exported files are exported to a project directory whose name and location were specified by the user in the template selection window as part of the process of selecting a template. The aforementioned presentation file is also stored in this directory.
- During the presentation package building process, the output panel is displayed in the work sector of the presentation tool window, as discussed previously. This panel provides information and a status regarding the progress of the building process. This includes a description of any error encountered during the process.
- Once the presentation is built, it can be previewed in the presentation tool window as described previously. If the user desires to make changes, the presentation package can be edited by changing the layout and functionality data and/or the scheduling data in the presentation data file using the presentation tool window, or by importing additional media files or presentation slides, or both. The presentation package is then rebuilt and can be previewed once again.
- In addition to the just described benefits, other advantages of the present invention will become apparent from the detailed description which follows hereinafter when taken in conjunction with the drawing figures which accompany it.
- The specific features, aspects, and advantages of the present invention will become better understood with regard to the following description, appended claims, and accompanying drawings where:
- FIG. 1 is a diagram depicting a general purpose computing device constituting an exemplary system for implementing the present invention.
- FIG. 2 shows a user interface screen according to the present invention for selecting a presentation template.
- FIG. 3 shows a user interface screen according to the present invention for authoring an interactive, multi-media presentation.
- FIG. 4 shows an enlarged view of the project file sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 5 shows an open file dialog box user interface window for importing media components which is accessed via the project file sector of FIG. 4.
- FIG. 6 shows an enlarged view of the video preview sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 7 shows an enlarged view of the presentation slide preview sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 8A shows an enlarged view of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a portion of the template editor property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 8B shows an enlarged view of a part of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a different portion of the template editor property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 8C shows an enlarged view of a part of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with an expanded template attribute of the template editor property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 9 shows an enlarged view of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the metadata property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 10 shows an enlarged view of the presentation properties sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the player property grid being displayed.
- FIG. 11 shows an enlarged view of the work sector and the visual timeline editor of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the scripts grid being displayed in the work sector.
- FIG. 12A is an exemplary script command list from an imported scripts file.
- FIG. 12B is an exemplary contents marker list from an imported contents marker file.
- FIG. 13 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the scripts grid and a pop-up script command editing window being displayed.
- FIG. 14 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the markers grid being displayed.
- FIG. 15 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the markers grid and a pop-up contents marker editing window being displayed.
- FIG. 16 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the transcription grid being displayed.
- FIG. 17 shows an enlarged view of part of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a portion of the transcription grid and a pop-up transcription entry editing window being displayed.
- FIG. 18 shows an offset time code user interface window used for correcting time code offsets between an imported scheduling data list and the master track program.
- FIG. 19 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the content/links editor being displayed.
- FIG. 20 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the presentation data file preview pane being displayed.
- FIG. 21 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the output panel being displayed.
- FIG. 22 shows an enlarged view of the work sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with the preview display being displayed.
- FIG. 23 shows an enlarged view of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3.
- FIG. 24A shows an enlarged view of part of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a pop-up scripts command details window being displayed.
- FIG. 24B shows an enlarged view of part of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a pop-up contents marker details window being displayed.
- FIG. 24C shows an enlarged view of part of the visual timeline editor sector of the user interface screen of FIG. 3, with a pop-up transcription entry details window being displayed.
- FIG. 25 shows a user interface screen according to the present invention for saving a modified presentation template.
- FIGS.26A-B show a flow chart diagramming an overall process for authoring an interactive, multi-media presentation in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 27 shows a flow chart diagramming a process for building a presentation package that implements the building action of FIG. 26B.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating the relationships among the components of the presentation package.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a LRN formatted imsmanifest.xml file.
- In the following description of the preferred embodiments of the present invention, reference is made to the accompanying drawings which form a part hereof, and in which is shown by way of illustration specific embodiments in which the invention may be practiced. It is understood that other embodiments may be utilized and structural changes may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.
- Before providing a description of the preferred embodiments of the present invention, a brief, general description of a suitable computing environment in which the invention may be implemented will be described. FIG. 1 illustrates an example of a suitable
computing system environment 100. Thecomputing system environment 100 is only one example of a suitable computing environment and is not intended to suggest any limitation as to the scope of use or functionality of the invention. Neither should thecomputing environment 100 be interpreted as having any dependency or requirement relating to any one or combination of components illustrated in theexemplary operating environment 100. - The invention is operational with numerous other general purpose or special purpose computing system environments or configurations. Examples of well known computing systems, environments, and/or configurations that may be suitable for use with the invention include, but are not limited to, personal computers, server computers, hand-held or laptop devices, multiprocessor systems, microprocessor-based systems, set top boxes, programmable consumer electronics, network PCs, minicomputers, mainframe computers, distributed computing environments that include any of the above systems or devices, and the like.
- The invention may be described in the general context of computer-executable instructions, such as program modules, being executed by a computer. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types. The invention may also be practiced in distributed computing environments where tasks are performed by remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, program modules may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices.
- With reference to FIG. 1, an exemplary system for implementing the invention includes a general purpose computing device in the form of a
computer 110. Components ofcomputer 110 may include, but are not limited to, aprocessing unit 120, asystem memory 130, and asystem bus 121 that couples various system components including the system memory to theprocessing unit 120. Thesystem bus 121 may be any of several types of bus structures including a memory bus or memory controller, a peripheral bus, and a local bus using any of a variety of bus architectures. By way of example, and not limitation, such architectures include Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, Micro Channel Architecture (MCA) bus, Enhanced ISA (EISA) bus, Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) local bus, and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus also known as Mezzanine bus. -
Computer 110 typically includes a variety of computer readable media. Computer readable media can be any available media that can be accessed bycomputer 110 and includes both volatile and nonvolatile media, removable and non-removable media. By way of example, and not limitation, computer readable media may comprise computer storage media and communication media. Computer storage media includes both volatile and nonvolatile, removable and non-removable media implemented in any method or technology for storage of information such as computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data. Computer storage media includes, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory or other memory technology, CD-ROM, digital versatile disks (DVD) or other optical disk storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium which can be used to store the desired information and which can be accessed bycomputer 110. Communication media typically embodies computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any information delivery media. The term “modulated data signal” means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics set or changed in such a manner as to encode information in the signal. By way of example, and not limitation, communication media includes wired media such as a wired network or direct-wired connection, and wireless media such as acoustic, RF, infrared and other wireless media. Combinations of the any of the above should also be included within the scope of computer readable media. - The
system memory 130 includes computer storage media in the form of volatile and/or nonvolatile memory such as read only memory (ROM) 131 and random access memory (RAM) 132. A basic input/output system 133 (BIOS), containing the basic routines that help to transfer information between elements withincomputer 110, such as during start-up, is typically stored inROM 131.RAM 132 typically contains data and/or program modules that are immediately accessible to and/or presently being operated on by processingunit 120. By way of example, and not limitation, FIG. 1 illustratesoperating system 134, application programs 135,other program modules 136, andprogram data 137. - The
computer 110 may also include other removable/non-removable, volatile/nonvolatile computer storage media. By way of example only, FIG. 1 illustrates ahard disk drive 141 that reads from or writes to non-removable, nonvolatile magnetic media, amagnetic disk drive 151 that reads from or writes to a removable, nonvolatilemagnetic disk 152, and anoptical disk drive 155 that reads from or writes to a removable, nonvolatileoptical disk 156 such as a CD ROM or other optical media. Other removable/non-removable, volatile/nonvolatile computer storage media that can be used in the exemplary operating environment include, but are not limited to, magnetic tape cassettes, flash memory cards, digital versatile disks, digital video tape, solid state RAM, solid state ROM, and the like. Thehard disk drive 141 is typically connected to thesystem bus 121 through an non-removable memory interface such asinterface 140, andmagnetic disk drive 151 andoptical disk drive 155 are typically connected to thesystem bus 121 by a removable memory interface, such asinterface 150. - The drives and their associated computer storage media discussed above and illustrated in FIG. 1, provide storage of computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules and other data for the
computer 110. In FIG. 1, for example,hard disk drive 141 is illustrated as storingoperating system 144,application programs 145,other program modules 146, andprogram data 147. Note that these components can either be the same as or different fromoperating system 134, application programs 135,other program modules 136, andprogram data 137.Operating system 144,application programs 145,other program modules 146, andprogram data 147 are given different numbers here to illustrate that, at a minimum, they are different copies. A user may enter commands and information into thecomputer 110 through input devices such as akeyboard 162 andpointing device 161, commonly referred to as a mouse, trackball or touch pad. Other input devices (not shown) may include a microphone, joystick, game pad, satellite dish, scanner, or the like. These and other input devices are often connected to theprocessing unit 120 through auser input interface 160 that is coupled to thesystem bus 121, but may be connected by other interface and bus structures, such as a parallel port, game port or a universal serial bus (USB). Amonitor 191 or other type of display device is also connected to thesystem bus 121 via an interface, such as avideo interface 190. In addition to the monitor, computers may also include other peripheral output devices such asspeakers 197 andprinter 196, which may be connected through an outputperipheral interface 195. Of particular significance to the present invention, a camera 163 (such as a digital/electronic still or video camera, or film/photographic scanner) capable of capturing a sequence of images 164 can also be included as an input device to thepersonal computer 110. Further, while just one camera is depicted, multiple cameras could be included as input devices to thepersonal computer 110. The images 164 from the one or more cameras are input into thecomputer 110 via an appropriate camera interface 165. This interface 165 is connected to thesystem bus 121, thereby allowing the images to be routed to and stored in theRAM 132, or one of the other data storage devices associated with thecomputer 110. However, it is noted that image data can be input into thecomputer 110 from any of the aforementioned computer-readable media as well, without requiring the use of the camera 163. - The
computer 110 may operate in a networked environment using logical connections to one or more remote computers, such as aremote computer 180. Theremote computer 180 may be a personal computer, a server, a router, a network PC, a peer device or other common network node, and typically includes many or all of the elements described above relative to thecomputer 110, although only amemory storage device 181 has been illustrated in FIG. 1. The logical connections depicted in FIG. 1 include a local area network (LAN) 171 and a wide area network (WAN) 173, but may also include other networks. Such networking environments are commonplace in offices, enterprise-wide computer networks, intranets and the Internet. - When used in a LAN networking environment, the
computer 110 is connected to theLAN 171 through a network interface oradapter 170. When used in a WAN networking environment, thecomputer 110 typically includes amodem 172 or other means for establishing communications over theWAN 173, such as the Internet. Themodem 172, which may be internal or external, may be connected to thesystem bus 121 via theuser input interface 160, or other appropriate mechanism. In a networked environment, program modules depicted relative to thecomputer 110, or portions thereof, may be stored in the remote memory storage device. By way of example, and not limitation, FIG. 1 illustrates remote application programs 185 as residing onmemory device 181. It will be appreciated that the network connections shown are exemplary and other means of establishing a communications link between the computers may be used. - The exemplary operating environment having now been discussed, the following sections will be devoted to a description of the program modules embodying the invention.
- 1.0 The Template Selection Window
- Upon initiating the present multi-media, interactive presentation production program (or production tool for short), the person who is producing the presentation (hereinafter the “user”) is presented with a template selection window, which is typically displayed on the screen of the computing device hosting the production tool program. In general, the template selection window provides one or more layouts for the presentation that is to be created. The layout of the presentation refers to where in the presentation window the video is displayed, where the presentation slides are displayed, where a contents section is displayed and so on. The layouts correspond to various templates that in essence are custom XSLT files with supporting script and XML. These templates are designed to render a particular presentation window configuration capable of playing a presentation and interacting with the viewer, once populated with media components and scheduling data. They are created using conventional template creation techniques, any of which can be employed for this purpose. An example of an interactive multimedia presentation created in accordance with the present system and process that employs such a template is described in a co-pending application entitled “Interactive Presentation Viewing System Employing Multi-Media Components” having some of the same inventors as this application and assigned to the common assignee. This co-pending application was filed on ______ and assigned Ser. No. ______. However, the co-pending application is just an example, the template used to create a presentation could include more or fewer media components and could exhibit more or less interactive functionality.
- One example of the layout of the template selection window is shown in FIG. 2. This layout was employed in tested versions of the present system. At the top, left-hand corner of the window, there are two buttons, which the user can select by any conventional means (such as by placing the screen cursor over the button and activating a selection switch on an input device, e.g., “clicking” a button on a computer mouse). The first of the two buttons displayed at the top of the
template window 200 is theserver button 202, and the other button is thelocal button 204. Thesebuttons local button 204 is selected, only the layouts associated with those templates residing in the memory of the host computer are presented for the user's selection. If, however, theserver button 202 is selected, and the host computer is connected to a network, the presentation production system will find templates stored on remote servers accessible from the network and which are listed in a configuration file found in the system's root directory. The layouts of the templates found in this search are then presented to the user. It is noted that if the host computer is “offline”, the local templates are displayed by default. - The layouts of the local or remotely-located templates, as the case may be, are presented to the user in the
layout display sector 206 of thetemplate window 200. Thelayout display sector 206 has a separatehorizontal strip 208 dedicated to each available template, with the strips being stacked vertically. A standard graphic user interface (GUI)scroll bar 210 is provided at one side of thedisplay sector 206 to allow the user to scroll up or down to view all the layout strips 208 if there are too many available to fit them all in the vertical space allotted to the sector. Eachlayout strip 208 includes a series of columns providing information about the associated template. The first column provides athumbnail image 212 of the layout associated with the template. Thus, the user can see in miniature what the presentation window would look like if that template were chosen. The second column has the title “Name” above it in adescriptor bar 214 residing at the top of thelayout display sector 206. Thisname column 216 provides the name given the template. There is also a third column entitled “Description” in thedescriptor bar 214. Thisdescription column 218 provides a brief description of the template. The description could include a list of features offered in the template, or this information could be placed in a separate “Features” column (not shown). The last column in the example of thelayout display sector 206 shown in FIG. 2, is entitled “Author” in thedescriptor bar 214. Theauthor column 220 provides information about the person or group that created the template. The layout thumbnail and other information that is used to populate the columns of eachlayout strip 208 is parsed from metadata stored in the file containing the template. In the case of a remotely stored template, only the data needed to populate thelayout strip 208 is downloaded prior to the user selecting that template. It is noted that the template metadata is created by the author of the template, and could included additional information that can be incorporated into an existing column or placed in a new column, as desired. It is not intended to limit the present system to just those informational columns described above. Rather any number of columns can be added as desired. If the horizontal space allotted to the layout display sector is inadequate to display the entire layout strip, a scroll bar would be added at the top or bottom to allow the user to scroll and reveal any information that will not fit. - An
instruction bar 222 is located just below thelayout display sector 206. Thisbar 222 provides information and tips to the user on how to proceed with the template selection process. For example, in FIG. 2, thetemplate selection window 200 is shown as it would exist before a template has been selected. At this stage, theinstruction bar 222 states “Select a Template from the choices above”, thereby aiding the user in determining what to do next. In addition, the user can be given access to a standard help directory (not shown) to obtain further assistance. - The user chooses the particular layout that he or she wishes to use in creating a presentation and selects the associated
layout strip 208. In tested versions of the presentation production system, the selection procedure entailed placing the screen cursor over thelayout strip 208 of the desired layout and “single clicking” an input device. Upon selection several things happen. Namely, thelayout strip 208 is highlighted, the name of the selected template appears in aname field 224 located below thelayout display sector 206 and prospective download location is provided in alocation field 226 located just below thename field 224. The name appearing in thename field 224 is the name that will be given to the presentation project. While it is initially filled with the name of the selected template, the user can change it to any name he or she desires. The prospective download location is initially set to a prescribed default. For instance, in the example window shown in FIG. 2, the default download location was the “My Mitts” folder in the “My Documents” directory of the “E” drive of the host computer. The download location refers to where the data constituting the selected template will be stored. The user can change this as well. Astandard browse button 228 is provided to the right of thelocation field 226 to assist the user in specifying an alternate download location if desired. Just below thelocation field 226 is a “Project”line 230. When a template is selected this line states that the project will be created at the selected (or default) download location and that the template file will be given the selected name (or default template name). Once the user is satisfied with the selected template, file name and download location, a template selection button 232 (appearing as the “OK” button in tested versions of the present system) is selected to download the template, as well as other supporting images, code, and media files to the selected build location. It is noted that the user can also select the “Cancel”button 234 at any time during the foregoing process to exit thetemplate window 200. - While not shown in FIG. 2, the user can also be given access to a category filter—for example via a “Category” button that would open a drop-down list specifying particular categories of templates. The user accesses this list prior to selecting a template and selects one of the categories. As a result, only those templates fitting the selected categories will remain in the layout display sector. For instance, some templates might be design for training presentations and could be categorized under a “training category”. Other might be design for business presentations and be categorized under a “business” category. The author of the template would be required to specify in the metadata associated with the template file what prescribed category or categories apply to the template.
- 2.0 The Presentation Tool Window
- Upon selecting a template, the presentation tool window is opened and replaces the template window on the user's display screen. An example of such a window is provided in FIG. 3. This exemplary production tool window is used to define the layout and features of the presentation being created.
- 2.1 The Presentation Tool Window Layout
- Referring to FIG. 3, the overall window layout of a full-featured version of the presentation production system is shown. Beginning in the upper left-hand corner of the
tool window 300, aproject file sector 302 is found. Just below theproject file sector 302 is a presentationslide preview sector 304. In the upper right-hand corner of thetool window 300 is thevideo preview sector 306, and directly below that is thepresentation properties sector 308. In the area between the above-described sectors is awork sector 310 that displays a variety of work grids and informational panes depending on what part of the presentation is being constructed at the time. Just below thework sector 310 is avisual timeline editor 312, and below that is astatus line 314. Overlying the aforementioned sectors is a short-cut bar 316 displaying various icons for performing standard operations such as opening a presentation file, saving a file, cutting, copying and pasting, and the like, and finally above that is amenu bar 318 for accessing drop-down menu lists. Most of the commands found in these drop-down lists are simply alternate ways of accomplishing certain actions that will be described in the sections to follow, and so will not be expounded upon herein. However, those functions contained in the drop-down lists that are not redundant will be fully described in these sections. - It is noted that all the sectors of the presentation tool window are resizable via conventional graphic user interface resizing techniques. If the resizing of a particular sector results in there not being enough space either vertically or horizontally to display all the elements of that sector, then a standard slider-type scroll bar will appear at the top or bottom of the sector for scrolling horizontally, or at one side of the sector for scrolling vertically, or both. It is noted that even in the default size of some of the presentation tool window sectors, there will not be enough space to accommodate all the elements typically displayed therein. In these cases the aforementioned slider-type scroll bars are included, as will be discussed in the sections to follow.
- 2.2 The Project File Sector
- In general the project file section is used to enter the media components of the presentation, such as a video or audio program, electronic presentation slides (which are often referred to as the slide deck), demonstrations, documents, HTML files, or animation files (e.g., Flash files). Once the media components are entered, the project file sector displays the components in a file tree format to the user.
- The process of entering the media components starts with the user entering a video or audio program into the presentation production system to create a “Media” file. This file acts not only as the audio-visual or audio portion of the presentation, but also becomes the master track of the presentation from which all the other media elements are scheduled. To this end, all indexing, timing, and associated master track metadata are stored in the media file as well, as will be explained in more detail later.
- The file containing the video or audio track that is to become the foundation for the presentation's media file can be entered in a number of ways. For example, the user can select the media folder icon and
label 404 in the project file sector (as best seen in the enlarged view of thesector 400 provided in FIG. 4.) In tested versions of the present system, one way the user selected the media folder (or any other element displayed in the project file sector 400) was by placing the screen cursor over the icon or label and “double-clicking” with the input device. An alternate way that the user could select the media folder (or any other element) was to “click” the secondary button on the input device (typically referred to as “right-clicking”) to display a pop-up window containing a list of appropriate actions related to the folder being selected. One of these choices is an add action. The user then selects this action from the list (e.g., via a “single-clicking” maneuver). Similarly, the user can also select the files tab in the menu bar to display a drop-down list of actions which includes an “Add Media” action. The user would then select this action from the list (e.g., via a “single-clicking” maneuver). - Once the media folder is selected, a standard open
file dialog box 500, as depicted in FIG. 5, appears over at least a portion of the tool window. The user employs thedialog box 500 to find and select the file associated with the video or audio program that is to become part of the media file. This is accomplished in the typical manner, and can include files stored locally on the host computer or remote files accessible via a network connection. For instance, in the example depicted in FIG. 5, the user has specified the folder entitled “MITT2TEST_CONTENT” in the “Look in”field 502. This folder contained a demo folder and a video file designated as “d201.wmv”, both of which are listed in the dialog box'sdisplay area 504. It is noted that the “Files of Type”field 506 lists only those prescribed types of files that are acceptable for entry into the media file, thereby acting as a filter for the file types the system can handle. For example, in tested versions of the presentation production system, these file types included .asf, .wmv, and .wma files. These are just examples, the system can be readily adapted to handle any file type designed for video or audio files, and is not limited to just those employed in the tested versions. - Once the user selects an appropriate video or audio file using the open file dialog box, the presentation production system copies this file into the system. In addition, the file tree in the project file sector is updated to display the video or audio file under the media file folder. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the
media folder 404 associated with thepresentation project 402 named “test2342334” has theaforementioned video file 406 entitled “d201.wmv” associated with it. - There can be more than one video or audio file entered into the media file folder. For example, the user might want to enter a lower bandwidth version of a video file, or video or audio files of the same subject but in different languages. However, even though more than one video or audio file can be entered in the media folder, only one of the files can be the master track. Thus, if more than one file is entered, the user must designate one of them as the master track file. The selected file then appears highlighted in the project file sector tree, or visually distinguished in some way (e.g., special icon, check marked, etc.).
- The user also enters a presentation slide file into a presentation slide folder408 (which is entitled PowerPoint referring to Microsoft Corporation's PowerPoint® presentation graphics program in the example project file sector depicted in FIG. 4.). This is accomplished in the same way it was when the user entered the video or audio file into the media folder. For example, in FIG. 4, the project file tree indicates that the user entered a
presentation slide file 410 entitled “d201.ppt”. It is noted that more than one presentation slide file could also be entered in theSlide folder 408. For example, the user might want to have presentation slides in different languages. As will be described later, the display of the presentation slides is timed based on what part of the master track file is being played. This is essentially done by establishing a script which specifies at what elapsed time of the master track that a particular slide is to be displayed. Accordingly, if alternate presentation slide decks are to be used, each slide would have to cover the same subject matter so as to track with the same script, or a separate script would have to be established for each deck. As with the media files, if more than one presentation slide file is entered, the user must designate one of them as the primary slide deck, i.e., the one which is to be displayed. This selected file then appears highlighted, or visually distinguished in some manner, in the project file tree. - In addition to the media files and presentation slides, the user can optionally enter various demonstration, document, HTML and animation files which are automatically called and displayed over at least a portion of the presentation window, or are made accessible to the viewer of the presentation. For example, the user can enter one or more demonstrations which are, for example, video or audio files. These demonstration video or audio programs are typically scheduled (as will be described later) to be played at some elapsed time of the master track program. Thus, when a particular elapse time of the master track program is reached, it is paused and the demonstration video or audio clip is played. Once the demonstration clip is completed, the master track resumes playing. The user enters demonstration files in the same way he or she entered media or presentation slide files, except the demonstration files are entered into the
demos folder 412 in theproject file sector 400. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4, the user entered five separate demonstration files 414, 416, 418, 420, 422, named “demo1.wmv” through “demo5.wmv”, respectively. - The user can also enter document files in the
documents folder 424, HTML files in theHTML folder 426 and animation files in theFlash folder 428 in the project file sector. For example, FIG. 4 shows a “Word” file 430 (i.e., a document file generated by Microsoft Corporation's Word® word processing program) named “d201_transcript_final.doc” that is entered in thedocuments folder 424. It is noted that the example shown in FIG. 4 does not show any HTML or animation files that were entered by the user. This is evident by the lack of any files being listed in the tree under these folders and by the lack of a boxed plus sign symbol which is indicative of the existence of files in a folder which are not displayed, as is the convention for the tree structure employed in the project file sector. Should a user enter document, HTML or animation files they would typically, although not necessarily, be scheduled (as will be described later) to be displayed during a specified time period associated with the master track program. The master track program may or may not be paused during this display period. Typically when a window makes an appearance in the presentation, the presentation would be paused. However, the selected template would control this and could be configured to continue playing the presentation. - As indicated previously, the project file sector does more than just provide a quick and user friendly way of entering the media elements of the presentation being created. It also provides a convenient graphic representation of the media elements and their locations via the file tree format. As is conventional with these tree formats, the user can expand and collapse the various folders to show all the files in a folder or just the folder icon and label. This is done using the boxed plus signs and minus signs adjacent the folder icons. Essentially, a user can expand a contracted folder by “clicking on” the boxed plus sign that will be displayed adjacent the folder icon when files exist in the folder which are not currently displayed in the tree. Likewise, if the user wants to reduce the complexity of the tree display, he or she can collapse folders that have their associated files displayed by “clicking on” the boxed minus sign displayed adjacent the folder icon to hide the file designators.
- 2.3 The Video Preview Sector
- The video preview sector is generally used to provide a playback of the video presentation or audio program. Whenever the user enters a video or audio file into the media folder and the file is designated as the master track, it is presented in the video preview sector. It is noted that in tested versions of the present presentation production system, the first video or audio file entered into the media folder was presumed to be the master track and so was automatically displayed in the video preview sector. However, if a later-entered file is designated as the master track, that video or audio file would be presented in the video preview sector in place of the initially-entered program. More particularly, as best seen in the enlarged view of the
video preview sector 600 shown in FIG. 6, the video or audio file designated as the master track is displayed in aplayback space 602. Initially, a video is presented in the preview sector by statically displaying the first frame of the video program. In the case of an audio program, the playback space of the preview sector could be left blank (typically all black), or a predetermined visual frame or effect could be employed. For example, the playback space could display an image reading “Audio Only”, both initially and throughout the playback of the program. Alternatively, a prescribed animation sequence could be presented in theplayback space 602 during the playback of an audio program. In this case, initially the first frame of the animation sequence would be statically displayed in theplayback space 602. - The
video preview sector 600 also includescontrol buttons 604 for controlling the playback of the video or audio program. While the number ofcontrol buttons 604 can vary, they preferably at least include buttons for playing, pausing, “rewinding”, and “advancing” the video, as shown in the exemplary view of thepreview sector 600 shown in FIG. 6. Other buttons to control features such as muting the audio track of a video program, returning to the beginning of the video or audio program, and the like, can be included as well. The viewer selects the control functions by selecting the appropriate button 604 (e.g., via a “single-click” maneuver). - In addition to the video
player control buttons 604, thevideo preview sector 600 also includes acounter 606 showing both elapsed time from the beginning of the video or audio presentation and the total running time of the program. For example, in tested versions of the presentation production system, this counter took the form of “XX:XX:XX/XX:XX:XX”, where the numbers before the slash represent the hours, minutes and seconds respectively of the elapsed time, and the numbers to the right of the slash represent the hours, minutes and seconds of the total running time. - 2.4 The Presentation Slide Preview Sector
- The presentation slide preview sector is generally used to display the presentation slides associated with the selected slide file entered into the presentation slide folder. To this end, referring to the enlarged view of the presentation
slide preview sector 700 in FIG. 7, whenever the user enters a presentation slide file into the slide folder and the file is designated as the primary slide deck that is to be displayed, thumbnail images of each slide are generated and the thumbnail associated with the first slide is displayed in aslide display area 702 of the sector.Control buttons 704 are included to allow the user to move forward and backward through the slide deck with the currently selected slide being displayed in thedisplay area 702. - A
presentation slide counter 706 is also provided in the presentation slide preview sector. In tested versions of the present system, thisslide counter 706 took the form of “SLIDE XX OF XX”, where the first number refers to the sequence number of the presentation slide then displayed and the second number refers to the total number of slides in the slide deck. - It is noted that the presentation production system also includes a feature whereby “double-clicking” on a thumbnail of a slide displayed in the presentation slide preview sector launches the presentation slide creation program that was used to create it (assuming the program resides on or is accessible by the host computer), and opens the particular presentation slide file containing the displayed slide. In this way the user can readily edit the presentation slides. Closing the presentation slide creation program returns the user to the presentation production system's tool window. Preferably the playback of the master track video or audio program is paused whenever the user launches the presentation slide creation program to edit the slides. The presentation slide creation program's graphic user interface window or windows could also be displayed within the aforementioned working area, rather than in a window that overlies the presentation tool window. This creates the impression for the user of never having to leave the presentation tool and makes all the information displayed in the presentation tool window available to the user while editing the slides.
- 2.5 The Presentation Properties Sector
- When the selected template files are downloaded and the presentation tool window is opened, the window is populated with that template's default information, including information about the template's features, color settings, export options, build options, and video/audio options. The presentation properties sector provides listings of these settings and option in series of property grids, and allows the user to modify them so as to customize the presentation. Referring to the enlarged view of FIG. 8A, the
presentation properties sector 800 of the presentation tool window has three tabs at the top—namely atemplate tab 802, ametadata tab 804 and aplayer tab 806. When one of these tabs is selected, the related settings and options associated with that tab are displayed in theproperties display area 808 below. The settings and options associated with each of these tabs will now be described in the subsections to follow. - 2.5.1 Template Editor Property Grid
- The template editor property grid is accessed by selecting the aforementioned template tab. The template editor property grid is a display of the selected template's customizable attributes. The grid has two columns. The first column of each attribute line lists the name of the attribute, while the second column lists the current setting associated with that attribute. For example, consider the example template editor property grid shown in FIG. 8A. Under the “Features” heading816, the name of the first-listed attribute is “Bookmarks” 818 and appears in the first column of the attribute line. The current setting associated with the “Bookmarks”
attribute 818 is seen in the second column of the attribute line. This current setting 820 is “True” indicating that the bookmarks feature is active in the selected template. This bookmarks feature is described in the aforementioned co-pending application. - The attributes list in the template editor property grid can be presented in two different formats. One of these formats, which is not shown in FIG. 8A, is initiated by selecting the “AZ”
logo 810 located just above theproperties display area 808. This format organizes the attributes in alphabetical order. The second format is the expandable table format. The expandable table format is the default format, and can be reinitiated if the list is in the alphabetical format by selecting the categorizedtable icon 812. This is also the format depicted in FIG. 8A. In the expandable table format, the attributes are group together under expandable category headings. If the category is already expanded to show all its attribute lines, a boxed minus sign appears adjacent the category heading. Selecting this boxed minus sign collapses the category such that only the category title is displayed, along with a boxed plus sign which can be selected to expand the category. This contraction and expansion feature is useful in that categories the user is not interested in, or which have already been customized, can be collapsed so that more of the remaining expanded categories can be displayed in theproperties display area 808. For example, it can be seen in FIG. 8A, that a portion of the list above the “Features” heading 816 is out of view. Granted, the user can employ thescroll bar 814 located at the side of theproperties display area 808 to bring the missing attributes in to view, but then the bottom of the list could not be seen as depicted in FIG. 8B where only a portion of the top of the attributes list is in view. - Some of the attributes lines have the boxed plus sign displayed adjacent thereto. This indicates that there is a list of sub-attributes associated with the attribute. To view these additional sub-attributes, the user “clicks on” the boxed plus sign, and the table expands to include the aforementioned sub-attributes. This is shown in the enlarged view of the image heading822, shown in FIG. 8C. As can be seen, the
logo attribute 824, listed under the image heading 822 is expanded (as compared to the “Image” heading shown in FIG. 8A), and includes several sub-attributes, along with their current settings. When expanded an attribute line will have a boxed minus sign displayed next to it, such as the one 826 shown adjacent the “logo”attribute 824 in FIG. 8C. The user selects this boxed minus sign to collapse the list of sub-attributes once he or she is finished viewing or modifying them. - It is also noted that the template editor property grid can be a master list of all the templates attributes, whether editable or not, with the attributes that are not editable by the user being “grayed out”. Alternately, the template editor property grid could just list those attributes that are editable by the user.
- The user is able to change editable attributes in the attribute list in a variety of ways depending on the type of attribute. For example, in tested versions of the presentation production system, any attribute associated with the color of a portion of the presentation window included a small rectangular color patch in the current setting column (along with a standard color code) depicting the current color setting. This can be seen in FIG. 8B where the
attributes 830 listed under the color scheme heading 828 each have such acolor patch 832 shown in the current setting column of the attribute line. When the user selects such an attribute, a pop-up window appears over the presentation tool window showing a color pallet (i.e., typically a grid of color patches each showing a different color). The user can then select a color from the color pallet and the selected color becomes the current setting for the attribute under consideration. Upon selection of a color from the pallet, the pop-up window closes and the selected color appears in the form of the aforementioned color patch in the current setting column of the attribute. - Another way a user changes some of the editable attributes in the template editor property grid, is to first select the attribute that it is desired to change. This causes the column of the attribute line containing the name of the selected attribute to become highlighted, as shown in FIG. 8B where the “Bookmarks”
attribute 818 has been selected. In addition to highlighting the attribute name, adown arrow 834 also appear at one end of the column of the attribute line containing the attribute's current setting. The user selects thedown arrow 834, and a drop-down list appears over the presentation tool window. This drop-down list is a list of optional settings that the user can choose from to customize the elected attribute. To effect a change in the current setting, the user simply selects the desired option from the drop-down list and closes the list by selecting the down arrow once again. It is noted that when a user selects an attribute, a description of that attribute may appear in theattribute description area 836 just below theproperties display area 808. - Examples of the type of attributes that can be modified using the template editor property grid include the templates color scheme, layout features, fonts, images, presentation slide export and thumbnail options, as well as video and audio playback options. FIGS.8A-C show some of the specific attributes that can be associated with the foregoing general attribute categories, depending on the particulars of the selected template.
- 2.5.2 MetaData Property Grid
- Referring now to FIG. 9, the
metadata property grid 900 is accessed by selecting theaforementioned metadata tab 902. Thisgrid 900 is a display of informational items that are embedded into the presentation data file that defines the presentation being created. This information can be parsed from the file and used in a variety of ways. For example, the metadata can include keywords to assist a search engine in finding the file. Another example is that an enterprise's intranet regulations may require certain information about any file transferred or made available on the network include certain information about the file, such as the author, its origin, etc. In the present case, the required data is simply included in the presentation file's metadata so as to be available for inspection. - The metadata is added to the presentation file by the user entering the data into the appropriate column of the
metadata property grid 900, which is displayed in thedisplay area 904 of the presentation properties sector. Thegrid 900 itself is organized much like the template editor property grid in thatmetadata titles 906 appear in the first column of each data line and the data associated with the title appears in thesecond column 908 of the line. Themetadata titles 906 can be displayed in alphabetical order by selecting the “AZ”button 910, or as a categorized list with category headers in an expandable table format. As before, the categories of the expandable table can be expanded or collapsed by selecting an adjacently displayed boxed plus or minus sign, respectively. Also as before, while the table format is the default format for the metadata property grid, a categorizedtable icon 912 is included to switch back from the alphabetical listing mode. - The particular metadata titles that are included in the metadata list are part of the template data that is populated into the metadata property grid when the presentation tool window is first opened. This default metadata listing, which appears in the grid when the user selects the
metadata tab 902, can be the only data list associated with the selected template, or it can be one among multiple listings. If there are more than one set of metadata listings provided in the template data, the alternate sets can be accessed via theschema field 914. Theschema field 914 displays the title given to the metadata listing that is currently active in the metadata property grid, unless there is only one such listing and then the schema line can optionally be left blank, as it is in FIG. 9. If there are more than one metadata listings available in the selected template, then the user can change from the default listing to another using theschema field 914. Specifically, theschema field 914 includes a drop-downlist arrow 916 at one end. The user selects thisarrow 916 and a drop-down list appears over the presentation tool window with a list of available metadata schemas. The user can select one of schemas, and upon closing the drop-down window, the metadata titles associated with the selected schema appear in themetadata property grid 900. - In addition to the
metadata titles 906, the template data can include default data selections (not shown) associated with a metadata topic. This default data is populated into the grid when the grid is opened, just like the metadata titles. Thus, the default data selection will appear in the second column of a metadata line. The default selection may be the only choice for a particular metadata item, or it can be one of many pre-defined choices. If the default selection is the only pre-defined choice, the user can change it by selecting the column containing the default choice and manually entering in the desired data, e.g., by using a keyboard connected to the host computer. If multiple pre-defined choices are available, the data column of a metadata line can include a drop-down list arrow (not shown), which the user selects to open a drop-down list of the available choices. The user can then select one of the choices and upon closing the drop-down list, the selected data will appear in the data column of the metadata line. - In cases where there is no pre-defined data selection for a particular metadata item, the user enters the called-for data by selecting the empty column adjacent a metadata title in the grid. A text cursor will appear in the column and the user enters the required data, e.g. using a keyboard.
- It is noted that when a user selects a metadata item from the displayed list, a description of that item may appear in the
metadata description area 918 located just below thedisplay area 904. - It is also possible that the user would want metadata included in the presentation data file defining the presentation being created that is in a language other than English, or in more than one language. This is possible by employing the
language field 920, which is located just below theschema field 914. The template data can include a default language choice. The chosen language appears in thelanguage field 920. For example, in the example metadata grid depicted in FIG. 9, thelanguage field 920 indicates that the chosen language for the metadata is English. If the user wants to specify metadata in a language other than the default language, he or she selects the drop-downlist arrow 922 residing at the side of thelanguage field 920. The user selects thearrow 922 to open a drop-down list of the available language choices. The user can then select one of the choices and upon closing the drop-down list, the selected language will appear in thelanguage field 920. The user then enters the metadata as described previously, except in the selected language. The metadata portion of the presentation data file incorporates metadata of different languages by including a language designator key with the data. - 2.5.3 Player Property Grid
- Referring now to FIG. 10, the
player property grid 1000 is accessed by selecting theaforementioned player tab 1002. Thisgrid 1000 is a display of both informational and editable items associated with the master track video or audio media file discussed previously. This data is ultimately stored in both the presentation data file and in the media file. - The
grid 1000 is organized like the template editor and metadata property grids. Specifically, labels 1006 appear in the first column of each data line and the data associated with the label appears in thesecond column 1008 of the line. Thelabels 1006 can be displayed in alphabetical order by selecting the “AZ”button 1010, or as a categorized list with category headers in an expandable table format that possesses the capability to expand or collapses using the previously-described boxed plus or minus signs. Also as before, while the table format is the default format for the player property grid, a categorizedtable button 1012 is included to switch back from the alphabetical listing mode. - The labels included in the player property grid come from the template data that is populated into the grid when the presentation tool window is first opened. In addition, the informational data items associated with those player attributes that are not editable are shown in the grid (in “grayed out” form), as are any default data selections associated with a player attribute that is editable. The default selections may be the only choice for a particular data item, or it can be one of many pre-defined choices. If the default selection is the only predefined choice, the user can change it by selecting the
column 1008 containing the default choice and manually entering in the desired data, e.g., by using a keyboard connected to the host computer. If multiple pre-defined choices are available, thedata column 1008 of a metadata line can include a drop-down list arrow (not shown), which the user selects to open a drop-down list of the available choices. The user can then select one of the choices and upon closing the drop-down list, the selected data will appear in thedata column 1008 of the player attribute line. In cases where there is no pre-defined data selection for a particular data item, the user can enter the called-for data by selecting theempty column 1008 adjacent a metadata title in the grid. A text cursor will appear in thecolumn 1008 and the user enters the required data, e.g., using a keyboard. - In general, the player property grid includes editable attributes that allow a user to adjust the playback size, dimensions and quality of the master track. In addition, data lines allowing the user to enter the author's name, a description and title of the video or audio program, its copyright and its rating, can be included as shown in FIG. 10.
- 2.6 Data Entry Grids
- The “Data Entry” grids allow the user to enter scheduling information into the presentation production system's presentation data file and the master track media file to drive the timeline of the presentation. The following sections will described each of these scheduling grids and how they are used.
- 2.6.1 The Scripts Grid
- As soon the user has entered a video or audio program that is designated as the master track, the aforementioned work sector changes. Specifically, the work sector, which is initially blank, displays the “Scripts” grid. Referring to FIG. 11, the
scripts grid 1100 is essentially a scheduling table where the user enters events (sometimes referred to as script commands) that will be triggered during the playback of the presentation. Every line in the table corresponds to a scheduled event in reference to the master track's timeline. There are three columns in each event line. The first column of each event line, which is under theheader 1102 titled “Time Code”, specifies the time an event is to take place. The event lines are sorted in order of the time code starting with the earliest event scheduled. The specified time corresponds to the elapse time of the master track. The second column of each event line, which is under theheader 1104 titled “Script Type”, specifies the type of event that is to occur. The third column is under theheader 1106 titled “Script Param”, which is short for script parameter. The script parameter is a variable field that can contain any UNICODE data that should be passed to the template with the script command to implement the associated event. Typically, this will be a reference to the specific resource desired, such as a presentation slide number that is to be displayed, a file name of a file that is to be opened, or the address of a site that is to be contacted. - As for the script types, these can include events such as changing the presentation slide displayed (which in tested versions of the presentation production system were called out as script type “Slide” in the grid), launching a demonstration video or audio program (which in tested versions of the system were called out as script type “Demo” in the grid), and various other custom code call events (which in tested versions of the system were called out as script type “Script” in the grid). These custom events can include opening a document, HTML or animation file (e.g., pausing the presentation and opening the designated file in a separate window), opening a URL (e.g., opening a web browser to the URL which in turn pauses the presentation and opens a separate browser window), accessing a web service (e.g., contacts a web service that logs the status of the presentation to provide statistical data to the presentation's creator on it use), opening another presentation, stopping the presentation, among others. In the case of a custom event, it is noted that the selected template must be designed to respond to the event and recognize the script type command and associated script parameter.
- In operation, the presentation receives the “Script Type” and the “Script Param” at a specified time code corresponding to a point in the timeline of the playback of the presentation. The presentation then responds accordingly by changing the presentation slide displayed, or by launching a demonstration video, and so on.
- The user can enter scheduling information into the Scripts grid in a variety of ways. One of these ways is via a manual entry process. This process begins with the user starting the master track video or audio program. The program is started using the aforementioned player control buttons of the video preview sector. When the master track video or audio program reaches a point where the user wants to insert an event of some type, the user pauses the program using the pause button of the video preview sector (or by some other appropriate method such as depressing a so-called hot key on a keyboard connected to the host computer that has been configured to pause the program). At this point, the user enters the script type, script parameter, and optionally the time code. The presentation production system can be configured to enter the time code automatically. If so, then the time code appears in the
time code field 1108. If the time code is not set to be entered automatically, the user enters it in the time code field (e.g., by using a keyboard connected to the host computer). The user can read the time code that needs to be entered from the elapse time counter in the video preview sector. In either case, the time code corresponds the elapse time of the master track program and takes the form of “XX:XX:XX:X” referring to the hours, minutes, seconds and tenths of a second, respectively. The user enters the script type either by entering it manually in the script type field 1110 (e.g., using the aforementioned keyboard), or by selecting the drop-downlist arrow 1112 at the side of the script type field and then selecting the desired script type from the drop-down list that appears. Upon selecting the desired script type, the drop-down list disappears and the selected script type appears in thescript type field 1110. Finally, the user enters the appropriate script parameter in thescript param field 1114, and then selects the “Add Script Command”button 1116. Upon selecting thebutton 1116, the new script command is entered and the entered data appears as a new event line in thescripts grid 1100 in the appropriate place. - An alternate way for the user to enter scheduling information of the type described above is by importing a pre-defined script. In its simplest form the predefined script is simply a text file (i.e., .txt file) formatted in the same way as the scripts grid with separate event lines each made up of a time code designation, script type and script parameter. An example of such a script file is shown in FIG. 12A. To import the pre-defined script file, the user selects the File menu button of the presentation tool window (see320 of FIG. 3) which results in the appearance of a drop-down list of commands. The user selects the “Import” command from the list, which in turn causes a sub-list to appear that includes a “Script File” element. The user selects the “Script File” element and a standard open file window appears. The user employs this window to find and select the text file containing the pre-defined script. The list is then imported and the script command data appears in the scripts grid.
- In some programs used to create presentation slides, timing data can be specified. This timing data is then included in the presentation slide file and can be parsed for use by the presentation production system, assuming the timing data is in the proper format as described above and relates to the elapse time of the master track program. Should this be the case, the system can be readily configured to recognize the existence of the timing data in the presentation slide file when it is entered and to automatically generate script commands and enter the data in the scripts grid by listing the time code and slide number along with identifying the event as a slide change (i.e., specifying the script type as Slide).
- Once one or more event lines are entered and displayed in the scripts grid, it is possible to edit the schedule data. To edit a previously entered event line, the user selects the line in the scripts grid (e.g., via a double-click maneuver). This action results in the appearance of a pop-up
window 1300, as shown in FIG. 13. As can be seen in FIG. 13, the scheduling information contained in the selectedevent line 1302, appears in the appropriate places in the pop-upwindow 1300. Specifically, the time code appears in thetime code field 1304, the script type appears in theScript Type field 1306, and the script parameter appears in thescript param field 1308. The user can change any of this scheduling information by selecting and overtyping the existing data. In addition, thescript type field 1306 has a drop-downlist arrow 1310 that the user can select and then choose a script type from the resulting drop-down list. Once the desired changes have been made to the scheduling information in thepopup window 1300, the user selects thesave button 1312 to implement the changes in the script grid. It is also possible to delete an event line by selecting it in the scripts grid and then entering a delete command (such as by using the delete key on a keyboard of the host computer). If, however, the user decides not to make any changes to the selected event line, he or she can select the cancelbutton 1314. In either case, the pop-upwindow 1300 disappears. - It is noted that while the scripts grid is automatically placed in the work sector when the master track is designated, it can also be called up by selecting the
scripts tab 1118 shown in FIG. 11. This is useful when the user is working in one of the other data entry grids, and wishes to return to the scripts grid to view or edit the scheduled events. - 2.6.2 The Markers Grid
- The markers grid is essentially used to create and edit a table of contents for the presentation. In this way, major divisions or events along the timeline can be titled for fast navigation and indexing to that time code. Typical presentations include a marker for each major slide change, or change in topic within the presentation. In addition, subtopics can be marked and arranged into hierarchies under the contents tab, as will be discussed shortly. Referring to FIG. 14, the
markers grid 1400 is accessed by selecting themarker tab 1402. Thegrid 1400 is simply a table of marker entries each having a titledtime code column 1404 and a titledmarker text column 1406. The marker entries are created and edited in the same ways as the event lines in the scripts grid. - Specifically, the user can enter the marker entries manually by pausing the master track program at the point where he or she wants to insert a marker, and then entering the marker text into the
marker text field 1408. In addition, if the time code is not automatically entered, the user enters it into thetime code field 1410. The user then selects the “Add Marker”button 1412. Upon selecting thisbutton 1412, the data is entered and appears as a new marker entry in themarkers grid 1400 in the appropriate time-ordered place. - Alternately, the user can import the marker information as a pre-defined list. As with the pre-defined script list, the marker list can be a text file (i.e., .txt file) formatted in the same way as the markers grid with separate marker entries each made up of a time code designation and marker text. An example of such a contents marker file is shown in FIG. 12B. To import the pre-defined markers file, the user selects the File menu button of the presentation tool window (see320 of FIG. 3) and then selects the “Import” command. The user next selects the “Marker File” element from the sub-list display, and uses the resulting open file window to find and select the text file containing the pre-defined marker list. The list is then imported and appears in the markers grid.
- The marker entries are edited as with the event lines in the Scripts grid by first selecting the line in the marker grid. Referring now to FIG. 15, a marker entry pop-up
window 1500 appears with the marker data of the selected entry appearing in the appropriate places in thewindow 1500. Specifically, the time code appears in thetime code field 1502, and the marker text appears in themarker text field 1504. The user can then change the marker data by selecting and overtyping the existing data. Once the desired changes have been made, the user selects thesave button 1506 to implement the changes. It is also possible to delete a marker entry by selecting it in the markers grid and then entering a delete command (such as by using the delete key on a keyboard of the host computer). Or, if the user decides not to make any changes, he or she can select the cancelbutton 1508. In either case, the pop-upwindow 1500 disappears. - 2.6.3 The Transcription Grid
- The transcription grid is used to enter and edit a transcript of the audio portion of the master track for optional display during the presentation. Further, alternate transcriptions in different languages can be entered using the transcription grid. Referring to FIG. 16, the
transcription grid 1600 is accessed by selecting thetranscription tab 1602. Thegrid 1600 is a table of transcription segments displayed in a column titled “Transcription Text” 1606 with an adjacent time code listed in a “Time Code”column 1604. The transcription segments can be of any length, such as a phrase, sentence, block of text, paragraph, or even a large section of text. - The transcript entries can be entered and edited manually as follows. The user first pauses the master track program at the point where he or she wants to insert a transcription segment. Next, the user employs a language field (not shown) to specify the language of the transcription text being entered. The presentation production system can store multiple language transcriptions, indexed by a language key, into the final presentation data file. The language field works in the same way as that employed in the previously described metadata property grid. Specifically, the default language is English. However, the user can select an alternate language designation by selecting a drop-down list arrow located at the end of the language field to reveal a list of languages to choose from. The user selects the desired language and the drop-down list closes with the selected language designation being displayed in the Language field. After the language has been designated by either entering a new language designation or maintaining the default English language designation, the user, enters the text of the transcription segment into the
transcription text field 1608. In addition, if the time code is not automatically entered, the user enters it into thetime code field 1610. The user then selects the “Add Text” button (not shown), which causes the data to be entered and appear as a new transcript entry in thetranscription grid 1600 in the appropriate time-ordered place. - It is noted that in order to show as many of the individual transcript entries as possible in the available vertical space in the work sector of the presentation tool window, the text of the segment can be extended horizontally. The result is, however, that much of the text cannot be seen, as well as the “Add Text” button, in the initial default view of the transcript grid (as shown in FIG. 16). Accordingly, a
scroll bar 1612 is provided to allow the user to bring the hidden text into view. Asimilar scroll bar 1614 is provided at one end of the work sector to allow the user to bring into view transcript entries that are outside the viewing area in the work sector. - An alternate and perhaps more practical method of entering the transcript data because of its speed involves importing a previously compiled text-based transcription file. Any human-readable Unicode formatted file type could the used as the transcription file, as long as it is laid out as discrete entries each having a time code and associated transcription text. To import a transcription file, the user first uses the aforementioned language field (not shown) to specify the language of the transcription text being imported. After the language has been designated by either entering a new language designation or maintaining the default English language designation, the user selects the file menu button of the presentation tool window (see320 of FIG. 3) and then selects the “Import” command. The user next selects the “Transcription File” element from the sub-list display, and uses the resulting Open File window to find and select the file containing the transcription entries. The transcription entries are then parsed from the imported file and become part of the presentation production system file. In addition, the transcription entries are displayed in the transcription grid.
- The transcription entries are edited in the same way as the event lines in the scripts grid and the marker entries in the marker grid—namely by first selecting the entry in the transcription grid that is to be modified. Referring now to FIG. 17, a transcription entry pop-up
window 1700 appears with the transcription text and time code of the selected entry appearing in the appropriate places in thewindow 1700. Specifically, the time code appears in thetime code field 1702, and the transcription text appears in thetranscription text field 1704. The user can then change the transcription entry data by selecting and overtyping the existing data. Once the desired changes have been made, the user selects thesave button 1706 to implement the changes in the transcription grid. It is also possible to delete a transcription entry by selecting it in the transcription grid and then entering a delete command (such as by using the delete key on a keyboard of the host computer). However, if the user decides not to make any changes, he or she selects the cancelbutton 1708. - The transcription grid also includes two additional functions. The first involves correcting for an offset time code. Sometimes when a transcription file is employed to enter the transcription data, the time codes specified in the file will be offset by some amount of time from the actual timeline of the presentation's master track program. This is often the case when the transcript file is created by logging the entries from an audio tape. An offset condition may also occur in imported scripts and marker entry files (although typically less often). To synchronize the transcript (or script or table of contents) to the master track program, an offset time code correction module is included in the presentation production system. This module is initiated by the user selecting the Tools menu button of the presentation tool window (see322 of FIG. 3) and then selecting the “Offset Timecode” command. This results in the offset time code window being displayed over a portion of the presentation tool window. The offset
time code window 1800 is shown in FIG. 18. To use thewindow 1800, the user selects the blank “Apply To:” square next to the type of entry involved. Thus, if the imported transcript file's time codes are skewed, the user would select the “Transcript” square 1802. Likewise, if it is imported script commands or marker entries that are skewed, the user would select either the “Scripts Command” square 1804 or the “Markers” square 1806. A check mark will appear in the selected “Apply To:” square. Next, the user enters the amount of time the time codes specified in the offending imported file are offset from the actual timeline of the master track program. This offset can be determined by viewing the master track program and comparing its elapse time counter to the time codes listed in the work sector for the script, markers or transcript as the case may be. Alternately, in the case of a time-skewed transcript file, it is noted that a transcript of a presentation will typically start at time zero (i.e., time code 00:00:00:0). If the first transcript entry in the imported transcript file does not start at time zero, then the amount of the offset is simply the time code that is listed for this first entry. Further, the presentation production system can be configured to alert a user that the first entry in an imported transcript file does not begin at time zero and offer to correct the offset automatically. - Assuming that a time code offset condition is not corrected automatically, once the offset time is determined, the user enters it into the “Enter Offset in TimeCode”
field 1808 of the OffsetTime Code window 1800. This is accomplished via a select and overtype method, or by using the standard increase/decrease arrows field 1808. It is noted that the segments of the “Enter Offset in TimeCode”field 1808 correspond to the hour/minute/second/tenths of second time code format (i.e., XX:XX:XX:X). The user then specifies whether the entered offset is to be subtracted or added to the time codes listed in the applicable imported file before being saved into the presentation data file and displayed in the work sector. This is done by selecting either the “Subtract”button 1814 or the “Add”button 1816. Upon selection of the “Subtract” or “Add”buttons button 1818. - The second of the additional functions associated with the Transcription grid involves customizing how the transcript data is displayed in the presentation. Generally, a user can tag the transcript data with HTML or XML tags to modify the display of the information in the finalized presentation. For example, when an XML file is used as the presentation data file as in tested versions of the present system, a user can tag a transcript line with a custom XML tag like:
- <codeblock> for (int x=0; x<10; x++) </codeblock>.
- Upon displaying the transcript in the finalized presentation, the presentation system will parse this line of a transcript segment and alter the appearance of that segment of the transcript within the transcription window in accordance with the tag instructions.
- 2.6.4 The Contents/Links Editor
- The contents/links editor is used for viewing and editing the hierarchy of a table of contents of the presentation, as well for adding links at a global, marker or presentation slide level. Referring to FIG. 3 once again, the contents/links editor is accessed by selecting the
contents tab 324. Upon selecting thecontents tab 324, theaforementioned work sector 310 displays a two-part editor view. This two-part editor view is depicted in FIG. 19. As can be seen, the left side of the view depicts a hierarchical table ofcontents tree 1900 showing each topic and subtopic of the presentation and the presentations slides that are displayed while the particular topic or subtopic is being presented. The topics and subtopics are the markers entered in the markers grid that were discussed previously. In addition, there is a “Global Links”line 1902 at the top of the tree that will be discussed shortly. A scroll bar (not shown) is provided on one side of the tree when the tree is too long to be viewed in its entirety in the vertical space allocated to the work sector. The user can use this scroll bar to view portions of the tree that are out of view. - One purpose of the table of
contents tree 1900 is to provide a graphical representation of the flow of the presentation, and especially the hierarchy of the topics being discussed. When the markers are entered in the markers grid, there is no provision for specifying their hierarchy. Thus, when the table ofcontents tree 1900 is first viewed, all the topics are depicted as having equal status. In order to make thetree 1900 truly representative of the hierarchical flow of the presentation, it is necessary for the user to edit the tree. This is accomplished by selecting and gaining access to an action list that includes commands to increase or decrease the indent of a marker in thetree 1900. For example, in tested versions of the presentation production system, a user placed the screen cursor over the marker whose hierarchy was to be changes and then performed a “right-click” to make the action list appear in a pop-up window. The user then selected either the increase indent or decrease indent command to change the hierarchy of the selected marker in the tree. Thus, referring to FIG. 19, the markers “Does Not Compute” 1904, “5 Common Upgrade Issues” 1906, and “Variants” 1908 were originally all listed at the same level as the “Does Not Compute” 1904. The user increased the indent of the “5 Common Upgrade Issues” 1906 marker one level to nest it in the subtopic level shown in FIG. 19. Similarly, the user increased the indent of the “Variants” 1908 marker two levels to nest it in the sub-subtopic level shown in the figure. Note that the presentation slides that are displayed during the presentation of these topics remain associated with the markers in thetree 1900, even when the hierarchy of the tree is changed. Thetree 1900 also has an expandable format. Specifically, if a marker having slides associated therewith is shown with the slide labels, aboxed minus sign 1918 appears adjacent the marker label. Selecting this boxedminus sign 1918 collapses the branch such that only the marker label is displayed, along with a boxed plus sign (not shown) which can be selected to expand the branch once again. - The second purpose of the table of contents tree is to aid the user in establishing the links that will be listed in a links sector of the viewer's presentation window, and when. To add links to the presentation, the user selects either the
global links node 1902, one of the marker nodes (e.g., marker 1904), or a slide node (e.g., slide 1910). If a link is added to theglobal node 1902, the link will be displayed throughout the entire presentation. If the link is added to a marker node, it will be displayed in the presentation only while the topic associated with the marker is being presented. And finally, if a link is added to a slide node, it will be displayed in the presentation only during the time that the slide is displayed. - To view existing links and add new ones to one of the tree nodes, the user employs the
links grid 1912 on the left side of the work sector. To use thegrid 1912, the user first selects the node in the table ofcontents tree 1900 that he or she want to associate with a link as discussed above. This causes a list of the links currently associated with the selected node to appear in theLinks grid 1912. The link is identified by a link name listed under the column entitled “Display Text” 1914. This is the name that is displayed in the link sector of the viewer's presentation window during the portion of the presentation corresponding to the selected node. In addition, a link is identified in the links grid by a URL address listed under the column entitled “URL” 1916. To add a link to the selected node, the user enters the name of the link in thedisplay text field 1922 located above thedisplay text column 1914, and enters the URL address of the link in theURL field 1920 located above theURL column 1916. Once the link name and address are entered, the user selects an “Add Link” button (not shown). This associates the link with the selected node and causes the link name to be displayed in the presentation window during the appropriate part of the presentation. In addition, the newly entered link will be displayed in the list of links associated with the selected node in thelinks grid 1912. - The links can also be edited. To accomplish this task, the user selects the
global links node 1902, a marker nodes or a slide node in the table ofcontents tree 1900. This results in the list of existing links associated with the selected node being displayed in thelinks grid 1912. The user then selects the link he or she wishes to change. A link pop-up window (not shown) appears with the name and URL of the selected link appearing in the appropriate places. Specifically, the link's name appears in a display text field, and the link's URL appears in the URL field. The user can then change the link data by selecting and overtyping the existing data. Once the desired changes have been made, the user selects a save button to implement the changes in the links grid. It is also possible to delete a link entry by selecting it in the links grid and then entering a delete command (such as by using the delete key on a keyboard of the host computer). However, if the user decides not to make any changes, he or she selects a cancel button. - 2.6.5 The Presentation Data File Preview Pane
- The presentation data file preview pane provides a listing to date of the underlying presentation data file that is being generated as the user creates a presentation with the present system. Referring to FIG. 20, the presentation data
file preview pane 2000 is accessed by selecting the presentationdata file tab 2002. It is noted that since the presentation data file in tested versions of the present system takes the form of a XML file, thetab 2002 in FIG. 20 is labeled “XML”. In response, the presentation production system displays thecurrent listing 2004 of the presentation data file in the aforementioned work sector. Ascroll bar 2006 is provided at one side of the work sector to allow the user to scroll through the entire file, which typically will be too long to display in its entirety within the vertical space allotted the work sector. - 2.6.6 The Output Panel
- As will be discussed in more detail later, a project builder module of the presentation production system takes all the data input by the user via the foregoing user interfaces and build a presentation package that can be run by the presentation viewer. The project builder module is invoked by the user selecting the build menu button of the presentation tool window (see326 of FIG. 3) and then selecting either the “Build Project” command or the “Rebuild Project” command. The “Build Project” command is used to build new presentation packages and to re-build previous built and saved presentation packages that only have changes that can be made to the existing project file, such as changes in the template attributes or the events schedule. However, more extensive changes to an existing presentation package, particularly the introduction of a new presentation slide deck, should be accomplished using the “Rebuild Project” command. Essentially, the “Rebuild Project” command wipes out the existing project directory for the presentation package and creates a new one.
- Regardless of which build command is chosen, an output panel is automatically displayed in the work sector. The output panel details build information and the status of each step in the build process. In addition, any errors encountered in the build process are reported for troubleshooting purposes.
- It is noted that the output panel can also be accessed when the work area is being used for another function by the user selecting the
output tab 2100, as shown in FIG. 21. If the foregoing build process has not yet been attempted, the work sector of the presentation tool window will be blank when theoutput tab 2100 is selected. However, selecting the output tab subsequent to a build, results in the build andstatus information 2102 being displayed in the work sector, as depicted in FIG. 21. - 2.6.7 The Preview Display
- The preview display allows the user to view the presentation as it will appear to a viewer. Referring to FIG. 22, selecting the
preview tab 2200 causes the presentation production system to do a fast build and display theproject 2202 within the work sector of the presentation tool window. The author can pause the preview using thepause button 2206 and restart the preview using thepaly button 2204. In this way, the author can then review the selections of color, font, layout, and timing that have been made to date. This allows the author to check the quality of and preview their work within the presentation production system itself, and to change it as needed. To this end, the user can pause the preview using thepause button 2206 therein, and go to the appropriate place to edit the attribute or event it is desired to change. After the desired changes are made, the user can select thepreview tab 2200 once again to review the modifications. - 2.7 The Visual Timeline Editor
- The visual timeline editor provides a graphic representation of the scheduled script commands, markers entries and transcription segments in a “visual” timeline format. As such, it allows the user to easily see these scheduled events without having to resort to the previously-described data grids. In addition, the timeline editor gives the user the capability to move the scheduled events right from the timeline, without having to go into the respective data entry grids.
- The
aforementioned timeline 2300 is shown in FIG. 23. Near the top of thetimeline 2300 is an elapsedtime ruler 2302. Thisruler 2302 is graduated into equally-spaced time intervals starting with time code “00:00:00:0 and continuing to the end of the total presentation time. Just above the ruler are two sizing buttons. Thefirst button 2304 is a boxed plus sign, and thesecond button 2306 is a boxed minus sign. Each time the user selects thefirst button 2304, the resolution of theruler 2302 increases such that more of the presentation timeline is seen in the same horizontal space allotted to the timeline. Conversely each time the user selects thesecond button 2306, the resolution of theruler 2302 decreases such that less of the presentation timeline is shown. To account for theruler 2302 representing more of the presentation timeline, either the number of graduations per unit length is increased, or each time interval is made to represent a longer period of time. For example, where in one view each graduation might represent a 1 second interval, the graduations could represent a 2 second interval in a view showing more of the presentation timeline. Regardless of the ruler's scope,time code designations 2308 appear periodically at equal intervals along the ruler so that the user can determine where in the presentation timeline an event depicted below the ruler will occur. It is noted that the interval between these time code designations will increase as more of the timeline is shown, so that they can remain at a size that is legible to the user. In the view depicted in FIG. 23, each graduation represented a two second interval and a time code designation was provided every 10 seconds. Below theruler 2302 are three horizontal event scheduling bands. Thefirst band 2310 depicts where a script command event will occur in the presentation timeline, whereas thesecond band 2312 andthird band 2314 respectively depict where the aforementioned contents markers have been set and where each transcription segment begins. The script commands, markers and transcription segment starting points are represented by different icons. In tested versions of the timeline, theicon 2316 shown in thescripts command band 2310 was used to represent a scripts command, theicon 2318 shown in themarkers band 2312 was used to represent a contents marker, and theicon 2320 shown in thetranscription band 2314 was used to represent a transcription segment starting point. While these particular icons where employed in tested versions of the timeline, other icons could be used in their place. However, it is preferred that whatever icon is used in each band, it be readily distinguishable from the other icons used in the other bands. It is noted that the icons are centered about the elapse time corresponding to their time code. - The
timeline 2300 also includes avertical bar 2322 representing the elapsed time of the presentation. When the master track program is playing, thisbar 2322 moves horizontally across theruler 2302 andscheduling bands line 2322 stops moving and remains at a place representing the elapsed time of the program. The user can drag thebar 2322 back and forth along the timeline (e.g., using a standard graphical dragging procedure). When the user re-positions thebar 2322 in this manner, the presentation production system jumps the master track program to the point corresponding to the elapsed time indicated by the line. In addition, the system causes the presentation slide displayed in the aforementioned presentation slide preview sector to change to the slide scheduled to be displayed at the elapsed time now indicated by thebar 2322, assuming the bar passes a scheduled slide change as represented by the ascript command icon 2316 appearing in thescript command band 2310. - A presentation will typically be long enough that its entire timeline will not fit within the horizontal space allocated to the
timeline 2300, regardless of the sizing. Accordingly, ascroll bar 2324 is provided at the bottom of thetimeline 2300 to bring into view hidden portions of the presentation timeline. It is noted that if the aforementionedvertical bar 2322 is dragged to the end of the displayed portion of thetimeline 2300, the view scrolls automatically such that the portions of the presentation timeline beyond that end are brought into view. - In the foregoing way the user is able to use the timeline editor to move through the presentation to review a place of interest. Further, the user can view the details of a scheduled event. Specifically, the user can place the screen cursor over an
icon script command icon 2400, a pop-upwindow 2402 appears that details the script type 2404 (e.g., slide), the time code associated with theevent 2406 and the script parameter 2408 (e.g., [slide no.] 2). In addition, a thumbnail of theslide 2410 can be displayed in the pop-up window as well. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 24B, if the user hovers the cursor over amarker icon 2412, a pop-up 2414 appears detailing the event type 2416 (namely “Marker”), the time code associated with themarker 2418 and the name of the marker 2420 (e.g., “5 Common Upgrades”). And, as shown in FIG. 24C, if the user hovers the cursor over atranscription icon 2422, a pop-up 2424 appears detailing the event type 2426 (namely “Text” referring to transcription text),-the time code associated withtranscription text 2428 and the first few words of the transcription text 2430 (e.g., “My name's Ed”). - Still further, referring once again to FIG. 23, the user can select an
icon - In addition to reviewing, the user can also edit the presentation using the timeline editor. For example, the user can select and drag the script command, marker and
transcription segment icons respective bands script command icon 2316 representing the display of a particular presentation slide, to a location in thescript command band 2310 corresponding to an earlier point in the presentation timeline. The presentation production system would respond by replacing the time code originally entered for that event with the time code associated with the icon's new position in thetimeline 2300. - The user can do much more than just move events using the timeline editor. The user can edit the details of an event associated with an icon as well. One way of accomplishing this task is to select an
icon timeline 2300 that it is desired to edit, as described above. Once the data grid associated with the event represented by the selected icon is displayed in the work sector, the user can edit the event or any other associated event in the displayed data grid as described previously. A short-cut feature can also be invoked where the user selects anicon timeline 2300 using a double-click maneuver. This opens the data grid associated with the event represented by the icon as before, but this time automatically initiates the previously described pop-up in the data grid that is used to edit its entries. It is noted that once the user is working in the data grid associated with a selected icon, he or she could add new events or delete existing events, rather than just modifying them. - Another way to edit the events represented by the
icons timeline 2300, is using a standard “right clicking” maneuver on an icon to bring up a pop-up containing a context menu of available options for manipulating the event associated with the icon (and so the underlying data stored in the presentation data file and displayed in the associated data grid). For example, the user could delete an event associated with the icon directly from the pop-up menu, rather than having to do so in the data grid corresponding to that event. In such a case, the underlying presentation data file would be changed to eliminate the event, and the timeline and associated data grid would be altered to remove the event as well. - While not shown in FIG. 23, the timeline could also include a band displaying thumbnails of certain frames of the master track program, assuming it is a video program. For example, thumbnails of every tenth frame of the master track video program could be created via conventional techniques and displayed in the timeline (set to the appropriate size) in the aforementioned master track video frame band. More or fewer thumbnails would be displayed if the timeline is resized in its scope. These thumbnails would allow the user to more easily see the relationships between the master track video and the various events represented by the icons in the timeline. In addition, the video frame thumbnails could be used to perform automatic scene detection via standard methods. The detected scene changes could then be referenced on the timeline using an appropriate icon or mark. This would make it easier for the user to graphically synchronize the events with the master track.
- 3.0 Changing Templates
- It is possible to change the presentation template, even after selecting a different one and entering attribute and scheduling information. This is accomplished by the user selecting the project menu button of the presentation tool window (see328 of FIG. 3) and then selecting the “Select Template” action from the action list that drops down. This causes the previously described
template selection window 200 shown in FIG. 2 to open over the presentation tool window. - The
template selection window 200 will reflect the settings chosen when the current template was selected. In addition, thehorizontal strip 208 associated with the currently selected template will be highlighted in thelayout display sector 206. The user can then select a different template using the same procedure described previously in connection with selecting the initial template. The presentation production system will then re-open the presentation tool window, this time reflecting the new template choice. In addition, all the attributes and scheduling data entered by the user in connection with the old template that are applicable to the newly selected template will be retained. The user can then review and modify the template as desired. - 4.0 Saving Modified Templates
- As discussed previously when a user selects a template, it is loaded with certain default attributes that the user can then modify. If the user wishes to incorporate the same modifications in future presentations, it is possible to save the modified template either to a remote server or locally. In this way the user, or anyone having access to the location where the modified template is saved, can select the template and create a presentation from it as described earlier. It is noted that just the template attributes created or modified in the aforementioned template editor property grid are saved in the new template, not any of the other metadata or scheduling information entered by the user.
- Referring to FIG. 25, to save a modified template, the user selects the file menu button of the presentation tool window (see320 of FIG. 3) and then selects the “Templates” action from the action list that drops down. This causes a
templates window 2500 to appear over the presentation tool window. Thetemplates window 2500 is similar in appearance to the previously described template selection window, but with some significant differences. As with the template selection window, thetemplates window 2500 has two buttons displayed at the top, the first of which is aserver button 2502, and the other of which is alocal button 2504. The user selects theserver button 2502 if he or she wants the modified template to be saved remotely and the host computed is connected to a network having access to the server. Whereas, the user selects thelocal button 2504 if he or she wants the modified template saved on the host computer. It is noted that aninstruction bar 2506 is located just below thelayout display sector 2522 to provide information and tips to the user on how to proceed with the template saving process. For example, in FIG. 25, thetemplates window 2500 is shown as it would appear when the user first opens it. At this stage, theinstruction bar 2506 states “Save Template to Server of Local”, thereby aiding the user in determining what to do first (i.e., select theserver button 2502 or local button 2504). - Once the user has elected to save the template locally or remotely, he or she enters the name that is to be assigned to the modified template into the
name field 2508. In addition, the user enters a description of the template into thedescription field 2510, and the name of the author or owner of the template into theauthor field 2512. The foregoing data appears in the “Name”, “Description” and “Author”columns horizontal strip 2520 in thelayout display sector 2522 that will be created for the modified template being entered. - The presentation production system also creates a thumbnail of the modified template from whatever image was last displayed in the preview display of the presentation tool window. This thumbnail is displayed in the thumbnail sector2524 of the templates window, so that the user can review it. If the user decides that he or she would like a different thumbnail image, then the user minimizes the templates window to bring the presentation tool window back to the forefront. The user then runs the presentation to the point where the desired image is displayed in the preview display and pauses the presentation. The user then reinstates the templates window and selects the “Re-Grab”
button 2526. This causes the presentation production system to create a new thumbnail of the modified template and to display the new thumbnail in the thumbnail sector 2524. The thumbnail displayed in the thumbnail sector 2524 is the thumbnail that will appear in thethumbnail column 2528 of thehorizontal strip 2520 in thelayout display sector 2522 that will be created for the modified template being entered. - Once the user is satisfied with the thumbnail and the entered data, he or she selects the “Save Template”
button 2530. Finally, the user selects the “Save” button in the dialog box and the new template is saved to the default local template folder. In addition, the layout strip data is added to the header of the template file. - The next time the user goes to select a template, the aforementioned modified template, as represented by its thumbnail and the identifying information entered by the user, will appear in the
layout display sector 2522 of the template selection window, assuming the user has elected to access the location where the template is saved. - It is noted that a template that was downloaded from a server can be saved to local template storage by using the forwgoing process, even if it is not modified in any way.
- It is further noted that a user can delete a template using the
templates window 2500 as well. This is accomplished by selecting thelocal button 2504, and then selecting thestrip 2520 associated with the template that the user wants to delete in thelayout display sector 2522. Finally, the user selects thedelete button 2532 to delete the selected template. - 5.0 Presentation Authoring Process
- Given the above-described user interfaces of the present system, the user is able to author a presentation using the process that will now be described. Referring to FIGS. 26A and B, this authoring process involves first launching the presentation production system on the user's host computer (process action2600). This brings up the template selection window, which the user employs to select a presentation template, as well as name and specify the destination of the presentation files (process action 2602). The selected template is then loaded by the presentation production system, and the tool window is displayed and populated with default template data. The user then enters the media content information. Specifically, the user imports the master track audio or video file (process action 2604) and the presentation slides file (process action 2606). In addition, the user optionally imports any demonstration files (e.g., video, audio, and the like), documents files, HTML files, and animation files, and the like into the presentation (process action 2608). It is noted that the optional nature of the last action, and any future actions, is indicated by a broken line box in FIG. 26. Next, the user sets the properties of the template, assuming the default settings are not acceptable. This part of the process entails optionally modifying the template attributes (process action 2610), entering metadata (process action 2612) and changing the video player features (process action 2614). It is noted that the forgoing parts of the process involving entering the media content and setting the template properties can be reversed in the order that they are performed. Thus a user could set the template properties before importing the media content, if desired.
- The next phase of the presentation authoring process is to create the timeline of the presentation using the previously described grids. Specifically, the user defines script commands (process action2616), which dictate when in the master track video or audio program a presentation slide is displayed, a demonstration is launched, a file is opened (e.g., word processing, HTML or Flash file), or an address of a site is contacted. In addition, the user establishes contents markers (process action 2618), which represent a table of contents of the presentation and which specify when a new topic or sub-topic is begun in the presentation timeline. Further, in
optional process action 2620, the user can enter one or more a transcriptions (in different languages) of the master track program and establish when each segment of the transcription begins in the presentation timeline. While the foregoing script commands, markers and transcription data can be entered directly using the various data grids, the user can also import text based files that contain predefined scripts, markers, and transcription data. Lastly, the user can optionally establish and schedule the appearance of one or more links that will be made available for access by a viewer of the presentation (process action 2622). It is noted that the user can also optionally organize a graphical table of contents tree to reflect the hierarchy of the topics and presentation slides (process action 2624), although this does not actually schedule any event in the presentation timeline. - Once the timeline of the presentation has been set, the user initiates a “build” of the presentation using the aforementioned project builder module (process action2626). The presentation building procedure will be discussed in more detail shortly. The built presentation can then be previewed (process action 2628) by the user and edited (process action 2630) as necessary. These last two actions are optional, but would typically be performed. As described previously, the user can edit the presentation in a number of ways. These include using the visual timeline editor and its visual timeline to edit the scheduled events to get the proper timing of the script commands, markers, and transcription elements, or using the data grids directly to change the schedule. In addition, the user can edit the template properties as desired. For example, the user then can adjust template settings in the property grids, changing colors, output settings, as well as adding or changing metadata in multiple schema formats and languages. Further, the user could introduce new presentation slides, demonstrations, and the like and schedule them in the timeline. The user could also change the template while retaining the scheduling and at least some of the modified attributes. The presentation can be rebuilt to reflect these changes and previewed once again. It is also noted that the foregoing changes could be made prior to the initial build of the presentation during the time that the attributes and scheduling in being performed.
- 6.0 Project Building Process
- The previously mentioned project builder module of the presentation production system takes all the data input by the user via the user interfaces and builds a presentation package that can be run by the presentation viewer. Generally, the project builder generates the underlying presentation files, indexes the media, outputs the slides into the project directory, generates a presentation data file and transforms it using the selected template to generate a final output HTML presentation. Each of these actions in the build sequence will now be explained in detail.
- Referring to FIG. 27, the
first process action 2700 of the project building process performed by the present system when the user initiates a build involves exporting the presentation slides to the system's project directory. This exporting is done using the export options specified in the template editor property grid. - These may be the default options brought in with the selected template or options entered into the aforementioned grid by the user. The thumbnails generated for each slide in the presentation slide deck when the slide file was entered into the system are also stored in the presentation slide file.
- The project building process continues with the video or audio media file designated as the master track being indexed. This entails eliminating any existing un-needed metadata contained in the header of the master track media file (process action2702), and then writing all the scheduling data into the header (process action 2704). This includes adding the script commands, contents markers and transcription data to the header of the media file. The master track media file is also located in the project directory of the presentation production system. The player settings specified in the in the player property grid are also exported and written into the header of the media file. These settings may be the default options or options entered into the aforementioned grid by the user.
- The project builder module then creates a links file containing all the link information entered by the user (process action2706). In tested versions of the present presentation production system the links file was a separate XML file also residing in the project directory.
- Next, the project builder module of the present system generates the aforementioned presentation data file and saves it in the root of the project directory (process action2708). In general, the presentation data file is the final underlying data file that is generated by the presentation production system. It includes, among other things all the data specified in the property and data grids, such as the script commands, markers, transcription elements, and links, as well as template attributes and presentation metadata. The structure and contents of the presentation data file will be described in greater detail in the next section.
- In view of the above, at this point in the building process the project directory includes the presentation data file, master track media file, links file (if any), and presentation slides file. In addition, the file associated with the selected template, any files associated with the optional demonstrations, and any files associated with the optional documents, animations and the like, are also stored in the project directory. However, the build process is not quite complete. To complete the presentation package the information contained in the presentation data file is incorporated into the selected template to produce a presentation file, which in tested versions of the present system was an HTML file (process action2710). This HTML file is the file that the presentation viewers run to view and interact with the presentation as described earlier. Accordingly, referring to FIG. 28, the final presentation package can be represented by the
presentation file 2800 as the hub which accesses the mastertrack media file 2802 and presentation slides file 2804 to run the presentation. In addition, the presentation's HTML file may also access theoptional Links file 2806,demonstration files 2808 anddocument files 2810 if they exist and present them in the presentation at their scheduled times. - 6.1 The Presentation Data File
- In tested versions of the present system, the presentation data file took the form of a XML file based on a standardized schema published by the IMS. The file is generated by the aforementioned project builder module during the build process. The IMS is an industry driven global consortium chartered to define and recommend standards for the e-Learning marketplace, and has developed several specifications for facilitating online distributed learning, including Learning Resource Interchange (LRN, pronounced “learn”). LRN is a content interchange descriptor that provides to content creators a standard way of identifying, sharing, updating, and creating online content and courseware. LRN is a commercial application of the IMS Content Packaging and Metadata Specifications, and supports the Advanced Distributed Learning Sharable Content Object Reference Model. Content distributed according to the IMS Content Packaging specification must contain an IMS Manifest file. The IMS Manifest file is the aforementioned presentation data file in tested version of the present system. To ensure that the IMS Manifest file can always be found within a package, it has a pre-defined name and location, i.e., imsmanifest.xml.
- The structure of a LRN formatted “imsmanifest.xml” file is shown in FIG. 29. In general, the
standard LRN manifest 2900 contains MetaData describing the presentation 2902 (such as Title or Description), organizations of the content 2904 (such as a Table of Contents) with a list ofindividual content items 2908, and aresources section 2906 having a list of individual resources 2910 (such as HTML files, graphics, or other content). Each of these sections of themanifest 2900 will now be described in more detail. In order to facilitate this explanation, an example imsmanifest.xml file listing has been provided in Appendix A. The various sections of this example file will be referred to in the description of that section. -
- The “MetaData” section of the imsmanifest.xml contains general information about the presentation. For example, referring to the exemplary imsmanifest.xml file in appendix A, the <metadata>section includes a “General Information” sub-section that provides some general information about the presentation and the imsmanifest.xml file, such as the schema (i.e., <schema>IMS CONTENT</schema>”) and the version of the schema (i.e., <schemaversion>1.0</schemaversion>).
- In addition to the general metadata sub-section, IMS supports extensible metadata using the XML Schema Definition language (XSD, XDR) through the use of other LOM elements as an extension or as new elements (defined in a specific namespace). Namespace elements typically contain a meaningful prefix, such as “adl” (to represent the Advanced Distributed Learning initiative) to uniquely identify its extensions. IMS recommends the use of the W3C Recommendation for Namespaces. In the case of the present system, the “imsmanifest” file provides extended metadata sections to support video and audio, indexed markers, script commands as well as transcription and template metadata. Each of these will be described in the sections to follow.
- 6.1.1.1 <miftdata>Element
- The “<mittdata>” sub-section is a child of the IMS <metadata>section. This section supports two tags, “<extendedmetadata>” and “<ui>” data.
- 6.1.1.1.1 <extendedmetadata>Element
- This sub-section is for extensible schema's associated with user defined templates in presentation production system. Authors can define their own namespaces and schema definitions and add custom schemas related to their playback templates under this section. In tested versions of the system and in the example listing of appendix A, a “<msstudios>” schema was defined for default template metadata, such as the title of the presentation and the speaker's name (although neither was actually specified in the example listing).
- 6.1.1.1.2 <ui>Element
- The UI sub-section is used to store layout and user interface display information that is to be employed by the selected template. Authors can also define their own namespace and schema definition and add custom schemas related to their own unique presentation templates in this section. In tested embodiments of the presentation production system and as found in the example listing in appendix A, a “<msstudios>” schema is defined and shows the properties associated with tested versions of the system which includes features such as font, logo, colors, and Export options for the presentation slides. In other words, this sub-section includes all the data entered in to the property grids by the user or populated therein by default when the template was selected.
- 6.1.2 The Organizations Section
- The IMS <organizations>element is used to describe the navigation structure for the manifest. Individual organization types are declared as a sub-elements nested within the <organizations>element. For example, the table of contents of the presentation is a primary organizations section type and is designated by the <tableofcontents>element. The <tableofcontents>element has one or more <item>sub-elements that include attributes such as a contents title. An example of the <organizations>section of the imsmanifest.xml file can be found in the listing provided in appendix A.
- 6.1.3 The Resources Section
- The IMS <resources>element is used to identify a series of files and content sources that are used to make up the final presentation. Individual resources are declared as a <resource>element (i.e., without an “s”) nested within the <resources>element. A<resource>element may also have a <metadata>sub-element (see2912 in FIG. 29). The <metadata>sub-element is used to define information about the resource and used in conjunction with standard IMS metadata schema. Further, a <resource>element may have a <file>sub-element (see 2914 in FIG. 29). The <file>sub-element is used to point to the actual file and contain metadata related to this file.
- Here too authors can also define their own namespace and schema definition and add custom schemas related to their own unique presentation in this section. In tested versions of the present system, a custom <resource>element called <mittdata>was included.
- 6.1.3.1 <mittdata> Element
- The <mittdata> element provides an area wherein further metadata related to the playback of a resource in the >>presentation production system can be extended. This section is primarily used to hold the <media> element extension, but could be utilized for other custom metadata related to other more modern media formats. An example of the <resources> section including a <mittdata> element is shown in the listing provided in appendix A.
- 6.1.3.2 <media> Element
- The <media> element is a custom element extension defined to hold metadata associated with the master track of the presentation. This element holds scheduling data and other information about the master track including start time, stop time, codecs used, markers, script commands, transcription entries, player setting and other metadata also stored in the master track media file. In tested version of the presentation production system, the following defined sub-elements of the <media> element were included.
- 6.1.3.2.1 <abstract lang=“en US”>
- The abstract sub-element is used for a short description of the media file and what it contains. The lang attribute can be utilized to allow for multiple language abstract elements defined within a single <media>section.
- 6.1.3.2.2 <contactname>
- The contact name sub-element is used to define the name of the individual to contact regarding information about the media file
- 6.1.3.2.3 <contactemail>
- The contact mail sub-element is used to define the Email address of the individual to contact regarding information about the media file.
- 6.1.3.2.4 <isprotected>
- The contact name sub-element is a Boolean term used to define whether the media is protected by Digital Rights Management.
- 6.1.3.2.5 <starttime time=“00:00:00.00”>
- The start time sub-element is used to define the time at which to start playing the media file from.
- 6.1.3.2.6 <endtime time=“00:05:00.00”>
- The end time sub-element is used to define the time at which to stop playing the media file.
- 6.1.3.2.7 <availablebandwidths>
- The available bandwidths sub-element is used to list the available bandwidths.
- 6.1.3.2.8 <codecs>
- The codecs sub-element is used to list the codecs that are available within the media file. It is noted that <video>and <audio>are sub-elements of <codecs>.
- 6.1.3.2.9 <markers>
- As described previously markers are positions within the media file that are defined within the organizations section. These can be thought of as table of contents points within the media file that a user could easily reference and seek to. Each markers sub-element defines the time code and an “indentifierref” attribute to find its related <item> within the <organization> section. For example, a markers sub-element would look like:
- <marker time=“00:00:00.0” identifierref=“MANIFEST01_ITEM1”>
- 6.1.3.2.10 <scriptcommands>
- This sub-element stores all of the script commands. The time code, type of command, and parameter of the command are stored as attributes of a <script> sub-element. For example, a script commands sub-element could look like:
- <script time=“00:00:00.0” stype=“Slide” sparam=“1”/>
- 6.1.3.2.11 <transcription lang=“en US”>
- The transcription sub-element contains multiple <transcript>sub-elements. The <transcription>sub-element also supports a lang key to define the language that the transcription is storing. Multiple transcription sub-elements can appear within a <media>section. Each transcript sub-element is used to define a segment of the transcription of the Master Track audio. For example, a transcript sub-element could look like:
- <transcript time=“00:01:41.0” stype=“TEXT” sparam=“A similar problem to variants is with generics. In
Visual Basic 6 you have the active control and active form objects, and these allow you to access the currently displayed form on the screen. And you can also access the controls and private properties of that form or control.”/> - 6.1.3.2.12 <mediatitle>
- The media title sub-element is used to define the title of the media file.
- 6.1.3.2.13 <author>
- The author sub-element is used to provide information on the author of the media file.
- 6.1.3.2.14 <redirector>
- The redirector sub-element is used to provide the location of redirector for the master track media file in a web service application of the present presentation production system, the details of which are beyond the scope of the present application.
- 6.1.3.2.15 <copyright>
- The copyright sub-element is used to provide Copyright information.
- 6.1.3.2.16 <AspectRatioX>
- Aspect ratio of the encoded video's pixels.
- 6.1.3.2.17 <AspectRatioY>
- Aspect ratio of the encoded video's pixels.
- 6.1.3.2.18 <rating>
- Rating categories as defined by the publisher to manage content.
- 6.1.3.2.19 <bitrate>
- The bitrate sub-element is used to define the encoded bitrate of the media file in kbps.
- 6.1.3.2.20 <imagesourcewidth>
- The image source width sub-element is used to define the pixel width of the video image (if one is available).
- 6.1.3.2.21 <imagesourceheight>
- The image source height sub-element is used to define the pixel height of the video image (if one is available).
- 6.1.3.3 Other Resource Elements
- As can be seen at the end of the example imsmanifest.xml listing provided in appendix A, other resource elements are used to identify the various non-master track resources associated with the presentation. For example, resource elements identifying the presentation slide file and associated thumbnails, demonstration files, document files and the links file are included.
Claims (185)
1. In a computer system having a graphical user interface including a display, user interface selection device and user interface data entry device, a presentation production process for authoring a presentation having multi-media components, comprising process actions for:
displaying a template selection window on the display comprising one or more presentation layouts representing the appearance of a presentation window associated with the presentation being authored, wherein each presentation layout corresponds to a presentation template that is capable of rendering said presentation window and playing a presentation when populated with the media components making up the presentation and scheduling information specifying when each media component and other user-entered events are to be displayed or played in the presentation window; and
displaying a presentation tool window on the display in lieu of the template selection window in response to the user selecting a template via said selection device and the template associated with the selected layout being imported into the presentation production process, wherein the presentation tool window comprises a plurality of sectors which are employed by the user using said selection and data entry devices to import and preview media components, enter and modify presentation properties, enter and modify said scheduling information, and to view informational panes.
2. The process of claim 1 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises an action of including a user-selectable server button which when selected populates the template selection window with presentation layouts obtained from one or more prescribed remote servers connected via a computer network to a host computer of said computer system.
3. The process of claim 1 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises an action of including a user-selectable local button which when selected populates the template selection window with presentation layouts residing in a memory of the host computer.
4. The process of claim 2 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises an action of displaying one or more presentation layout strips, each of which comprises a thumbnail image of the presentation window rendered by the template associated with the presentation layout, the name assigned to the template, a description of the template, and an indication as to who created or owns the template, and wherein the data required to display the presentations layout strips is parsed from metadata residing in the template file associated with the layout thereby allowing the presentation layout strips to be displayed without having to import the template as a whole.
5. The process of claim 4 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises an action of displaying the name of the template in a name entry field and a default storage location in a location entry field whenever the user selects a presentation layout strip.
6. The process of claim 5 , wherein the process action of displaying the name of the template in a name entry field and a default storage location in a location entry field whenever the user selects a presentation layout strip, further comprises allowing the user to modify the name or storage location via said data entry device.
7. The process of claim 6 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises an action of displaying a project line which indicates where and under what name a presentation file corresponding to the presentation being authored will be located.
8. The process of claim 4 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises the action of displaying a template selection button which the user selects once a layout strip has been selected, so as to select the template associated with the layout strip.
9. The process of claim 4 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises the actions of displaying a category button which when selected by the user causes a menu having a plurality of entries corresponding to template categories to be displayed, and wherein upon selection of one of the template categories by the user, removes those presentation layout strips not belonging to the selected category wherein said categories are specified in the metadata residing in the template file associated with each displayed layout strip.
10. The process of claim 1 , wherein the process action of displaying the template selection window, comprises an action of including an information sector which provides contextural information concerning how to proceed with the template selection procedure.
11. The process of claim 1 , wherein the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a project file sector which displays in a file tree format, folder icons representing the types of media components that can be imported, as well as file icons dependent from each folder icon representing actual media component files of that type which have been imported.
12. The process of claim 11 , wherein the process action of displaying the folder icons comprises displaying an adjacent label specifying the type of media component represented by the icon, and wherein the process action of displaying the file icons comprises displaying an adjacent label specifying the file name of the imported media component.
13. The process of claim 12 , wherein the process action of displaying the project file sector, comprises an action of allowing a user to use the project file sector to import media component files, said importing comprising,
in response to the user selecting a displayed folder icon corresponding to the type of media component that is to be imported via said selecting device, displaying an open file dialog box with which the user specifies the name and location of the file containing the media component that is to be imported;
in response to the user specifying the name and location of the file containing the media component that is to be imported, copying the file into a local file created for it; and
updating the file tree to include the display of a file icon dependent from the selected folder icon.
14. The process of claim 13 , further comprising a process action of allowing the user to select a displayed folder icon by using said selection device to directly select the icon.
15. The process of claim 13 , further comprising a process action of allowing the user to select a displayed folder icon using said selection device which when selected triggers the display of a menu having a plurality of menu entries, and in response to a user selecting a menu entry designated for adding media components, displaying said open file dialog box.
16. The process of claim 11 , wherein the types of media components that can be imported comprise a master track video or audio program representing the main presentation material and the timeline from which all presentation events are scheduled, and a primary presentation slide deck comprising presentation slides each of which is displayed at prescribed times during the presentation.
17. The process of claim 16 , wherein the types of media components that can be imported further comprise one or more demonstrations wherein each comprises a video, audio, or animation program which is played at a prescribed time during the presentation.
18. The process of claim 16 , wherein the types of media components that can be imported further comprise one or more documents wherein each comprises a work processing, spreadsheet, or HTML document which is displayed at a prescribed time during the presentation.
19. The process of claim 16 , wherein the types of media components that can be imported comprise one or more additional video or audio programs not representing the master track program, but displayed as file icons dependent from the same folder icon as the master track program, and wherein the process action of displaying the project file sector, comprises the actions of:
in response to a user specifying an imported video or audio program among plural programs imported as the master track program,
designating the program as the master track program; and
displaying the file icon associated with the designated master track program in a visually distinguishing manner.
20. The process of claim 16 , wherein the types of media components that can be imported comprise one or more secondary presentation slide decks which are displayed as file icons dependent from the same folder icon as the primary slide deck, and wherein the process action of displaying the project file sector, comprises the actions of:
in response to a user specifying an imported presentation slide deck among plural slide decks imported as the primary slide deck which will be displayed in the presentation,
designating the specified slide deck as the primary slide deck; and
displaying the file icon associated with the designated primary slide deck in a visually distinguishing manner.
21. The process of claim 11 , wherein the process action of displaying the project file sector comprises the actions of:
displaying a contraction icon adjacent each folder icon having at least one displayed file icon associated therewith;
in response to the user selecting a contraction icon adjacent a particular folder icon, displaying the portion of the file tree associated with that folder icon in collapsed form wherein the file icons associated therewith are no longer displayed and the contraction icon adjacent the folder icon is replaced with an expansion icon; and
in response to the user selecting an expansion icon adjacent a particular folder icon, displaying the portion of the file tree associated with that folder icon in expanded form wherein the file icons associated therewith are displayed and the expansion icon adjacent the folder icon is replaced with a contraction icon.
22. The process of claim 1 , wherein the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays a video or audio program which has been designated as the master track program of the presentation being authored, wherein the master track program acts as the main media component of the presentation from which all the other media components are scheduled.
23. The process of claim 22 , wherein the master track program is a video program, and wherein the process action of displaying the video preview sector comprises an action of initially displaying the first frame of the master track video program statically.
24. The process of claim 22 , wherein the process action of displaying the video preview sector comprises an action of displaying a set of control buttons which upon selection by the user control the playing of the master track program.
25. The process of claim 24 , wherein the process action of displaying the set of control buttons comprises displaying control buttons which upon selection by the user cause the master track program to play, pause, advance or rewind.
26. The process of claim 22 , wherein the process action of displaying the video preview sector comprises an action of displaying a counter showing both an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program and a total running time of the master track program.
27. The process of claim 22 , wherein the master track program is an audio program, and wherein the process action of displaying the video preview sector comprises an action of displaying one of (i) a blank screen, (ii) a static image, (iii) an animation.
28. The process of claim 27 , wherein the process action of displaying a static image comprises the action of displaying an image comprising text reading “Audio Only”.
29. The process of claim 22 , wherein the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises the actions of:
generating thumbnail versions of each presentation slide associated with an imported media component comprising a presentation slide deck which has been designated as the primary slide deck for display in the presentation being authored; and
displaying a presentation slide preview sector which displays the thumbnail versions of the presentation slides associated with the primary presentation slide deck.
30. The process of claim 29 , wherein the process action of displaying the presentation slide preview sector comprises the actions of:
determining the current elapsed running time of the master track program; and
displaying the thumbnail version of the presentation slide that is scheduled to be shown when the master track video program is at the current elapsed running time barring any contrary control instruction.
31. The process of claim 30 , wherein the process action of displaying the presentation slide preview sector comprises an action of displaying a set of control buttons which upon selection by the user instruct what presentation slide thumbnail is displayed, regardless of the current elapsed running time of the master track program.
32. The process of claim 31 , wherein the process action of displaying the set of control buttons comprises the actions of:
displaying a first control button which upon selection by the user causes one of the thumbnails associated with presentation slides scheduled for display earlier than the presentation slide associated with the currently displayed thumbnail to be displayed; and
displaying a second control button which upon selection by the user causes one of the thumbnails associated with presentation slides scheduled for display after the presentation slide associated with the currently displayed thumbnail to be displayed.
33. The process of claim 29 , wherein the process action of displaying the presentation slide preview sector comprises an action of displaying a counter showing both a sequence number assigned to the presentation slide associated with the currently displayed thumbnail and a number representing the total number of presentation slides in the primary slide deck.
34. The process of claim 29 , wherein the process action of displaying the presentation slide preview sector comprises an action of launching a presentation slide creation program responsible for generating the primary presentation slide deck in response to the user selecting a displayed thumbnail, for the purpose of reviewing or editing the presentation slide associated with the selected thumbnail.
35. The process of claim 34 , wherein the process action of launching the presentation slide creation program, further comprises displaying a graphic user interface of the creation program in a work sector of the presentation tool window.
36. The process of claim 1 , wherein the process action of displaying the presentation tool window, comprises and action of displaying a presentation properties sector which at any one time displays one of a series of property grids each of which comprises a list of attributes controlling the appearance and functionality of the presentation window of the presentation being authored, or providing information about the presentation, for the purpose of allowing the user to view, specify or modify the attributes and information.
37. The process of claim 36 , wherein the process action of displaying the presentation properties sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of property grid selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the property grid associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the presentation properties sector.
38. The process of claim 37 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises displaying said list of attributes organized in two columns with the name of the attribute in one column and the current setting of that attribute, if any, in the second column, said attribute settings initially being populated with default settings taken from the imported template file associated with the selected layout.
39. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises an action of displaying the list of attributes of said grid in alphabetical order in response to the user selecting an alphabetizing button also displayed in the grid.
40. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises an action of displaying the list of attributes grouped in categories with the name of the category displayed above the portion of the list containing those attributes falling into that category.
41. The process of claim 40 , wherein the process action of displaying the list of attributes of the property grid grouped in categories comprises the actions of:
displaying the list of attributes grouped in categories by default unless the user selects another form of display; and
whenever the list of attributes is displayed in another form, displaying the list of attributes grouped in categories in response to the user selecting a categorizing button displayed in the grid.
42. The process of claim 40 , wherein the process action of displaying the list of attributes of the property grid grouped in categories comprises the actions of:
displaying the list of attributes in an expandable table format wherein whenever attributes are listed under a category title, a contraction icon is displayed adjacent that attribute title;
collapsing the attributes listed under a category title in response to the user selecting the contraction icon so that only the category title is shown with an expansion icon displayed adjacent thereto in lieu of the contraction icon; and
expanding a collapsed list of attributes associated with a category title in response to the user selecting the expansion icon displayed adjacent to that category title so that all the attributes associated with the category are displayed under the category title.
43. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises the actions of:
displaying the list of attributes with one or more of the attributes listed having hidden sub-attributes associated therewith which are not initially displayed, wherein each attribute having hidden sub-attributes has an expansion icon displayed adjacent thereto;
expanding an attribute having hidden sub-attributes so as to display the hidden sub-attributes in response to the user selecting the expansion icon displayed adjacent thereto, wherein the attribute with the expanded list of sub-attributes is displayed with a contraction icon adjacent thereto in lieu of the expansion icon; and
contracting the expanded list of sub-attributes in response to the user selecting the contraction icon displayed adjacent the attribute having the displayed list of sub-attributes so that only the attribute itself is displayed.
44. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises an action of only displaying those attributes that are editable by the user.
45. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises an action of listing all attributes associated with the appearance and functionality of the presentation window of the presentation being authored, and providing information about the presentation, whether editable by the user or not, wherein those attributes that are not editable by the user are visually distinguishable from those attributes that are editable by the user.
46. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting a listed attribute, displaying a list of settings applicable to that attribute; and
in response to the user selecting a setting from the displayed list of settings, replacing the setting previously listed for the attribute under consideration with the selected setting, and closing the displayed list of settings.
47. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting a listed attribute, displaying a settings list icon adjacent the setting associated with the selected attribute;
in response to the user selecting the settings list icon, displaying a list of settings applicable to that attribute; and
in response to the user selecting a setting from the displayed list of settings, replacing the setting previously listed for the attribute under consideration with the selected setting, and closing the displayed list of settings.
48. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises an action of in response to the user selecting a listed attribute not having a setting assigned thereto, displaying a setting entered by the user via said data entry device in the settings column of the selected attribute and assigning that setting to the attribute.
49. The process of claim 38 , wherein the process action of displaying a property grid comprises an action of in response to the user selecting a listed attribute having a setting already assigned thereto, replacing the existing setting with a setting entered by the user via said data entry device in the settings column of the selected attribute and assigning the new setting to the attribute.
50. The process of claim 37 , wherein the property grids comprise a template editor property grid which is displayed in the presentation properties sector by default unless another property grid selection tab not associated with the template editor property grid is selected by the user, or whenever the user selects a template editor property grid tab, wherein the template editor property grid comprises a list of attributes controlling the appearance and functionality of the presentation window of the presentation being authored.
51. The process of claim 37 , wherein the property grids comprise a metadata property grid which is displayed in the presentation properties sector in response to the user selecting a metadata property grid tab, wherein the metadata property grid comprises a list of attributes whose settings provide information about the presentation being authored, and wherein the information is included in a presentation file defining the presentation being authored where it can be parsed and employed as desired.
52. The process of claim 51 , wherein the process action of displaying the metadata property grid comprises the actions of:
initially leaving the settings column of each attribute blank; and
replacing the blank setting with a setting entered by the user via said data entry device, and assigning that setting to the attribute.
53. The process of claim 52 , wherein the process action of displaying the metadata property grid comprises the actions of:
initially associating the displayed list of attributes with a default language, and assigning a language designator indicating that any setting entered by the user or populated into the grid from the template file associated with the selected layout, is in the default language; and
displaying a language selection field in the property grid, which initially lists the name of the default language, and which comprises a language list icon displayed adjacent to the name.
54. The process of claim 53 , wherein the process action of displaying the metadata property grid comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting the language list icon, displaying a list of languages that can be associated with the metadata settings; and
in response to the user selecting a language from the displayed list,
replacing the language name previously displayed in the language selection field with the name of the selected language,
closing the displayed list of languages, and
associating the displayed list of attributes with the selected language, and assigning a language designator indicating that any setting entered by the user or populated into the grid from the template file associated with the selected layout, is in the selected language.
55. The process of claim 51 , wherein the process action of displaying the metadata property grid comprises the actions of:
displaying a default list of attributes, wherein the default list of attributes is one of a plurality of metadata attribute lists available in the presentation production process each having an assigned metadata schema name;
displaying a schema selection field in the property grid, which initially lists the schema name of the default list of attributes, and which comprises a schema list icon displayed adjacent to the schema name;
in response to the user selecting the schema list icon, displaying a list of metadata schema available; and
in response to the user selecting a schema from the displayed list,
replacing the schema name previously displayed in the schema selection field with the name of the selected schema,
closing the displayed list of metadata schema, and
displaying the list of attributes associated with the newly selected metadata schema in place of the previously displayed list.
56. The process of claim 51 , wherein the process action of displaying the metadata property grid comprises an action of, in response to the user selecting an attribute in the displayed list of attributes, displaying a description of that attribute in the metadata property grid.
57. The process of claim 37 , wherein the property grids comprise a player property grid which is displayed in the presentation properties sector in response to the user selecting a player property grid tab, wherein the player property grid comprises a list of attributes whose settings control or provide information about the video and audio player employed in the presentation being authored, and wherein the information is included in a presentation file defining the presentation being authored where it can be parsed and employed as desired.
58. The process of claim 1 , wherein the types of media components that can be imported comprise a master track video or audio program representing the main presentation material and the presentation timeline from which all presentation events are scheduled, and wherein the process action of displaying the presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a work sector which at any one time displays one of a series of informational panes, or one of a series of data entry grids for entering and modifying scheduling data in reference to an elapsed time of the master track program.
59. The process of claim 58 , wherein the process action of displaying a series of data grids and informational panes comprises an action of displaying a scripts grid comprising a list of script commands which establish scheduled presentation events, wherein each script command is organized in three columns with a first column listing a time code representing when in the presentation timeline an event is to occur, a second column listing a script type representing the type of event that is scheduled by the script command, and a third column listing a script parameter referencing a specific resource required to make the event happen.
60. The process of claim 59 , wherein:
the process action of displaying the work sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of data grid and informational pane selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the data grid or informational pane associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the work sector; and wherein,
the process action of displaying the scripts grid comprises an action of displaying the scripts grid in the work sector by default whenever the master track program is entered, until another data grid or informational pane selection tab not associated with the scripts grid is selected by the user.
61. The process of claim 59 , wherein:
the process action of displaying the work sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of data grid and informational pane selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the data grid or informational pane associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the work sector; and wherein,
the process action of displaying the scripts grid comprises an action of displaying the scripts grid in the work sector whenever the user selects a scripts grid tab displayed in the work sector.
62. The process of claim 59 , wherein the process action of displaying the scripts grid comprises an action of displaying the script commands in order of their time code starting with the earliest scheduled script command.
63. The process of claim 59 , wherein the script types comprise a presentation slide script type which refers to a presentation slide from an imported media component comprising a primary presentation slide deck, and wherein the script parameter associated with a presentation slide script type refers to a specific number assigned to one of the presentation slides in said slide deck, and wherein a script command comprising a time code, presentation slide script type designation and a specific presentation slide number is interpreted by the presentation being authored as an instruction to display the presentation slide assigned the listed number from the slide deck at the elapsed time of the master track program indicated by the time code of the script command.
64. The process of claim 59 , wherein the script types comprise a demonstration script type which refers to a demonstration program from one or more imported media components each comprising a video, audio, or animation program, and wherein the script parameter associated with a demonstration script type refers to a file name of a file containing a demonstration, and wherein a script command comprising a time code, demonstration script type designation and a specific demonstration file designation is interpreted by the presentation being authored as an instruction to play the demonstration program associated with the designated demonstration file at the elapsed time of the master track program indicated by the time code of the script command.
65. The process of claim 59 , wherein the script types comprise a document script type which refers to a document file from one or more imported media components each comprising a work processing, spreadsheet, or HTML document, and wherein the script parameter associated with a document script type refers to a file name of a file containing a document, and wherein a script command comprising a time code, document script type designation and a specific document file designation is interpreted by the presentation being authored as an instruction to display the document associated with the designated document file at the elapsed time of the master track program indicated by the time code of the script command.
66. The process of claim 59 , wherein the script types comprise a URL script type which refers to a URL, and wherein the script parameter associated with a URL script type refers to a network address, and wherein a script command comprising a time code, URL script type designation and a specific network address is interpreted by the presentation being authored as an instruction to open the URL associated with the designated network address at the elapsed time of the master track program indicated by the time code of the script command.
67. The process of claim 59 , wherein the script types comprise a web service script type which refers to a web service, and wherein the script parameter associated with a web service script type refers to a network address of the web service, and wherein a script command comprising a time code, web service script type designation and a specific network address is interpreted by the presentation being authored as an instruction to contact the web service associated with the designated network address at the elapsed time of the master track program indicated by the time code of the script command.
68. The process of claim 59 , wherein the script types comprise a computer program script type which refers to a computer program, and wherein the script parameter associated with a computer program script type refers to a file capable of executing the program, and wherein a script command comprising a time code, computer program script type designation and a specific execution file is interpreted by the presentation being authored as an instruction to run the computer program associated with the designated execution file at the elapsed time of the master track program indicated by the time code of the script command.
69. The process of claim 59 , wherein the process action of displaying the scripts grid comprises the actions of:
displaying a time code data entry field, a script type data entry field, a script parameter data entry field and an script command entry button;
in response to a time code, script type designation and script parameter designation being entered in the respective time code, script type and script parameter data entry fields, and the user selecting the script command entry button, creating a script command and displaying it in the scripts grid.
70. The process of claim 69 , wherein the process action of displaying the time code data entry field, comprises an action of displaying a time code in the time code data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
71. The process of claim 70 , wherein:
the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays the master track program and has a counter showing an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program; and wherein,
the user identifies the time code to be entered by into the time code data entry field by playing the master track program, pausing the program at the point in the timeline which the user wants to implement a script command, and reading the elapse time representing the time code from the counter.
72. The process of claim 69 , wherein:
the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays the master track program and has a counter showing an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program; and wherein,
the user enters the time code into the time code data entry field by playing the master track program and pausing it at the point in the timeline which the user wants to implement a script command; and
in response the elapse time of the master track program representing the time code is automatically displayed in the time code data entry field.
73. The process of claim 69 , wherein the process action of displaying the script type data entry field, comprises an action of displaying a script type in the script type data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
74. The process of claim 69 , wherein the process action of displaying the script type data entry field, comprises the actions of:
displaying a script type list icon in the script type data entry field;
in response to the user selecting the list icon, displaying a list of script types; and
in response to the user selecting a script type from the displayed list of script types, displaying the selected script type in the script type data entry field, and closing the displayed list of settings, thereby entering a script type into the script type data entry field.
75. The process of claim 69 , wherein the process action of displaying the script parameter data entry field, comprises an action of displaying a script parameter in the script parameter data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
76. The process of claim 59 , wherein the process action of displaying the scripts grid comprises an action of displaying one or more script commands contained within an imported scripts command file.
77. The process of claim 76 , wherein the process action of displaying one or more script commands contained within an imported scripts command file comprises an action of:
displaying a menu bar comprising a file menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the file menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising an import command;
in response to the user selecting the import command, displaying a sub-list of commands comprising a script file import command;
in response to the user selecting the script file import command, displaying an open file dialog box with which the user specifies the name and location of the file containing the script commands that are to be imported; and
in response to the user specifying the name and location of the file containing the script commands that are to be imported, copying the script commands contained in the specified file into the scripts grid.
78. The process of claim 59 , wherein the process action of displaying the scripts grid comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting a script command displayed in the scripts grid so as to modify it, displaying a script command editing box comprising time code, script type and script parameter data entry fields, as well as a button for entering changes made to the selected script command, wherein the respective time code, script type designation and script parameter designation of the selected script command are initially displayed in the respective time code, script type and script parameter data entry fields of the script command editing box;
in response to the user modifying one or more of the displayed time code, script type designation and script parameter designation entries in the editing box, displaying the modified versions thereof in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box;
in response to the user selecting the button for entering changes, replacing the selected script command in the scripts grid with the modified command entered into the script command editing box.
79. The process of claim 78 , wherein the process action of displaying the modified versions of any one of the time code, script type designation and script parameter designation entries in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box, comprises an action of displaying said modified versions that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
80. The process of claim 78 , wherein the process action of displaying the modified version of the script type designation in the script type data entry field of the script command editing box, comprises the actions of:
displaying a script type list icon in the script type data entry field of said editing box;
in response to the user selecting the list icon, displaying a list of script types; and
in response to the user selecting a script type from the displayed list of script types, displaying the selected script type in the script type data entry field, and closing the displayed list of settings, thereby entering a script type into the script type data entry field.
81. The process of claim 58 , wherein the process action of displaying a series of data grids and informational panes comprises an action of displaying a markers grid comprising a list of contents markers which identify divisions in the subject matter of the presentation being authored, wherein each contents marker is organized in two columns with a first column listing a time code representing when in the presentation timeline one of said divisions occurs and a second column listing a title for the section of the presentation that begins at the time specified by the time code.
82. The process of claim 81 , wherein:
the process action of displaying the work sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of data grid and informational pane selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the data grid or informational pane associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the work sector; and wherein,
the process action of displaying the markers grid comprises an action of displaying the markers grid in the work sector whenever the user selects a markers grid tab displayed in the work sector.
83. The process of claim 81 , wherein the process action of displaying the markers grid comprises an action of displaying the contents markers in the order of their time code starting with the earliest scheduled marker.
84. The process of claim 81 , wherein the process action of displaying the markers grid comprises the actions of:
displaying a time code data entry field, a marker title data entry field and a contents marker entry button;
in response to a time code and marker title being entered in the respective time code and marker title data entry fields, and the user selecting the contents marker entry button, creating a contents marker and displaying it in the markers grid.
85. The process of claim 84 , wherein the process action of displaying the time code data entry field, comprises an action of displaying a time code in the time code data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
86. The process of claim 85 , wherein:
the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays the master track program and has a counter showing an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program; and wherein,
the user identifies the time code to be entered by into the time code data entry field by playing the master track program, pausing the program at the point in the timeline which the user wants to insert a contents marker, and reading the elapse time representing the time code from the counter.
87. The process of claim 84 , wherein:
the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays the master track program and has a counter showing an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program; and wherein,
the user enters the time code into the time code data entry field by playing the master track program and pausing it at the point in the timeline which the user wants to insert a contents marker; and
in response the elapse time of the master track program representing the time code is automatically displayed in the time code data entry field.
88. The process of claim 84 , wherein the process action of displaying the marker title data entry field, comprises an action of displaying a title in the marker title data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
89. The process of claim 81 , wherein the process action of displaying the markers grid comprises an action of displaying one or more contents markers contained within an imported contents markers file.
90. The process of claim 89 , wherein the process action of displaying one or more contents markers contained within an imported contents markers file comprises the actions of:
displaying a menu bar comprising a file menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the file menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising an import command;
in response to the user selecting the import command, displaying a sub-list of commands comprising a contents marker file import command;
in response to the user selecting the contents marker file import command, displaying an open file dialog box with which the user specifies the name and location of the file containing the contents markers that are to be imported; and
in response to the user specifying the name and location of the file containing the contents markers that are to be imported, copying the contents markers contained in the specified file into the markers grid.
91. The process of claim 81 , wherein the process action of displaying the markers grid comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting a contents marker displayed in the markers grid so as to modify it, displaying a contents markers editing box comprising time code and marker title data entry fields, as well as a button for entering changes made to the selected contents marker, wherein the respective time code and marker title of the selected contents marker are initially displayed in the respective time code and marker title data entry fields of the contents marker editing box;
in response to the user modifying one or more of the displayed time code and marker title entries in the editing box, displaying the modified versions thereof in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box;
in response to the user selecting the button for entering changes, replacing the selected contents marker in the markers grid with the modified marker entered into the content marker editing box.
92. The process of claim 91 , wherein the process action of displaying the modified versions of any one of the time code and marker title entries in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box, comprises an action of displaying said modified versions that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
93. The process of claim 58 , wherein the process action of displaying a series of data grid and informational panes comprises an action of displaying a transcription grid comprising a list of transcript entries which provide a segment of the transcript of the audio of the master track program, wherein each transcript entry is organized in two columns with a first column listing a time code representing when in the presentation timeline the transcript segment begins and a second column comprising the transcript segment that begins at the time specified by the time code.
94. The process of claim 93 , wherein the transcript segments have a prescribed length.
95. The process of claim 93 , wherein:
the process action of displaying the work sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of data grid and informational pane selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the data grid or informational pane associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the work sector; and wherein,
the process action of displaying the transcription grid comprises an action of displaying the transcription grid in the work sector whenever the user selects a transcription grid tab displayed in the work sector.
96. The process of claim 93 , wherein the process action of displaying the transcription grid comprises an action of displaying the transcription entries in the order of their time code starting with the earliest scheduled entry.
97. The process of claim 93 , wherein the process action of displaying the transcription grid comprises the actions of:
displaying a time code data entry field, a transcript segment data entry field and a transcription entry button;
in response to a time code and transcript segment being entered in the respective time code and transcript segment data entry fields, and the user selecting the transcription entry button, creating a transcription entry and displaying it in the transcription grid.
98. The process of claim 97 , wherein the process action of displaying the time code data entry field, comprises an action of displaying a time code in the time code data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
99. The process of claim 98 , wherein:
the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays the master track program and has a counter showing an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program; and wherein,
the user identifies the time code to be entered into the time code data entry field by playing the master track program, pausing the program at the point in the timeline which the user wants to insert a transcription entry, and reading the elapsed time representing the time code from the counter.
100. The process of claim 97 , wherein:
the process action of displaying a presentation tool window, comprises an action of displaying a video preview sector which plays the master track program and has a counter showing an elapse time indicative of the elapsed running time of the master track program; and wherein,
the user enters the time code into the time code data entry field by playing the master track program and pausing it at the point in the timeline which the user wants to insert a transcription entry; and
in response the elapse time of the master track program representing the time code is automatically displayed in the time code data entry field.
101. The process of claim 97 , wherein the process action of displaying the transcript segment data entry field, comprises the actions of:
displaying a language selection field in the transcription grid, which initially lists the name of a default language, and which comprises a language list icon displayed adjacent to the name;
in response to the user selecting the language list icon, displaying a list of languages that can be associated with the transcript segment;
in response to the user selecting a language from the displayed list that is different from the default language,
replacing the language name previously displayed in the language selection field with the name of the selected language, and
closing the displayed list of languages; and
displaying a transcript segment in the transcript segment data entry field that the user manually enters using said data entry device, wherein the transcript segment is associated with the selected language and a language designator is assigned to the transcript segment indicating that the segment is in the selected language.
102. The process of claim 93 , wherein the process action of displaying the transcription grid comprises an action of displaying one or more transcription entries contained within an imported transcription entries file.
103. The process of claim 102 , wherein the process action of displaying one or more transcription entries contained within an imported transcription entries file comprises the actions of:
displaying a language selection field in the transcription grid, which initially lists the name of a default language, and which comprises a language list icon displayed adjacent to the name;
in response to the user selecting the language list icon, displaying a list of languages that can be associated with the transcript segment;
in response to the user selecting a language from the displayed list that is different from the default language,
replacing the language name previously displayed in the language selection field with the name of the selected language, and
closing the displayed list of languages; and
displaying a menu bar comprising a file menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the file menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising an import command;
in response to the user selecting the import command, displaying a sub-list of commands comprising a transcription file import command;
in response to the user selecting the transcription file import command, displaying an open file dialog box with which the user specifies the name and location of the file containing the transcription entries that are to be imported; and
in response to the user specifying the name and location of the file containing the transcription entries that are to be imported, copying the transcription entries contained in the specified file into the transcription grid, wherein the transcript segments of each imported transcription entry are associated with the selected language and a language designator is assigned to each transcript segment indicating that the segment is in the selected language.
104. The process of claim 93 , wherein the process action of displaying the transcription grid comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting a transcription entry displayed in the transcription grid so as to modify it, displaying a transcription entry editing box comprising time code and transcript segment data entry fields, as well as a button for entering changes made to the selected transcription entry, wherein the respective time code and transcript segment of the selected transcription entry are initially displayed in the respective time code and transcript segment data entry fields of the transcription entry editing box;
in response to the user modifying one or more of the displayed time code and transcript segments in the editing box, displaying the modified versions thereof in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box;
in response to the user selecting the button for entering changes, replacing the selected transcription entry in the transcription grid with the modified entry entered into the transcription entry editing box.
105. The process of claim 104 , wherein the process action of displaying the modified versions of any one of the time code and transcript segments in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box, comprises an action of displaying said modified versions that the user manually enters using said data entry device.
106. The process of claim 58 , wherein the process action of displaying one of the series of data entry grids for entering and modifying scheduling data in reference to the elapsed time of the master track program comprises the actions of:
importing a file containing said scheduling data, wherein said scheduling data comprises time codes which are offset from the desired elapsed times of the master track program;
correcting for the offset in each time code in the scheduling data so as to bring the time codes in sync with the master track program; and
displaying the time code corrected scheduling data into the displayed data grid.
107. The process of claim 106 , wherein the process action of correcting for the offset in each time code in the scheduling data so as to bring the time codes in sync with the master track program, comprises the actions of:
displaying a menu bar comprising a tools menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the tools menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising a command to correct offset time codes;
in response to the user selecting the command to correct offset time codes, displaying a offset correction box comprising,
a data entry field for entering the amount of offset existing between the time codes of the scheduling data and desired elapsed times of the master track program,
one or more selection fields, each of which corresponds to a different type of scheduling data,
a subtract button for indicating that an offset amount entered in the offset amount data entry field is subtracted from the time codes in the selected type of scheduling data, and
an add button for indicating that an offset amount entered in the offset amount data entry field is added to the time codes in the selected type of scheduling data;
in response to an offset amount, the type of scheduling data involved and an indication as to whether the offset amount is subtracted or added to the time codes of the scheduling data, being specified in the offset correction box, modifying each time code in the identified scheduling data to bring them in synch with the desired elapsed times of the master track program.
108. The process of claim 107 , wherein the offset amount, the type of scheduling data involved and the indication as to whether the offset amount is subtracted or added to the time codes of the scheduling data is entered by the user in the offset correction box.
109. The process of claim 107 , wherein the type of scheduling data involved is transcription data which starts at the beginning of the master track program and so starting at time code zero, and wherein the offset amount and whether it is subtracted from or added to the times codes of the transcription data is computed by the presentation production process and automatically entered into offset correction box when the user selects a selection field of the box indicating that the scheduling data is transcription data.
110. The process of claim 106 , wherein the process action of correcting for the offset in each time code in the scheduling data so as to bring the time codes in sync with the master track program, comprises the actions of:
detecting that the type of scheduling data being imported is transcription data comprising time coded transcription segments, the earliest of which is assumed to start at the beginning of the master track program and so starting at time code zero;
computing the offset of the earliest transcription segment's time code from zero and whether this offset is subtracted from or added to the times codes of the transcription data to bring them into sync with the master track program; and
modifying each time code in the transcription data to bring them in sync with the master track program.
111. The process of claim 58 , wherein the media components making up the presentation further comprise a plurality of presentation slides with associated scheduling information specifying when each presentation slide is to be displayed in the presentation window in relation to an elapsed time of the master track program, and wherein the scheduling information further comprises a plurality of contents markers which identify when new subject matter topics begin in the presentation timeline, and wherein the process action of displaying a series of data grid and informational panes comprises an action of displaying a contents and links grid comprising a first pane which displays a table of contents tree graphically representing the order the subject matter topics using topic labels and displaying the presentations slides scheduled to be displayed in association with each topic as slide labels branching from the topic.
112. The process of claim 111 , wherein:
the process action of displaying the work sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of data grid and informational pane selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the data grid or informational pane associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the work sector; and wherein,
the process action of displaying the contents and links grid comprises an action of displaying the contents and links grid in the work sector whenever the user selects a contents and links grid tab displayed in the work sector.
113. The process of claim 111 , wherein the process action of displaying the table of contents tree comprises the actions of:
initially displaying each subject matter topic label having no indentation on the tree thereby indication each as having an equal hierarchy in relation to each other; and
in response to a user instruction to increase or decrease the hierarchy level of a subject matter topic, respectively increasing or decreasing the indent of the associated topic label in the table of contents tree so as to show topics labels having a greater indentation than an earlier occurring topic label as a branch of that earlier topic label.
114. The process of claim 113 , wherein the process action of displaying the table of contents tree, comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting a subject matter topic label in the table of contents tree, displaying a list of actions comprising an action to increase the indentation of the selected topic label and an action to decrease the indentation of the selected topic label;
in response to the user selecting the action to increase the indentation of the selected subject matter topic label, increasing the indentation of the topic label in the tree making it a branch of the subject matter topic label immediately preceding it in the tree; and
in response to the user selecting the action to decrease the indentation of the selected subject matter topic label, decreasing the indentation of the topic label in the tree making all the subject matter topic labels following it in the tree branches of the selected topic label.
115. The process of claim 111 , wherein the process action of displaying the table of contents tree, comprises the actions of:
displaying an contraction icon adjacent each subject matter topic label having at least one presentation slide label branching from it;
in response to the user selecting a contraction icon adjacent a particular topic label, displaying the portion of the table of contents tree associated with that topic label in collapsed form wherein the presentation slide labels branching from the topic are no longer displayed and the contraction icon adjacent the topic label is replaced with an expansion icon; and
in response to the user selecting an expansion icon adjacent a particular subject matter label, displaying the portion of the table of contents tree associated with that topic label in expanded form wherein the presentation slide labels branching from the topic are displayed and the expansion icon adjacent the topic label is replaced with a contraction icon.
116. The process of claim 111 , wherein the process action of displaying the contents and links grid comprises the actions of:
displaying global links label at the top of the table of contents tree in the first pane of the contents and links grid; and
displaying a second pane comprising a links grid comprising, whenever the global links label, a subject matter topic label or a presentation slide label is selected by the user in the table of contents tree, a list of links which are scheduled to be displayed in the presentation window, throughout the presentation whenever the global link is selected, during the period of time the master track program is playing the part of the presentation covering the subject matter associated with the subject matter topic label whenever that label is selected, and during the period of time a presentation slide is scheduled to be displayed in the presentation window whenever the slide label associated with that presentation slide is selected, wherein each link is organized in two columns with a first column listing the name of the link as displayed in the presentation window and a second column listing a URL associated with the link.
117. The process of claim 116 , wherein the process action of displaying the links grid in the second pane, comprises the actions of:
displaying a link name data entry field, a URL data entry field and a links entry button; and
in response to a link name and URL being entered in the respective link name and URL data entry fields, and the user selecting the links entry button, creating a link and displaying it in the links grid, said link being a global link if the global link label is selected in the table of contents tree, a subject matter topic link associated with subject matter represented by a selected topic label if a topic label is selected, or a presentation slide link associated with presentation slide represented by a slide label if a slide label is selected.
118. The process of claim 116 , wherein the process action of displaying the links grid in the second pane, comprises the actions of:
in response to the user selecting either the global links label, a subject matter topic label or a presentation slide label in the table of contents tree, a list of links which are scheduled to be displayed in the presentation window are displayed in the links grid;
in response to the user selecting one of the displayed links so as to modify it, displaying a link entry editing box comprising a link name data entry field and link URL data entry field, as well as a button for entering changes made to the selected link entry, wherein the respective name and URL of the selected link entry are initially displayed in the respective link name and URL data entry fields of the link entry editing box;
in response to the user modifying one or more of the displayed link name and link URL in the editing box, displaying the modified versions thereof in the appropriate data entry field of the editing box; and
in response to the user selecting the button for entering changes, replacing the selected link entry in the links grid with the modified entry entered into the link entry editing box.
119. The process of claim 58 , wherein a presentation data file is generated during the authoring of a presentation which comprises all the scheduling information and data associated with the appearance of the presentation window entered by the user or imported from the selected template, and wherein the process action of displaying the series of data grids and informational panes comprises an action of displaying the contents of said presentation data file as an informational pane in said work sector.
120. The process of claim 119 , wherein:
the process action of displaying the work sector, comprises an action of displaying a series of data grid and informational pane selection tabs which when one is selected by the user causes the data grid or informational pane associated with the selected tab to be displayed in the work sector; and wherein,
the process action of displaying the presentation data file pane comprises an action of displaying the pane in the work sector whenever the user selects a presentation data file pane tab displayed in the work sector.
121. The process of claim 119 , wherein the presentation data file is an XML file.
122. The process of claim 1 , further comprising the process action of changing the selected template either before or after the user imports media components, enters presentation properties, and enters scheduling information.
123. The process of claim 122 , wherein the process action of changing the selected template, comprises the actions of:
displaying a menu bar comprising a project menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the project menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising a template selection command;
in response to the user selecting the template selection command, displaying the template selection window on the display, said template selection window initially showing a presentation layout strip associated with the currently selected template in a visually distinguishing form and having a template selection button; and
in response to the user selecting a different layout strip and then selecting the template selection button, displaying the presentation tool window and importing the template associated with newly selected layout, while retaining any previously imported media components, the previous presentation properties and any previously entered scheduling information.
124. The process of claim 1 , further comprising the process action of saving a modified version of the selected template after the user entered or modified presentation properties associated with the selected template.
125. The process of claim 124 , wherein the process action of saving a modified version of the selected template, comprises the actions of:
displaying a menu bar comprising a file menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the file menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising a templates command;
in response to the user selecting the templates command, displaying a templates window on the display, said templates window being used to save the modified template.
126. The process of claim 125 , wherein the process action of displaying the templates window, comprises the actions of:
displaying a template name data entry field, a template description data entry field and a template author data entry field;
displaying a template name, description and author in the respective template name, template description and template author data entry fields as entered by the user;
creating a thumbnail image of the last displayed image of a preview display in the presentation tool window, wherein the preview display provides a view of the presentation as it would appear to a viewer;
displaying the thumbnail image in a thumbnail display sector of the templates window for the user's review;
in response to the user selecting a save template button,
generating a file comprising the modified template, as well as the modified template's name, description, author, and thumbnail, and
displaying a save as dialog box having data entry field in which the user enters the location, either local or remote, that the modified template is to be saved; and
in response to the user specifying the location in said data entry field and selecting the save button in the save as dialog box, copying the file associated with the modified template to the specified location.
127. The process of claim 126 , wherein once the file associated with the modified template is saved to the specified location, the next time that location is accessed to obtain template data for display in the template selection window, a presentation layout strip associated with the modified template will be displayed comprising the thumbnail image, the template name, the template description, and the template author.
128. The process of claim 126 , further comprising performing the process actions of, prior to the user selecting the save template button:
in response to the user wanting to use a different view of the presentation as the basis for said template thumbnail image and minimizing the templates window, displaying the presentation tool window;
in response to the user,
pausing the preview display of the presentation in the presentation tool window to the image desired for the template thumbnail image,
reinstating the templates window, and
selecting a button displayed in the templates window that causes a new thumbnail image to be created and used to replace the existing thumbnail image,
creating a new thumbnail image of the last displayed image of a preview display in the presentation tool window; and
displaying the thumbnail image in a thumbnail display sector of the templates window for the user's review.
129. The process of claim 1 , further comprising the process action of deleting a template.
130. The process of claim 129 , wherein the process action of deleting a template, comprises the actions of:
displaying a menu bar comprising a file menu button in the presentation tool window;
in response to the user selecting the file menu button, displaying a list of commands comprising a templates command;
in response to the user selecting the templates command, displaying a templates window on the display;
in response to the user selecting a server button displayed in the templates window, displaying presentation layouts obtained from one or more prescribed remote servers connected via a computer network to a host computer of said computer system, or in response to the user selecting a local button displayed in the templates window, displaying presentation layouts residing in a memory of the host computer.
in response to the user selecting one of the displayed presentation layouts and selecting a delete button displayed in the templates window, deleting the template associated with the selected layout.
131. A computer-implemented process for authoring an interactive presentation having multi-media components, comprising using a computer to perform the following process actions:
inputting a user-selected presentation template comprising a template file specifying layout features and interactive functionality for an interactive presentation window which when rendered displays the presentation being authored to a viewer;
displaying a presentation tool window to the user authoring the presentation and populating it with the selected template's layout and functionality data, said presentation tool window providing graphic user interfaces to assist the user in tasks comprising specifying media files to be imported, modifying the layout and functionality data and entering scheduling information associated with the presentation;
importing media files comprising the multi-media content of the presentation as specified by the user via the presentation tool window;
inputting user-provided scheduling data for the presentation specifying when each component of the multi-media content is to be played or displayed in the presentation window;
generating a presentation data file comprising all the layout and functionality data, as well as scheduling data, associated with the presentation being authored; and
building a presentation package comprising exported versions of the imported media components and the presentation file, wherein said presentation file is executable by a viewer and when executed renders said presentation window for viewing the presentation.
132. The process of claim 131 , wherein the process action of importing media files, comprises the actions of:
importing a master track video or audio file comprising a video or audio program representing the main presentation material and the timeline from which all presentation events are scheduled; and
importing a presentation slides file comprising presentation slides which support the presentation material provided in the master track video or audio.
133. The process of claim 132 , wherein the process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data comprises the action of inputting user-defined script commands which dictate when in the master track video or audio program a particular presentation slide from the imported presentation slides file is displayed in the presentation window.
134. The process of claim 131 , wherein the process action of importing media files, comprises the action of importing one or more demonstration files each comprising a video, audio, or animation demonstration program.
135. The process of claim 134 , wherein the process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data comprises the action of inputting user-defined script commands which dictate when in the master track video or audio program a particular demonstration program from the one or more imported demonstration files is displayed in the presentation window.
136. The process of claim 131 , wherein the process action of importing media files, comprises the action of importing one or more document files each comprising a work processing, spreadsheet, or HTML document.
137. The process of claim 136 , wherein the process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data comprises the action of inputting user-defined script commands which dictate when in the master track video or audio program a particular document from the one or more imported document files is displayed in the presentation window.
138. The process of claim 131 , further comprising a process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data in the form of a user-defined script command which dictates when in the master track video or audio program a user-specified network site is to be contacted and displayed in the presentation window.
139. The process of claim 131 , further comprising a process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data in the form of user-established contents markers which identify when in the master track video or audio program a particular user-named contents topic or sub-topic begins.
140. The process of claim 131 , further comprising a process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data in the form of user-established transcription segment indicators which identify when in the master track video or audio program a particular user-provided segment of a transcription of the master track video or audio program begins.
141. The process of claim 131 , wherein said user-provided segments of the transcription of the master track video or audio program can be in more than one language, and wherein the process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data in the form of user-established transcription segment indicators comprises the action of inputting user-established transcription segment indicators for each language and identifying the language associated with each segment.
142. The process of claim 131 , further comprising a process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data in the form of user-established link indicators which identify when in the master track video or audio program a particular user-identified link is to be displayed in the presentation window.
143. The process of claim 131 , further comprising a process action of inputting metadata comprising information about the presentation, said metadata being entered by the user via the presentation tool window and included in the presentation data file.
144. The process of claim 131 , further comprising a process action of accepting user inputs via the presentation tool window for modifying the layout and functionality data, said modifying comprising changing existing data or adding new data.
145. The process of claim 144 , further comprising inputting a different user-selected presentation template, wherein all the applicable user-modified layout and functionality data and user provided scheduling data is retained in lieu of the newly selected template's default values for those data elements.
146. The process of claim 131 , further comprising performing subsequent to the process action of building the presentation package, a process action of previewing the presentation package in the presentation tool window.
147. The process of claim 131 further comprising performing subsequent to the process action of building the presentation package, the actions of:
editing the presentation package by changing at least one of (i) the layout and functionality data in the presentation data file, (ii) the scheduling data in the presentation data file, and (iii) importing additional media files or presentation slides; and
re-building the presentation package to include the changes.
148. The process of claim 131 , further comprising the process actions of:
inputting a user-assigned a name and user-specified project directory storage location for the presentation package; and
storing the presentation package under the specified name at the specified location.
149. The process of claim 148 , wherein the process action of building a presentation package, comprises an action of creating the presentation file by combining the presentation data file and the file associated with selected template and storing the presentation file in the project directory.
150. The process of claim 149 , wherein the process action of combining the presentation data file and the file associated with selected template, comprises an action of replacing the layout and functionality data in the template file with the layout and functionality data in presentation data file, and incorporating the scheduling data from the presentation data file into the template file, to produce a HTML file representing the presentation file
151. The process of claim 148 , wherein:
the process action of importing media files, comprises the actions of,
importing a master track video or audio file comprising a video or audio program representing the main presentation material and the timeline from which all presentation events are scheduled, and
importing a presentation slides file comprising presentation slides which support the presentation material provided in the master track video or audio; and wherein,
the process action of building a presentation package, comprises an action of exporting the imported presentation slide file to the project directory using the export options specified in the presentation data file.
152. The process of claim 151 , wherein:
the process action of importing a presentation slides file, comprises an action of generating thumbnail versions of each slide in the presentation slides file; and wherein,
the process action of building a presentation package, comprises an action of including the thumbnail version of each presentation slide in the exported presentation slides file.
153. The process of claim 151 , wherein the process action of building a presentation package, comprises the actions of:
indexing the imported master track video or audio file, said indexing comprising,
eliminating any existing un-needed metadata from the header of the master track video or audio file, and
writing said scheduling data into the header of the master track video or audio file; and,
exporting the indexed master track video or audio file to the project directory.
154. The process of claim 153 , wherein the layout and functionality data includes media file player settings, and wherein the process action of indexing the imported master track video or audio file, further comprises an action of writing the player settings into the header of the master track video or audio file.
155. The process of claim 148 , further comprising:
a process action of inputting user-provided scheduling data in the form of user-established link indicators which identify when in the master track video or audio program a particular user-identified link is to be displayed in the presentation window; and wherein,
the process action of building a presentation package, comprises the actions of,
creating a links file comprising the user-established link indicators including the user-identified links, and
exporting the links file to the project directory.
156. The process of claim 148 , wherein:
the process action of importing media files, comprises an action of importing one or more demonstration files each comprising a video, audio, or animation demonstration program; and wherein,
the process action of building a presentation package, comprises an action of exporting the imported demonstration files to the project directory.
157. The process of claim 148 , wherein:
the process action of importing media files, comprises an action of importing one or more document files each comprising a work processing, spreadsheet, or HTML document; and wherein,
the process action of building a presentation package, comprises an action of exporting the imported document files to the project directory.
158. The process of claim 131 , wherein the process action of displaying a presentation tool window comprises an action of displaying an output panel which provides information and a status regarding the building of the presentation package including a description of any error encountered during the building process, said output panel being displayed automatically whenever the user initiates said building process.
159. The process of claim 158 , wherein the process action of displaying a presentation tool window comprises an action of displaying an output panel tab which when selected by the user when the output panel is not displayed, causes the output panel to be displayed.
160. The process of claim 131 , wherein the process action of displaying a presentation tool window comprises the actions of:
displaying a preview display tab; and
in response to the user selecting the preview display tab,
initiating said building of the presentation package if not already performed, and
displaying a preview display, wherein the preview display provides a view of the presentation as it would appear to a viewer.
161. A system for authoring an interactive presentation having multimedia components, comprising:
a general purpose computing device comprising a display, user interface selection device and user interface data entry device; and
a computer program comprising program modules executable by the computing device, wherein the computing device is directed by the program modules of the computer program to,
input a user-selected presentation template comprising a template file specifying layout features and interactive functionality data for an interactive presentation window which when rendered displays the presentation being authored to a viewer;
display a presentation tool window to the user authoring the presentation and populating it with the selected template's layout features and interactive functionality data, said presentation tool window providing graphic user interfaces to assist the user in tasks comprising specifying media files to be imported, modifying the layout features and interactive functionality data and entering scheduling information associated with the presentation, as well as a graphic user interface for viewing and modifying said scheduling information once entered;
import media files comprising the multi-media content of the presentation as specified by the user via the presentation tool window;
input user-provided scheduling data for the presentation via the presentation tool window specifying when each component of the multimedia content is to be played or displayed in the presentation window;
generate a presentation data file comprising all the layout and functionality data, as well as scheduling data, associated with the presentation being authored; and
build a presentation package comprising exported versions of the imported media components and the presentation file, wherein said presentation file is executable by a viewer and when executed renders said presentation window for viewing the presentation.
162. The system of claim 161 , wherein the imported media components comprise a master track video or audio program representing the main presentation material and a presentation timeline, and wherein all scheduling data references an elapsed time of the master track program in the form of a time code, and wherein said scheduling data comprises,
script commands which establish scheduled presentation events, wherein each script command comprises a time code representing when in the presentation timeline an event is to occur, a script type representing the type of event that is scheduled by the script command, and a script parameter referencing a specific resource required to make the event happen,
contents markers which identify divisions in the subject matter of the presentation being authored, wherein each contents marker comprises a time code representing when in the presentation timeline one of said divisions occurs and a title for the section of the presentation that begins at the time specified by the time code, and
transcript entries which provide a segment of the transcript of the audio of the master track program, wherein each transcript entry comprises a time code representing when in the presentation timeline the transcript segment begins and the transcript segment that begins at the time specified by the time code.
163. The system of claim 162 , wherein the program module for providing a graphic user interface for viewing and modifying previously entered scheduling information, comprises a sub-module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprising:
a horizontally oriented elapsed time ruler, said ruler starting at an elapse time of zero corresponding to the beginning of the master track program and having periodic graduations increasing in a left to right direction to an elapsed time corresponding to the end of the master track program;
a first horizontal scheduling band dedicated to script commands comprising script command icons appearing in the band at locations centered on the elapsed time of the master track as indicated by the elapsed time ruler that the script command is scheduled for execution;
a second horizontal scheduling band dedicated to contents markers comprising contents marker icons appearing in the band at locations centered on the elapsed time of the master track as indicated by the elapsed time ruler that the contents marker have been set; and
a third horizontal scheduling band dedicated to transcription entries comprising transcription entry icons appearing in the band at locations centered on the elapsed time of the master track as indicated by the elapsed time ruler that the transcript segment associated with the entry begins.
164. The system of claim 163 , wherein the sub-module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprises sub-modules for:
displaying as much of the timeline as possible given the amount of horizontal space assigned to the timeline in said display and a current size setting which specifies the resolution of the timeline;
displaying a pair of sizing button, a first of which increases the resolution of the timeline whenever it is selected by the user, and the other of which decreases the resolution of the timeline whenever it is selected by the user, said resolution of the time line dictating how much of the timeline is shown in the assigned horizontal display space, as well as the number and separation between said elapse time graduations on the elapsed time ruler.
165. The system of claim 164 , wherein the sub-module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprises sub-modules for:
displaying a horizontal scroll bar whenever not all of the timeline can be displayed given the amount of horizontal space assigned to the timeline in said display and the current size setting;
in response to the user scrolling the bar forward, moving a portion of the timeline associated with a future elapsed time period of the timeline not previously visible into view; and
in response to the user scrolling the bar back, moving a portion of the timeline associated with a past elapsed time period of the timeline not previously visible into view.
166. The system of claim 163 , further comprising a program module for providing a graphic user interface to play the master track program of the presentation being authored, and wherein the sub-module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprises a sub-module for displaying a vertically oriented elapsed time bar which traverses the three scheduling bands and the elapsed time ruler and which is positioned at an elapsed time corresponding to the current elapse time of the master track video.
167. The system of claim 166 , wherein the sub-module for displaying the elapsed time bar, comprises a sub-module for, in response to the user repositioning the elapsed time bar within the timeline, jumping the master track program to the elapsed time corresponding to the elapsed time bar's new position.
168. The system of claim 166 , further comprising program modules for:
importing a media component comprising a presentation slide deck comprising a plurality of presentation slides;
generating thumbnail versions of each presentation slide; and
providing a graphic user interface to display the thumbnail versions of the presentation slides.
169. The system of claim 168 , wherein the sub-module for displaying the elapsed time bar, comprises a sub-module for, in response to the user repositioning the elapsed time bar within the timeline, displaying the thumbnail version of the presentation slide that is scheduled to be shown when the master track program is at the elapsed time corresponding to the elapsed time bar's new position.
170. The system of claim 166 , whenever not all of the timeline can be displayed given the amount of horizontal space assigned to the timeline in said display, and wherein the sub-module for displaying the elapsed time bar, comprises sub-modules for:
in response to the user repositioning the elapsed time bar to a forward end of the visible portion of the timeline, moving a portion of the timeline associated with a future elapsed time period of the timeline not previously visible into view; and
in response to the user repositioning the elapsed time bar to a back end of the visible portion of the timeline, moving a portion of the timeline associated with a past elapsed time period of the timeline not previously visible into view.
171. The system of claim 163 , wherein the program module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprises sub-modules for:
in response to the user using said selection device to hover a cursor over a script command icon, displaying an information box listing the time code, script type and script parameter associated with the script command represented by the icon;
in response to the user using said selection device to hover a cursor over a contents marker icon, displaying an information box listing the time code and contents marker title associated with the contents marker represented by the icon; and
in response to the user using said selection device to hover a cursor over a transcription entry icon, displaying an information box listing the time code and at least a portion of the transcript segment associated with the transcription entry represented by the icon.
172. The system of claim 163 , wherein the program module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprise a sub-module for, in response to the user selecting a script command icon via said selection device, displaying a scripts grid comprising a list of script commands which establish scheduled presentation events, wherein each script command is organized in three columns with a first column listing a time code representing when in the presentation timeline an event is to occur, a second column listing a script type representing the type of event that is scheduled by the script command, and a third column listing a script parameter referencing a specific resource required to make the event happen, and wherein the script command associated with the selected script command icon is highlighted, and wherein the scripts grid can be used to review or edit the scripts command.
173. The system of claim 163 , wherein the program module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprise a sub-module for, in response to the user selecting a contents marker icon via said selection device, displaying a markers grid comprising a list of contents markers which identify divisions in the subject matter of the presentation being authored, wherein each contents marker is organized in two columns with a first column listing a time code representing when in the presentation timeline one of said divisions occurs and a second column listing a title for the section of the presentation that begins at the time specified by the time code, and wherein the contents marker associated with the selected contents marker icon is highlighted, and wherein the markers grid can be used to review or edit the contents marker.
174. The system of claim 163 , wherein the program module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprise a sub-module for, in response to the user selecting a transcription entry icon via said selection device, displaying a transcription grid comprising a list of transcript entries which provide a segment of the transcript of the audio of the master track program, wherein each transcript entry is organized in two columns with a first column listing a time code representing when in the presentation timeline the transcript segment begins and a second column comprising the transcript segment that begins at the time specified by the time code, and wherein the transcription entry associated with the selected transcription entry icon is highlighted, and wherein the transcription grid can be used to review or edit the transcription entry.
175. The system of claim 163 , wherein the program module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline, comprises a sub-module for, in response to the user employing said selection device to drag one of a script command icon, contents marker icon, or transcription entry icon to a new location within the icon's scheduling band, replacing the time code of the script command, contents marker or transcription entry represented by the re-located icon, with a new time code corresponding to the elapsed time as indicated by the elapsed time ruler at which the re-located icon is now centered.
176. The system of claim 163 , wherein the program module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline, comprises a sub-module for, in response to the user selecting one of a script command icon, contents marker icon, or transcription entry icon, displaying a list of editing commands applicable to the script command, contents marker, or transcription entry represented by the selected icon.
177. The system of claim 176 , wherein the sub-module of displaying a list of editing commands applicable to the script command, contents marker, or transcription entry represented by the selected icon, comprises displaying a delete command among the list of editable commands, and in response to the user selecting the delete command, deleting the script command, contents marker, or transcription entry represented by the selected icon.
178. The system of claim 163 , wherein the master track program is a video program, and wherein the program module for providing a graphic user interface for viewing and modifying previously entered scheduling information, further comprises a sub-module for displaying at least a portion of a timeline comprising, a horizontal video frame band comprising thumbnail images of prescribed frames of the master track program appearing in the band at locations centered on the elapsed time of the master track as indicated by the elapsed time ruler that the frames associated with the thumbnail is played.
179. The system of claim 178 , wherein the prescribed frames of the master track program used to create the thumbnail images displayed in the video frame band are selected based on a prescribed interval.
180. The system of claim 178 , wherein scene changes as derived from an analysis of the thumbnail images displayed in the video frame band are represented by a scene change icon displayed at a location in the video frame band corresponding to the elapsed time of the master track video at which the scene change occurs.
181. The system of claim 162 , wherein the program module for generating a presentation data file comprising all the layout features and interactive functionality data, as well as scheduling data, associated with the presentation being authored, comprises generating a XML file based on the IMS standardized schema.
182. The system of claim 181 , wherein the IMS standardized schema requires the presentation data file be a LRN formatted file named “imsmanifest.xml”, comprising:
a metadata section containing data describing the presentation;
an organizations section containing one or more organization elements describing the content of the presentation with a list of individual content items; and
a resources section providing list of the individual resources associated with the presentation, said resources comprising said media files.
183. The system of claim 182 , wherein the IMS standardized schema permits element extensions in the metadata section, and wherein the program module of generating a presentation data file comprises adding element extensions to the metadata section, said extensions comprising:
adding a subsection to the metadata section supporting two tags, the first of which is an “<extendedmetadata> element which is used to provide information about the presentation, and the other of which is a <ui> element which is used to provide said layout features and interactive functionality data.
184. The system of claim 182 , wherein the IMS standardized schema permits element extensions in the resources section, and wherein the program module of generating a presentation data file comprises an element for adding element extensions to the resources section, said extensions comprising adding a custom resource element for incorporating additional elements related to the playback of the presentation, wherein said elements comprise a <media>element for listing metadata associated with the master track program.
185. The system of claim 184 , wherein the metadata associated with the master track program comprises said scheduling data, as well as start and stop time, codecs used, and player settings, and wherein each of the metadata items has a unique sub-element defined for it.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/183,830 US20040001106A1 (en) | 2002-06-26 | 2002-06-26 | System and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components |
EP03014309A EP1376406A3 (en) | 2002-06-26 | 2003-06-25 | A system and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/183,830 US20040001106A1 (en) | 2002-06-26 | 2002-06-26 | System and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20040001106A1 true US20040001106A1 (en) | 2004-01-01 |
Family
ID=29717943
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/183,830 Abandoned US20040001106A1 (en) | 2002-06-26 | 2002-06-26 | System and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20040001106A1 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1376406A3 (en) |
Cited By (315)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20040004636A1 (en) * | 2002-07-08 | 2004-01-08 | Asm International Nv | Method for the automatic generation of an interactive electronic equipment documentation package |
US20040059755A1 (en) * | 2002-09-25 | 2004-03-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Systems, methods, and computer program products to display and select hierarchical database segments and fields |
US20040071453A1 (en) * | 2002-10-08 | 2004-04-15 | Valderas Harold M. | Method and system for producing interactive DVD video slides |
US20040078297A1 (en) * | 2002-06-10 | 2004-04-22 | Veres Robert Dean | Method and system for customizing a network-based transaction facility seller application |
US20040078382A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2004-04-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Adaptive menu system for media players |
US20040120698A1 (en) * | 2002-12-20 | 2004-06-24 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method of transferring DV metadata to DVD-video data |
US20040133597A1 (en) * | 2003-01-07 | 2004-07-08 | Fano Andrew E. | Customized multi-media services |
US20040145611A1 (en) * | 2003-01-16 | 2004-07-29 | Kaoru Ogawa | Method, program, and system for editing contents of multimedia |
US20040154039A1 (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2004-08-05 | Simms Andrew M. | Global listings format (GLF) for multimedia programming content and electronic program guide (EPG) information |
US20040153474A1 (en) * | 2003-01-21 | 2004-08-05 | Hui Li | Device and method for generating metadata from essence |
US20040160992A1 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2004-08-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Remote encoder system and method for capturing the live presentation of video multiplexed with images |
US20040177317A1 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2004-09-09 | John Bradstreet | Closed caption navigation |
US20040193672A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for virtual folder sharing including utilization of static and dynamic lists |
US20040193594A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | File system for displaying items of different types and from different physical locations |
US20040193621A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method utilizing virtual folders |
US20040193673A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Mohammed Samji | System and method for sharing items in a computer system |
US20040215732A1 (en) * | 2003-03-26 | 2004-10-28 | Mckee Timothy P. | Extensible user context system for delivery of notifications |
US20040262410A1 (en) * | 2003-04-11 | 2004-12-30 | Hull Gerry G. | Graphical thermostat and sensor |
US20050021590A1 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2005-01-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Resolving a distributed topology to stream data |
US20050028107A1 (en) * | 2003-07-30 | 2005-02-03 | Gomes Luis M. | Editable data tooltips |
US20050050015A1 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2005-03-03 | Dirk Becker | Generic iViews |
US20050071764A1 (en) * | 2003-09-28 | 2005-03-31 | Denny Jaeger | Method for creating a collection of multimedia interactive graphic elements using arrow logic |
US20050076002A1 (en) * | 2003-10-06 | 2005-04-07 | Patrick Williams | Parameter assistant for automatically specifying parameter values for a software program |
US20050125734A1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2005-06-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Media processing methods, systems and application program interfaces |
US20050132168A1 (en) * | 2003-12-11 | 2005-06-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Destination application program interfaces |
US20050151756A1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-07-14 | Pioneer Corporation | Information delivery display system and information delivery display method |
US20050154995A1 (en) * | 2004-01-08 | 2005-07-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Intelligent agenda object for showing contextual location within a presentation application |
US20050160368A1 (en) * | 2004-01-21 | 2005-07-21 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Systems and methods for authoring a media presentation |
US20050166142A1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-07-28 | Pioneer Corporation | Information display method, information display device, and information delivery and display system |
US20050174364A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2005-08-11 | Malmstrom R. D. | Computer presentation and command integration apparatus |
US20050174365A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2005-08-11 | Malmstrom R. D. | Computer presentation and command integration method |
US20050181348A1 (en) * | 2004-02-17 | 2005-08-18 | Carey Tadhg M. | E-learning system and method |
US20050188413A1 (en) * | 2004-02-21 | 2005-08-25 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for accessing multimedia content |
US20050198623A1 (en) * | 2004-03-08 | 2005-09-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Managing topology changes in media applications |
US20050198678A1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-09-08 | Pioneer Corporation | Control information file creating device, information display device, control information file creation method, and information distribution display system |
US20050195752A1 (en) * | 2004-03-08 | 2005-09-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Resolving partial media topologies |
US20050204289A1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2005-09-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Media processing methods, systems and application program interfaces |
US20050210389A1 (en) * | 2004-03-17 | 2005-09-22 | Targit A/S | Hyper related OLAP |
US20050240392A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-10-27 | Munro W B Jr | Method and system to display and search in a language independent manner |
US20050246331A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2005-11-03 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20050251731A1 (en) * | 2004-05-03 | 2005-11-10 | Valderas Harold M | Video slide based presentations |
US20050262254A1 (en) * | 2004-04-20 | 2005-11-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic redirection of streaming media between computing devices |
US20050283742A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-12-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Stack icons representing multiple objects |
US20050283723A1 (en) * | 2004-06-22 | 2005-12-22 | Rex Fish | Electronic reference system |
US20060001672A1 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2006-01-05 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Searchable registers |
US20060004873A1 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2006-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Carousel control for metadata navigation and assignment |
US20060005120A1 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2006-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Aligned behavior in templated lists |
US20060026634A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2006-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Creating standardized playlists and maintaining coherency |
US20060026524A1 (en) * | 2004-08-02 | 2006-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for smart media content thumbnail extraction |
US20060026376A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2006-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Retrieving graphics from slow retrieval storage devices |
US20060036568A1 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2006-02-16 | Microsoft Corporation | File system shell |
US20060069797A1 (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2006-03-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for multimedia remoting over terminal server connections |
US20060067578A1 (en) * | 2004-09-30 | 2006-03-30 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Slide contents processor, slide contents processing method, and storage medium storing program |
US20060070007A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2006-03-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Rich drag drop user interface |
US20060093309A1 (en) * | 2004-10-05 | 2006-05-04 | Magix Ag | System and method for creating a photo movie |
US20060093230A1 (en) * | 2004-10-29 | 2006-05-04 | Hochmuth Roland M | Compression of image regions according to graphics command type |
US20060095447A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2006-05-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Offline multi-table data editing and storage |
US7043477B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2006-05-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Navigating media content via groups within a playlist |
US7054888B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2006-05-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US20060129977A1 (en) * | 2004-12-01 | 2006-06-15 | Segar Andrew P | Data editor |
US20060161533A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2006-07-20 | Microsoft Corporation | Data source task pane |
US20060174216A1 (en) * | 2005-01-28 | 2006-08-03 | Trenten Peterson | Providing additional hierarchical information for an object displayed in a tree view in a hierarchical relationship with other objects |
US20060184684A1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2006-08-17 | Weiss Rebecca C | Reconstructed frame caching |
US20060190817A1 (en) * | 2005-02-23 | 2006-08-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Filtering a collection of items |
WO2006096133A1 (en) * | 2005-03-10 | 2006-09-14 | Knowledge Director Pte. Ltd. | System and method for generation of multimedia learning files |
US20060224966A1 (en) * | 2005-03-30 | 2006-10-05 | Eberhard Bohn | Method of announcing a user of a computer and the activation and starting of several programs installed on a computer |
US20060236253A1 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2006-10-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Dialog user interfaces for related tasks and programming interface for same |
US20060242164A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems, methods, and user interfaces for storing, searching, navigating, and retrieving electronic information |
US20060242603A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic multi-dimensional scrolling |
US20060242585A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Scenario specialization of file browser |
US20060242604A1 (en) * | 2005-04-21 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Multiple roots in navigation pane |
US20060242591A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | File dialog user interfaces and creation of same |
US20060242122A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems, methods, and user interfaces for storing, searching, navigating, and retrieving electronic information |
US20060259875A1 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2006-11-16 | Microsoft Corporation | User interface for managing master and layout relationships |
US20060265659A1 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2006-11-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Inheritance model between masters, layouts and slides |
US20060271550A1 (en) * | 2005-05-26 | 2006-11-30 | Siemens Communications, Inc. | Method and system for remote document editing using a wireless communication device |
US20060277454A1 (en) * | 2003-12-09 | 2006-12-07 | Yi-Chih Chen | Multimedia presentation system |
US20060294468A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US20060294469A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US20060294046A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US20070005634A1 (en) * | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Templates in a schema editor |
US20070016872A1 (en) * | 2005-07-13 | 2007-01-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Rich drag drop user interface |
US20070022110A1 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2007-01-25 | Saora Kabushiki Kaisha | Method for processing information, apparatus therefor and program therefor |
US7181463B2 (en) | 2003-10-24 | 2007-02-20 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for managing data using static lists |
US20070043700A1 (en) * | 2005-08-18 | 2007-02-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Searching a file open dialog using a namespace extension |
US20070050700A1 (en) * | 2005-08-30 | 2007-03-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Formattable spreadsheet table elements with automatic updating |
US20070055944A1 (en) * | 2001-06-18 | 2007-03-08 | Faud Rashid | Configuration of displays for targeted user communities |
US20070074116A1 (en) * | 2005-09-29 | 2007-03-29 | Teleios, Inc. | Multi-pane navigation/synchronization in a multimedia presentation system |
US20070078894A1 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2007-04-05 | Rothman Michael A | System and method for unified SKU (stock keeping unit) enablement |
US20070083851A1 (en) * | 2005-10-06 | 2007-04-12 | Moda Co., Ltd. | Template-based multimedia editor and editing method thereof |
US20070101387A1 (en) * | 2005-10-31 | 2007-05-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Media Sharing And Authoring On The Web |
US20070101271A1 (en) * | 2005-11-01 | 2007-05-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Template-based multimedia authoring and sharing |
US20070112811A1 (en) * | 2005-10-20 | 2007-05-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Architecture for scalable video coding applications |
US7234114B2 (en) | 2003-03-24 | 2007-06-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Extensible object previewer in a shell browser |
US7240292B2 (en) | 2003-04-17 | 2007-07-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Virtual address bar user interface control |
US20070162839A1 (en) * | 2006-01-09 | 2007-07-12 | John Danty | Syndicated audio authoring |
US20070168868A1 (en) * | 2006-01-13 | 2007-07-19 | Lehman Brothers Inc. | Method and system for integrating calculation and presentation technologies |
US20070186166A1 (en) * | 2006-02-06 | 2007-08-09 | Anderson Kent R | Creation and use of an electronic presentation slide that includes multimedia content |
US20070188627A1 (en) * | 2006-02-14 | 2007-08-16 | Hiroshi Sasaki | Video processing apparatus, method of adding time code, and methode of preparing editing list |
US20070198657A1 (en) * | 2006-01-31 | 2007-08-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Redirection to local copies of server-based files |
US20070204238A1 (en) * | 2006-02-27 | 2007-08-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Smart Video Presentation |
US20070239780A1 (en) * | 2006-04-07 | 2007-10-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Simultaneous capture and analysis of media content |
US20070245258A1 (en) * | 2006-04-13 | 2007-10-18 | Codman Neuro Sciences Sàrl | Graphical user interface of an external control device for controlling an implantable medical device while minimizing human error |
US20070263010A1 (en) * | 2006-05-15 | 2007-11-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Large-scale visualization techniques |
WO2007140017A2 (en) * | 2006-05-26 | 2007-12-06 | Blowfish Works, Inc. | System and method for advertising |
US20070286484A1 (en) * | 2003-02-20 | 2007-12-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and Methods for Enhanced Image Adaptation |
US20070293998A1 (en) * | 2006-06-14 | 2007-12-20 | Underdal Olav M | Information object creation based on an optimized test procedure method and apparatus |
US20070294001A1 (en) * | 2006-06-14 | 2007-12-20 | Underdal Olav M | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US20070294619A1 (en) * | 2006-06-16 | 2007-12-20 | Microsoft Corporation | Generating media presentations |
US20080005652A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2008-01-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Media presentation driven by meta-data events |
US20080070218A1 (en) * | 2006-08-30 | 2008-03-20 | The Boeing Company | System, method, and computer program product for delivering a training course |
US20080073936A1 (en) * | 2006-09-21 | 2008-03-27 | Jen-Her Jeng | Multi-Window Presentation System, Multi-Window File Editing System and Method Thereof |
US20080109727A1 (en) * | 2006-11-07 | 2008-05-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Timing aspects of media content rendering |
US20080120550A1 (en) * | 2006-11-17 | 2008-05-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Example based video editing |
US20080148153A1 (en) * | 2006-12-18 | 2008-06-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | System, method and medium organizing templates for generating moving images |
US20080163086A1 (en) * | 2004-06-18 | 2008-07-03 | Eral Foxenland | Method and Apparatus For Transitions in a User Interface |
US20080163122A1 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2008-07-03 | Jason Wolf | File content preview tool |
US7409644B2 (en) | 2003-05-16 | 2008-08-05 | Microsoft Corporation | File system shell |
US20080270941A1 (en) * | 2007-04-30 | 2008-10-30 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | User content management method in communication terminal |
US20080276158A1 (en) * | 2005-11-02 | 2008-11-06 | Creative Technology Ltd | System for Downloading Digital Content Published in a Media Channel |
US20080281783A1 (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2008-11-13 | Leon Papkoff | System and method for presenting media |
US20080301539A1 (en) * | 2007-04-30 | 2008-12-04 | Targit A/S | Computer-implemented method and a computer system and a computer readable medium for creating videos, podcasts or slide presentations from a business intelligence application |
US20080313544A1 (en) * | 2002-12-12 | 2008-12-18 | Lawrence Charles Kleinman | Programmed apparatus and system for dynamic display of presentation files |
US7496583B2 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2009-02-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Property tree for metadata navigation and assignment |
US20090055428A1 (en) * | 2004-04-29 | 2009-02-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Metadata editing control |
US20090067357A1 (en) * | 2007-09-10 | 2009-03-12 | Norton Richard Elliott | Method and system for multimedia messaging service (mms) to video adaptation |
US20090079744A1 (en) * | 2007-09-21 | 2009-03-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Animating objects using a declarative animation scheme |
US7512586B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-03-31 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20090088191A1 (en) * | 2007-09-28 | 2009-04-02 | Norton Richard Elliott | Generation and delivery of multimedia content-adaptation notifications |
US20090119369A1 (en) * | 2007-11-05 | 2009-05-07 | Cyberlink Corp. | Collaborative editing in a video editing system |
US20090125677A1 (en) * | 2007-11-13 | 2009-05-14 | Xavier Leveque | Intelligent caching of media files |
US20090132498A1 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2009-05-21 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Information processing apparatus, information processing system, processing method thereof, and recording medium |
US20090138508A1 (en) * | 2007-11-28 | 2009-05-28 | Hebraic Heritage Christian School Of Theology, Inc | Network-based interactive media delivery system and methods |
US20090172556A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2009-07-02 | Malmstrom R Dean | Change-alarmed, integrated console apparatus and method |
US20090199106A1 (en) * | 2008-02-05 | 2009-08-06 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Communication terminal including graphical bookmark manager |
US20090216401A1 (en) * | 2008-02-27 | 2009-08-27 | Underdal Olav M | Feedback loop on diagnostic procedure |
US20090216584A1 (en) * | 2008-02-27 | 2009-08-27 | Fountain Gregory J | Repair diagnostics based on replacement parts inventory |
US7587679B1 (en) * | 2004-08-25 | 2009-09-08 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | System and method for displaying elements using a single tab |
US20090228876A1 (en) * | 2003-12-25 | 2009-09-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronic, N.V. | Method and apparatus for processing multi-media script |
US20090248688A1 (en) * | 2008-03-26 | 2009-10-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Heuristic event clustering of media using metadata |
US7599918B2 (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2009-10-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic search with implicit user intention mining |
US20090271239A1 (en) * | 2008-04-23 | 2009-10-29 | Underdal Olav M | Test requirement list for diagnostic tests |
US20090271432A1 (en) * | 2004-12-27 | 2009-10-29 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Template-based development of servers |
US20090280844A1 (en) * | 2008-05-10 | 2009-11-12 | Norton Richard Elliott | Modular transcoding pipeline |
US20090309881A1 (en) * | 2008-06-12 | 2009-12-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Copying of animation effects from a source object to at least one target object |
US20090328234A1 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2009-12-31 | Condel International Technologies Inc. | Method and system for performing interoperable digital rights management among different operating system platforms |
US20090327345A1 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2009-12-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Abstraction layer for online/offline resource access |
US7644446B2 (en) | 2003-10-23 | 2010-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Encryption and data-protection for content on portable medium |
US20100005380A1 (en) * | 2008-07-03 | 2010-01-07 | Lanahan James W | System and methods for automatic media population of a style presentation |
US7657846B2 (en) | 2004-04-23 | 2010-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for displaying stack icons |
US20100031152A1 (en) * | 2008-07-31 | 2010-02-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Creation and Navigation of Infinite Canvas Presentation |
US7668842B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2010-02-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Playlist structure for large playlists |
US20100070522A1 (en) * | 2008-05-22 | 2010-03-18 | A&E Television Networks | Systems and methods for generating and displaying an intellectual property rights profile for a media presentation |
US7712034B2 (en) | 2003-03-24 | 2010-05-04 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for shell browser |
US20100110092A1 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2010-05-06 | Google Inc. | Distributed processing when editing an image in a browser |
US20100111406A1 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2010-05-06 | Google Inc. | Selective image editing in a browser |
US7716168B2 (en) | 2005-06-29 | 2010-05-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Modifying table definitions within a database application |
US20100162106A1 (en) * | 2008-12-24 | 2010-06-24 | Akihiko Ikazaki | Image forming apparatus and method of displaying preview image |
US7761859B2 (en) | 2004-08-13 | 2010-07-20 | National Instruments Corporation | Application development environment with features for aiding a user in writing function calls |
US7773813B2 (en) | 2005-10-31 | 2010-08-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Capture-intention detection for video content analysis |
US20100218100A1 (en) * | 2009-02-25 | 2010-08-26 | HNTB Holdings, Ltd. | Presentation system |
US20100228536A1 (en) * | 2001-10-11 | 2010-09-09 | Steve Grove | System and method to facilitate translation of communications between entities over a network |
US7823077B2 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2010-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for user modification of metadata in a shell browser |
US20100275123A1 (en) * | 2009-04-22 | 2010-10-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Media Timeline Interaction |
US20100271478A1 (en) * | 2009-04-23 | 2010-10-28 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Apparatus for playing back recorded video images related to event,and method thereof |
US7827561B2 (en) | 2003-03-26 | 2010-11-02 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for public consumption of communication events between arbitrary processes |
US20100281386A1 (en) * | 2009-04-30 | 2010-11-04 | Charles Lyons | Media Editing Application with Candidate Clip Management |
US20100287473A1 (en) * | 2006-01-17 | 2010-11-11 | Arthur Recesso | Video analysis tool systems and methods |
US20100299131A1 (en) * | 2009-05-21 | 2010-11-25 | Nexidia Inc. | Transcript alignment |
US20100318916A1 (en) * | 2009-06-11 | 2010-12-16 | David Wilkins | System and method for generating multimedia presentations |
US20100321175A1 (en) * | 2009-06-23 | 2010-12-23 | Gilbert Harry M | Alerts Issued Upon Component Detection Failure |
US20100324376A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2010-12-23 | Spx Corporation | Diagnostics Data Collection and Analysis Method and Apparatus |
US20110041071A1 (en) * | 2002-12-12 | 2011-02-17 | Tatsuo Sudoh | Multimedia data processing device which can easily prepare multimedia contents |
US20110093608A1 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2011-04-21 | Jason Sumler | System, method, and computer readable medium for creating a video clip |
US7933930B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2011-04-26 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US7934159B1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2011-04-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Media timeline |
US20110107221A1 (en) * | 2009-11-04 | 2011-05-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Web Based Sales Presentation Method and System With Synchronized Display |
US20110107192A1 (en) * | 2004-12-31 | 2011-05-05 | National University Of Singapore | Authoring Tool and Method for Creating an Electrical Document |
US7941739B1 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2011-05-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Timeline source |
US20110113315A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2011-05-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Computer-assisted rich interactive narrative (rin) generation |
US20110113334A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2011-05-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Experience streams for rich interactive narratives |
US20110119587A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2011-05-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Data model and player platform for rich interactive narratives |
US20110131298A1 (en) * | 2009-12-01 | 2011-06-02 | Courtemanche Marc | System and Methods for Efficient Media Delivery Using Cache |
US7979886B2 (en) * | 2003-10-17 | 2011-07-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Container format for multimedia presentations |
US20110173180A1 (en) * | 2010-01-14 | 2011-07-14 | Siva Gurumurthy | Search engine recency using content preview |
US7992103B2 (en) | 2004-04-26 | 2011-08-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Scaling icons for representing files |
US20110191672A1 (en) * | 2010-02-02 | 2011-08-04 | Think-Cell Software Gmbh | Method, computer readable storage medium and computer system for efficient agenda drafting, synchronization and display |
US20110225525A1 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2011-09-15 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | System, method and computer program product for displaying data utilizing a selected source and visualization |
US8024335B2 (en) | 2004-05-03 | 2011-09-20 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for dynamically generating a selectable search extension |
US8024672B1 (en) * | 2004-08-25 | 2011-09-20 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | System and method for generating presentations |
US8037101B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2011-10-11 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US8051103B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2011-11-01 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US8098730B2 (en) | 2002-11-01 | 2012-01-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Generating a motion attention model |
US20120017152A1 (en) * | 2010-07-15 | 2012-01-19 | Ken Matsuda | Media-Editing Application with a Free-Form Space for Organizing or Compositing Media Clips |
US8108777B2 (en) | 2008-08-11 | 2012-01-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Sections of a presentation having user-definable properties |
US20120030277A1 (en) * | 2010-07-31 | 2012-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Preview publishing of reports |
US20120072816A1 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2012-03-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Web link association method and system |
US20120096425A1 (en) * | 2010-10-15 | 2012-04-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Software Map |
US20120143923A1 (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2012-06-07 | Whitney Benjamin Taylor | Method and system of hierarchical metadata management and application |
US20120150801A1 (en) * | 2010-12-08 | 2012-06-14 | Microsoft Corporation | Platform agnostic file attribute synchronization |
US20120173985A1 (en) * | 2010-12-29 | 2012-07-05 | Tyler Peppel | Multi-dimensional visualization of temporal information |
US20120198317A1 (en) * | 2011-02-02 | 2012-08-02 | Eppolito Aaron M | Automatic synchronization of media clips |
US20120243848A1 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2012-09-27 | David Martin | Augmented Reality System for Re-Casting A Seminar with Private Calculations |
US20120290951A1 (en) * | 2011-05-12 | 2012-11-15 | Shingo Utsuki | Content sharing system |
US8365069B1 (en) * | 2011-08-17 | 2013-01-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Web content management based on timeliness metadata |
US8412402B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2013-04-02 | Spx Corporation | Vehicle state tracking method and apparatus for diagnostic testing |
US20130097477A1 (en) * | 2010-09-01 | 2013-04-18 | Axel Springer Digital Tv Guide Gmbh | Content transformation for lean-back entertainment |
US8428813B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2013-04-23 | Service Solutions Us Llc | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US20130120654A1 (en) * | 2010-04-12 | 2013-05-16 | David A. Kuspa | Method and Apparatus for Generating Video Descriptions |
US20130151351A1 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2013-06-13 | Daniel E. Tsai | Ad-hoc web content player |
US8490015B2 (en) | 2005-04-15 | 2013-07-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Task dialog and programming interface for same |
US20130198661A1 (en) * | 2012-02-01 | 2013-08-01 | Michael Matas | Hierarchical User Interface |
US20130332807A1 (en) * | 2012-06-08 | 2013-12-12 | Apple Inc. | Collecting Web Pages/Links from Communications and Documents for Later Reading |
US20140013268A1 (en) * | 2012-07-09 | 2014-01-09 | Mobitude, LLC, a Delaware LLC | Method for creating a scripted exchange |
US8639086B2 (en) | 2009-01-06 | 2014-01-28 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Rendering of video based on overlaying of bitmapped images |
US8650596B2 (en) | 2003-11-03 | 2014-02-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Multi-axis television navigation |
US8650489B1 (en) * | 2007-04-20 | 2014-02-11 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Event processing in a content editor |
US8647126B2 (en) | 2006-08-30 | 2014-02-11 | The Boeing Company | System and computer program product for developing and delivering a training course |
US20140109012A1 (en) * | 2012-10-16 | 2014-04-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Thumbnail and document map based navigation in a document |
US8707209B2 (en) | 2004-04-29 | 2014-04-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Save preview representation of files being created |
US20140130080A1 (en) * | 2008-02-06 | 2014-05-08 | Google Inc. | System and method for voting on popular video intervals |
US8732037B2 (en) | 2000-10-16 | 2014-05-20 | Ebay Inc. | Method and system for providing a record |
US8762165B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2014-06-24 | Bosch Automotive Service Solutions Llc | Optimizing test procedures for a subject under test |
US20140277655A1 (en) * | 2003-07-28 | 2014-09-18 | Sonos, Inc | Systems and methods for synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices that independently source digital data |
US8843535B2 (en) * | 2012-06-25 | 2014-09-23 | Oracle International Corporation | Framework for applying metadata for multiple files managed using a content management system |
US20140289701A1 (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2014-09-25 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Enhanced Timelines in Application Development Environments |
US20140372942A1 (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2014-12-18 | Sony Corporation | Chronology providing method, chonology providing apparatus, and recording medium containing chronology providing program |
US20150006759A1 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2015-01-01 | SpeakWorks, Inc. | Presenting a source presentation |
US20150006497A1 (en) * | 2012-06-27 | 2015-01-01 | Joel Chetzroni | Slideshow Builder and Method Associated Thereto |
US8954477B2 (en) | 2011-01-28 | 2015-02-10 | Apple Inc. | Data structures for a media-editing application |
US8972839B2 (en) * | 2006-10-02 | 2015-03-03 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Media presentations including related content |
US8976199B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-03-10 | Facebook, Inc. | Visual embellishment for objects |
US8988418B1 (en) | 2007-01-05 | 2015-03-24 | Florelle, Inc. | System and method for parametric display of modular aesthetic designs |
US9053754B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2015-06-09 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Thumbnail generation and presentation for recorded TV programs |
US20150161565A1 (en) * | 2012-08-24 | 2015-06-11 | SNN, Inc. | Methods and systems for producing, previewing, and publishing a video press release over an electronic network |
US9081883B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2015-07-14 | Bosch Automotive Service Solutions Inc. | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US9112922B2 (en) | 2012-08-28 | 2015-08-18 | Vantrix Corporation | Method and system for self-tuning cache management |
US20150278181A1 (en) * | 2012-10-30 | 2015-10-01 | Sergey Anatoljevich Gevlich | Method and system for creating multimedia presentation prototypes |
CN105074769A (en) * | 2013-01-24 | 2015-11-18 | 盆唐首尔大学校医院 | Method and apparatus for displaying data on basis of electronic medical record system |
US9208599B2 (en) | 2010-06-17 | 2015-12-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Visual previews |
US20160234267A1 (en) * | 2015-02-06 | 2016-08-11 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Sharing digital content using an interactive send service system |
US9424579B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2016-08-23 | Fmr Llc | System for group supervision |
US9443369B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2016-09-13 | Arthur J. Zito, Jr. | User-specific dispensing system |
US20160277459A1 (en) * | 2013-06-04 | 2016-09-22 | Dropbox, Inc. | System and method for group participation in a digital media presentation |
US20160283060A1 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2016-09-29 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Aggregated, interactive communication timeline |
US9645724B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2017-05-09 | Facebook, Inc. | Timeline based content organization |
US9658820B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-05-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Resuming synchronous playback of content |
US9729115B2 (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2017-08-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Intelligently increasing the sound level of player |
US9749760B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-08-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Updating zone configuration in a multi-zone media system |
US9747710B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2017-08-29 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Method, system, and computer-readable medium for creating and laying out a graphic within an application program |
US9756424B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-09-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel pairing in a media system |
US9766853B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-09-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Pair volume control |
US9773525B2 (en) * | 2007-08-16 | 2017-09-26 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Timeline management |
US9781513B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2017-10-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio output balancing |
US9787550B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2017-10-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Establishing a secure wireless network with a minimum human intervention |
US9794707B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2017-10-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio output balancing |
US9824291B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2017-11-21 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Image analysis based color suggestions |
CN107463338A (en) * | 2017-08-15 | 2017-12-12 | 郑州云海信息技术有限公司 | A kind for the treatment of method and apparatus of logical volume |
US20180121084A1 (en) * | 2016-10-28 | 2018-05-03 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Information display device |
US9977561B2 (en) | 2004-04-01 | 2018-05-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems, methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture to provide guest access |
US9980005B2 (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2018-05-22 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | System and/or method for distributing media content |
US9997196B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2018-06-12 | Apple Inc. | Retiming media presentations |
US10002354B2 (en) | 2003-06-26 | 2018-06-19 | Paypal, Inc. | Multi currency exchanges between participants |
US10025464B1 (en) * | 2013-10-07 | 2018-07-17 | Google Llc | System and method for highlighting dependent slides while editing master slides of a presentation |
US20180239142A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2018-08-23 | Shenzhen Royole Technologies Co. Ltd. | Head-mounted display device and control method thereof |
CN108536431A (en) * | 2018-04-04 | 2018-09-14 | 浙江小泰科技有限公司 | A kind of global command's row creates front end project approach and system |
US10084611B2 (en) * | 2012-06-29 | 2018-09-25 | Siemens Schweiz Ag | Programmable symbol animation pre-processor for building automation graphics |
US10091291B2 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2018-10-02 | SpeakWorks, Inc. | Synchronizing a source, response and comment presentation |
US10114451B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2018-10-30 | Fmr Llc | Augmented reality in a virtual tour through a financial portfolio |
US20190122700A1 (en) * | 2004-12-02 | 2019-04-25 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US10282075B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2019-05-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Automatic presentation of slide design suggestions |
US10282391B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2019-05-07 | Ebay Inc. | Position editing tool of collage multi-media |
US10297061B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2019-05-21 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Maintaining graphical presentations based on user customizations |
US10303418B2 (en) | 2013-11-08 | 2019-05-28 | Dropbox, Inc. | Content item presentation system |
US10306364B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2019-05-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio processing adjustments for playback devices based on determined characteristics of audio content |
US10324605B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2019-06-18 | Apple Inc. | Media-editing application with novel editing tools |
US10346459B1 (en) * | 2015-02-17 | 2019-07-09 | Humanlearning Ltd. | Capture and annotation of segmented content representing insights |
US10359987B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-07-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
EP3518168A1 (en) | 2013-03-06 | 2019-07-31 | Arthur J. Zito, Jr. | Multi-media presentation system |
US10372790B2 (en) * | 2013-06-27 | 2019-08-06 | Plotagon Ab Corporation | System, method and apparatus for generating hand gesture animation determined on dialogue length and emotion |
US10528547B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2020-01-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Transferring files |
US10534748B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2020-01-14 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Content file suggestions |
US10542121B2 (en) | 2006-08-23 | 2020-01-21 | Ebay Inc. | Dynamic configuration of multi-platform applications |
US10573038B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2020-02-25 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Editing the text of an arbitrary graphic via a hierarchical list |
US10613817B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-04-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for displaying a list of tracks scheduled for playback by a synchrony group |
US10665267B2 (en) | 2017-03-01 | 2020-05-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Correlation of recorded video presentations and associated slides |
US10915946B2 (en) | 2002-06-10 | 2021-02-09 | Ebay Inc. | System, method, and medium for propagating a plurality of listings to geographically targeted websites using a single data source |
US10943127B2 (en) * | 2018-06-01 | 2021-03-09 | StageClip Limited | Media processing |
US10956660B2 (en) | 2006-02-09 | 2021-03-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Automatically converting text to business graphics |
US11023121B2 (en) * | 2017-06-05 | 2021-06-01 | 9224-5489 Quebec Inc. | Method of transversally aligning information elements along axes |
US11044504B2 (en) | 2019-06-14 | 2021-06-22 | A&E Television Networks | Intellectual property rights management software systems for video content and methods of their manufacture and use |
US11106425B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US11106424B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US11157545B2 (en) * | 2016-04-15 | 2021-10-26 | Grass Valley Limited | Media file systems and methods of storing media files in a media file system |
CN113760828A (en) * | 2021-08-04 | 2021-12-07 | 广东能龙教育股份有限公司 | Courseware development processing method, control platform, control device and storage medium |
US11265652B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2022-03-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US11294618B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2022-04-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Media player system |
US11354022B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2022-06-07 | Ebay Inc. | Multi-directional and variable speed navigation of collage multi-media |
US11403062B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2022-08-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple groupings in a playback system |
US11409957B2 (en) * | 2013-05-07 | 2022-08-09 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Variable dimension version editing for graphical designs |
US11429343B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2022-08-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Stereo playback configuration and control |
US11449664B1 (en) * | 2019-07-01 | 2022-09-20 | Instasize, Inc. | Template for creating content item |
US11481182B2 (en) | 2016-10-17 | 2022-10-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Room association based on name |
US11550988B2 (en) | 2018-08-21 | 2023-01-10 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Multi-view masters for graphical designs |
US11645047B2 (en) | 2019-09-13 | 2023-05-09 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Focused specification generation for interactive designs |
US11650784B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-05-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US11676316B1 (en) | 2019-07-01 | 2023-06-13 | Instasize, Inc. | Shareable settings for modifying images |
US11710364B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2023-07-25 | Zito Llc | User-specific dispensing system |
US11747972B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2023-09-05 | Apple Inc. | Media-editing application with novel editing tools |
US11762531B2 (en) | 2020-10-28 | 2023-09-19 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Stateful widget container management for interactive designs |
US11894975B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2024-02-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US11995374B2 (en) | 2016-01-05 | 2024-05-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple-device setup |
US12155527B2 (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2024-11-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback devices and bonded zones |
US12159026B2 (en) * | 2020-06-16 | 2024-12-03 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Audio associations for interactive media event triggering |
US12167216B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2024-12-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
Families Citing this family (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
GB0421016D0 (en) * | 2004-09-22 | 2004-10-20 | Kg Interactive Ltd | Dynamic media editing tool |
US7336280B2 (en) | 2004-11-18 | 2008-02-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Coordinating animations and media in computer display output |
WO2006077535A1 (en) | 2005-01-20 | 2006-07-27 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Multimedia presentation creation |
WO2006113421A2 (en) | 2005-04-13 | 2006-10-26 | Impact Engine, Inc. | Multimedia communication system and method |
WO2007043829A1 (en) * | 2005-10-13 | 2007-04-19 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding |
US8271552B2 (en) | 2005-10-13 | 2012-09-18 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding |
FR2940481B1 (en) * | 2008-12-23 | 2011-07-29 | Thales Sa | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR EDITING ENRICHED MEDIA |
US10162506B2 (en) | 2014-07-18 | 2018-12-25 | Apple Inc. | Systems and methods for selecting portions of media for a preview |
EP3142025B1 (en) * | 2015-09-09 | 2018-06-20 | Accenture Global Services Limited | Generating and distributing interactive documents |
PT110253A (en) * | 2017-08-14 | 2019-02-14 | Francisco Jose Da Ponte Martins | DIGITAL PROCESS OF COMPANIES / BRANDS / SOFTWARE APPLICATION SUBMITTED IN MEMORY OF THE SYSTEM, INSERTED IN THE OPERATING SYSTEM AND INSERTED IN THE OPERATIVE SYSTEM PROGRAM BAR. |
Citations (49)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4899330A (en) * | 1987-09-16 | 1990-02-06 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Adaptor for mini CD |
US5328842A (en) * | 1991-04-17 | 1994-07-12 | Eli Lilly And Company | Compounds, vectors and methods for expressing human, cytosolic phospholipase A2 |
US5331584A (en) * | 1991-12-27 | 1994-07-19 | Nec Corporation | Discrete cosine transformation processor |
US5357453A (en) * | 1992-12-30 | 1994-10-18 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Discrete cosine transform circuit |
US5515490A (en) * | 1993-11-05 | 1996-05-07 | Xerox Corporation | Method and system for temporally formatting data presentation in time-dependent documents |
US5613909A (en) * | 1994-07-21 | 1997-03-25 | Stelovsky; Jan | Time-segmented multimedia game playing and authoring system |
US5659793A (en) * | 1994-12-22 | 1997-08-19 | Bell Atlantic Video Services, Inc. | Authoring tools for multimedia application development and network delivery |
US5675752A (en) * | 1994-09-15 | 1997-10-07 | Sony Corporation | Interactive applications generator for an interactive presentation environment |
US5776903A (en) * | 1995-02-06 | 1998-07-07 | Commissariat A L'energie Atomique | Peptide derivatives usable as zinc endopeptidase 24-15 inhibitors |
US5849560A (en) * | 1990-08-17 | 1998-12-15 | Trustees Of Boston University | Proteases causing degradation of amyloid β-protein precursor |
US6072480A (en) * | 1997-11-05 | 2000-06-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for controlling composition and performance of soundtracks to accompany a slide show |
US6245884B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2001-06-12 | Vivian Y. H. Hook | Secretases related to alzheimer's dementia |
US20010033296A1 (en) * | 2000-01-21 | 2001-10-25 | Fullerton Nathan W. | Method and apparatus for delivery and presentation of data |
US6313268B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2001-11-06 | Vivian Y. H. Hook | Secretases related to Alzheimer's dementia |
US6317141B1 (en) * | 1998-12-31 | 2001-11-13 | Flashpoint Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for editing heterogeneous media objects in a digital imaging device |
US20010050681A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2001-12-13 | I-Media World.Com | Method and system for creating and delivering electronic, multi-media presentations |
US20020052976A1 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2002-05-02 | Jochen Loesch | Method for generating multimedia projects |
US20020062403A1 (en) * | 2000-11-17 | 2002-05-23 | Burnett Jack T. | Method and system for creation of virtual events |
US20020109712A1 (en) * | 2001-01-16 | 2002-08-15 | Yacovone Mark E. | Method of and system for composing, delivering, viewing and managing audio-visual presentations over a communications network |
US20020140719A1 (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2002-10-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Video and multimedia browsing while switching between views |
US6473096B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2002-10-29 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Device and method for generating scenario suitable for use as presentation materials |
US6484189B1 (en) * | 1991-04-26 | 2002-11-19 | Amiga Development Llc | Methods and apparatus for a multimedia authoring and presentation system |
US20020180803A1 (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2002-12-05 | Smartdisk Corporation | Systems, methods and computer program products for managing multimedia content |
US6515656B1 (en) * | 1999-04-14 | 2003-02-04 | Verizon Laboratories Inc. | Synchronized spatial-temporal browsing of images for assessment of content |
US6544294B1 (en) * | 1999-05-27 | 2003-04-08 | Write Brothers, Inc. | Method and apparatus for creating, editing, and displaying works containing presentation metric components utilizing temporal relationships and structural tracks |
US6560281B1 (en) * | 1998-02-24 | 2003-05-06 | Xerox Corporation | Method and apparatus for generating a condensed version of a video sequence including desired affordances |
US20030088613A1 (en) * | 1996-08-22 | 2003-05-08 | Goldschmidt Lki Jean M. | Method and apparatus for providing personalized supplemental programming |
US20030090507A1 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2003-05-15 | Mark Randall | System and method for script based event timing |
US6577324B1 (en) * | 1992-06-03 | 2003-06-10 | Compaq Information Technologies Group, L.P. | Video and audio multimedia pop-up documentation by performing selected functions on selected topics |
US20030170006A1 (en) * | 2002-03-08 | 2003-09-11 | Bogda Peter B. | Versatile video player |
US6636238B1 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2003-10-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for linking an audio stream with accompanying text material |
US20030203342A1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2003-10-30 | Prometric, Inc. | Method and system for computer based testing using customizable templates |
US20040014013A1 (en) * | 2001-11-01 | 2004-01-22 | Telecommunications Research Associates | Interface for a presentation system |
US20040177096A1 (en) * | 2000-01-24 | 2004-09-09 | Aviv Eyal | Streaming media search system |
USRE38609E1 (en) * | 2000-02-28 | 2004-10-05 | Webex Communications, Inc. | On-demand presentation graphical user interface |
US20040201610A1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2004-10-14 | Rosen Robert E. | Video player and authoring tool for presentions with tangential content |
US6834371B1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2004-12-21 | Interactive Video Technologies, Inc. | System and method for controlling synchronization of a time-based presentation and its associated assets |
US20040268224A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2004-12-30 | Balkus Peter A. | Authoring system for combining temporal and nontemporal digital media |
US6912327B1 (en) * | 1999-01-28 | 2005-06-28 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Imagine information describing method, video retrieval method, video reproducing method, and video reproducing apparatus |
US6973483B2 (en) * | 2000-09-30 | 2005-12-06 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for using dynamic web components to automatically customize web pages |
US6996780B2 (en) * | 2000-12-29 | 2006-02-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for creating a place type to be used as a template for other places |
US20060031147A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2006-02-09 | Softad Group, Inc. | Modular e-commerce web site development system |
US7046258B1 (en) * | 1998-05-28 | 2006-05-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display and control of permitted data processing based on control information extracted from the data |
US7103842B2 (en) * | 2000-09-07 | 2006-09-05 | Sony Corporation | System, method and program for handling temporally related presentation data |
US7102643B2 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2006-09-05 | Vibe Solutions Group, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling the visual presentation of data |
US7117429B2 (en) * | 2002-06-12 | 2006-10-03 | Oracle International Corporation | Methods and systems for managing styles electronic documents |
US7155676B2 (en) * | 2000-12-19 | 2006-12-26 | Coolernet | System and method for multimedia authoring and playback |
US20070055939A1 (en) * | 1999-11-30 | 2007-03-08 | Furlong Tarri E | Methods and apparatus for automatically generating presentations |
US7325199B1 (en) * | 2000-10-04 | 2008-01-29 | Apple Inc. | Integrated time line for editing |
Family Cites Families (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AU1598201A (en) * | 1999-11-12 | 2001-06-06 | Intercontinental Travel Services, Inc. | System for automated multimedia presentation utilizing presentation templates |
-
2002
- 2002-06-26 US US10/183,830 patent/US20040001106A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2003
- 2003-06-25 EP EP03014309A patent/EP1376406A3/en not_active Withdrawn
Patent Citations (50)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4899330A (en) * | 1987-09-16 | 1990-02-06 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Adaptor for mini CD |
US5849560A (en) * | 1990-08-17 | 1998-12-15 | Trustees Of Boston University | Proteases causing degradation of amyloid β-protein precursor |
US5328842A (en) * | 1991-04-17 | 1994-07-12 | Eli Lilly And Company | Compounds, vectors and methods for expressing human, cytosolic phospholipase A2 |
US6484189B1 (en) * | 1991-04-26 | 2002-11-19 | Amiga Development Llc | Methods and apparatus for a multimedia authoring and presentation system |
US5331584A (en) * | 1991-12-27 | 1994-07-19 | Nec Corporation | Discrete cosine transformation processor |
US6577324B1 (en) * | 1992-06-03 | 2003-06-10 | Compaq Information Technologies Group, L.P. | Video and audio multimedia pop-up documentation by performing selected functions on selected topics |
US5357453A (en) * | 1992-12-30 | 1994-10-18 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Discrete cosine transform circuit |
US5515490A (en) * | 1993-11-05 | 1996-05-07 | Xerox Corporation | Method and system for temporally formatting data presentation in time-dependent documents |
US5613909A (en) * | 1994-07-21 | 1997-03-25 | Stelovsky; Jan | Time-segmented multimedia game playing and authoring system |
US5675752A (en) * | 1994-09-15 | 1997-10-07 | Sony Corporation | Interactive applications generator for an interactive presentation environment |
US5659793A (en) * | 1994-12-22 | 1997-08-19 | Bell Atlantic Video Services, Inc. | Authoring tools for multimedia application development and network delivery |
US5776903A (en) * | 1995-02-06 | 1998-07-07 | Commissariat A L'energie Atomique | Peptide derivatives usable as zinc endopeptidase 24-15 inhibitors |
US20030088613A1 (en) * | 1996-08-22 | 2003-05-08 | Goldschmidt Lki Jean M. | Method and apparatus for providing personalized supplemental programming |
US6072480A (en) * | 1997-11-05 | 2000-06-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for controlling composition and performance of soundtracks to accompany a slide show |
US6560281B1 (en) * | 1998-02-24 | 2003-05-06 | Xerox Corporation | Method and apparatus for generating a condensed version of a video sequence including desired affordances |
US7046258B1 (en) * | 1998-05-28 | 2006-05-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display and control of permitted data processing based on control information extracted from the data |
US6313268B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2001-11-06 | Vivian Y. H. Hook | Secretases related to Alzheimer's dementia |
US6245884B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2001-06-12 | Vivian Y. H. Hook | Secretases related to alzheimer's dementia |
US6473096B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2002-10-29 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Device and method for generating scenario suitable for use as presentation materials |
US6317141B1 (en) * | 1998-12-31 | 2001-11-13 | Flashpoint Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for editing heterogeneous media objects in a digital imaging device |
US6912327B1 (en) * | 1999-01-28 | 2005-06-28 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Imagine information describing method, video retrieval method, video reproducing method, and video reproducing apparatus |
US6515656B1 (en) * | 1999-04-14 | 2003-02-04 | Verizon Laboratories Inc. | Synchronized spatial-temporal browsing of images for assessment of content |
US6636238B1 (en) * | 1999-04-20 | 2003-10-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for linking an audio stream with accompanying text material |
US6544294B1 (en) * | 1999-05-27 | 2003-04-08 | Write Brothers, Inc. | Method and apparatus for creating, editing, and displaying works containing presentation metric components utilizing temporal relationships and structural tracks |
US20070055939A1 (en) * | 1999-11-30 | 2007-03-08 | Furlong Tarri E | Methods and apparatus for automatically generating presentations |
US20010033296A1 (en) * | 2000-01-21 | 2001-10-25 | Fullerton Nathan W. | Method and apparatus for delivery and presentation of data |
US20040177096A1 (en) * | 2000-01-24 | 2004-09-09 | Aviv Eyal | Streaming media search system |
USRE38609E1 (en) * | 2000-02-28 | 2004-10-05 | Webex Communications, Inc. | On-demand presentation graphical user interface |
US20010050681A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2001-12-13 | I-Media World.Com | Method and system for creating and delivering electronic, multi-media presentations |
US20040268224A1 (en) * | 2000-03-31 | 2004-12-30 | Balkus Peter A. | Authoring system for combining temporal and nontemporal digital media |
US6834371B1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2004-12-21 | Interactive Video Technologies, Inc. | System and method for controlling synchronization of a time-based presentation and its associated assets |
US20060031147A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2006-02-09 | Softad Group, Inc. | Modular e-commerce web site development system |
US7103842B2 (en) * | 2000-09-07 | 2006-09-05 | Sony Corporation | System, method and program for handling temporally related presentation data |
US6973483B2 (en) * | 2000-09-30 | 2005-12-06 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for using dynamic web components to automatically customize web pages |
US7325199B1 (en) * | 2000-10-04 | 2008-01-29 | Apple Inc. | Integrated time line for editing |
US20020052976A1 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2002-05-02 | Jochen Loesch | Method for generating multimedia projects |
US20020062403A1 (en) * | 2000-11-17 | 2002-05-23 | Burnett Jack T. | Method and system for creation of virtual events |
US7155676B2 (en) * | 2000-12-19 | 2006-12-26 | Coolernet | System and method for multimedia authoring and playback |
US6996780B2 (en) * | 2000-12-29 | 2006-02-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for creating a place type to be used as a template for other places |
US20020109712A1 (en) * | 2001-01-16 | 2002-08-15 | Yacovone Mark E. | Method of and system for composing, delivering, viewing and managing audio-visual presentations over a communications network |
US6907570B2 (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2005-06-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Video and multimedia browsing while switching between views |
US20020180803A1 (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2002-12-05 | Smartdisk Corporation | Systems, methods and computer program products for managing multimedia content |
US20020140719A1 (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2002-10-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Video and multimedia browsing while switching between views |
US20040014013A1 (en) * | 2001-11-01 | 2004-01-22 | Telecommunications Research Associates | Interface for a presentation system |
US20030090507A1 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2003-05-15 | Mark Randall | System and method for script based event timing |
US7102643B2 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2006-09-05 | Vibe Solutions Group, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling the visual presentation of data |
US20030203342A1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2003-10-30 | Prometric, Inc. | Method and system for computer based testing using customizable templates |
US20040201610A1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2004-10-14 | Rosen Robert E. | Video player and authoring tool for presentions with tangential content |
US20030170006A1 (en) * | 2002-03-08 | 2003-09-11 | Bogda Peter B. | Versatile video player |
US7117429B2 (en) * | 2002-06-12 | 2006-10-03 | Oracle International Corporation | Methods and systems for managing styles electronic documents |
Cited By (655)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8732037B2 (en) | 2000-10-16 | 2014-05-20 | Ebay Inc. | Method and system for providing a record |
US20070055944A1 (en) * | 2001-06-18 | 2007-03-08 | Faud Rashid | Configuration of displays for targeted user communities |
US10372811B2 (en) * | 2001-06-18 | 2019-08-06 | Oracle America, Inc. | Configuration of displays for targeted user communities |
US8639829B2 (en) | 2001-10-11 | 2014-01-28 | Ebay Inc. | System and method to facilitate translation of communications between entities over a network |
US9514128B2 (en) | 2001-10-11 | 2016-12-06 | Ebay Inc. | System and method to facilitate translation of communications between entities over a network |
US20100228536A1 (en) * | 2001-10-11 | 2010-09-09 | Steve Grove | System and method to facilitate translation of communications between entities over a network |
US10606960B2 (en) | 2001-10-11 | 2020-03-31 | Ebay Inc. | System and method to facilitate translation of communications between entities over a network |
US20040078297A1 (en) * | 2002-06-10 | 2004-04-22 | Veres Robert Dean | Method and system for customizing a network-based transaction facility seller application |
US10915946B2 (en) | 2002-06-10 | 2021-02-09 | Ebay Inc. | System, method, and medium for propagating a plurality of listings to geographically targeted websites using a single data source |
US8719041B2 (en) | 2002-06-10 | 2014-05-06 | Ebay Inc. | Method and system for customizing a network-based transaction facility seller application |
US7356762B2 (en) | 2002-07-08 | 2008-04-08 | Asm International Nv | Method for the automatic generation of an interactive electronic equipment documentation package |
US20040004636A1 (en) * | 2002-07-08 | 2004-01-08 | Asm International Nv | Method for the automatic generation of an interactive electronic equipment documentation package |
US7197517B2 (en) * | 2002-09-25 | 2007-03-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Systems, methods, and computer program products to display and select hierarchical database segments and fields |
US20040059755A1 (en) * | 2002-09-25 | 2004-03-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Systems, methods, and computer program products to display and select hierarchical database segments and fields |
US20040071453A1 (en) * | 2002-10-08 | 2004-04-15 | Valderas Harold M. | Method and system for producing interactive DVD video slides |
US20100114846A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2010-05-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US8886685B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2014-11-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Navigating media content by groups |
US20060026634A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2006-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Creating standardized playlists and maintaining coherency |
US7647297B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2010-01-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US20060026376A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2006-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Retrieving graphics from slow retrieval storage devices |
US7668842B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2010-02-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Playlist structure for large playlists |
US20040078382A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2004-04-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Adaptive menu system for media players |
US7680814B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2010-03-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Navigating media content by groups |
US8738615B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2014-05-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US7707231B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2010-04-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Creating standardized playlists and maintaining coherency |
US20110173163A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2011-07-14 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US20100114986A1 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2010-05-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Navigating media content by groups |
US7991803B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2011-08-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Navigating media content by groups |
US7136874B2 (en) * | 2002-10-16 | 2006-11-14 | Microsoft Corporation | Adaptive menu system for media players |
US8935242B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2015-01-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US7043477B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2006-05-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Navigating media content via groups within a playlist |
US7054888B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2006-05-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Optimizing media player memory during rendering |
US7590659B2 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2009-09-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Adaptive menu system for media players |
US8098730B2 (en) | 2002-11-01 | 2012-01-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Generating a motion attention model |
US20110041071A1 (en) * | 2002-12-12 | 2011-02-17 | Tatsuo Sudoh | Multimedia data processing device which can easily prepare multimedia contents |
US20080313544A1 (en) * | 2002-12-12 | 2008-12-18 | Lawrence Charles Kleinman | Programmed apparatus and system for dynamic display of presentation files |
US20040120698A1 (en) * | 2002-12-20 | 2004-06-24 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method of transferring DV metadata to DVD-video data |
US7593915B2 (en) * | 2003-01-07 | 2009-09-22 | Accenture Global Services Gmbh | Customized multi-media services |
US8108369B2 (en) * | 2003-01-07 | 2012-01-31 | Accenture Global Services Limited | Customized multi-media services |
US20040133597A1 (en) * | 2003-01-07 | 2004-07-08 | Fano Andrew E. | Customized multi-media services |
US20100011008A1 (en) * | 2003-01-07 | 2010-01-14 | Accenture Global Services Gmbh | Customized multi-media services |
US20040145611A1 (en) * | 2003-01-16 | 2004-07-29 | Kaoru Ogawa | Method, program, and system for editing contents of multimedia |
US7472344B2 (en) * | 2003-01-21 | 2008-12-30 | Thomson Licensing | Device and method for generating metadata from essence |
US20040153474A1 (en) * | 2003-01-21 | 2004-08-05 | Hui Li | Device and method for generating metadata from essence |
US20040154039A1 (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2004-08-05 | Simms Andrew M. | Global listings format (GLF) for multimedia programming content and electronic program guide (EPG) information |
US7913279B2 (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2011-03-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Global listings format (GLF) for multimedia programming content and electronic program guide (EPG) information |
US20110093608A1 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2011-04-21 | Jason Sumler | System, method, and computer readable medium for creating a video clip |
US8353406B2 (en) | 2003-02-05 | 2013-01-15 | Silver Screen Tele-Reality, Inc. | System, method, and computer readable medium for creating a video clip |
US20080198878A1 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2008-08-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Remote encoder system and method for capturing the live presentation of video multiplexed with images |
US7383344B2 (en) | 2003-02-14 | 2008-06-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Remote encoder system and method for capturing the live presentation of video multiplexed with images |
US20040160992A1 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2004-08-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Remote encoder system and method for capturing the live presentation of video multiplexed with images |
US20070286484A1 (en) * | 2003-02-20 | 2007-12-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and Methods for Enhanced Image Adaptation |
US20040177317A1 (en) * | 2003-03-07 | 2004-09-09 | John Bradstreet | Closed caption navigation |
US7823077B2 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2010-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for user modification of metadata in a shell browser |
US20140040812A1 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2014-02-06 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for user modification of metadata in a shell browser |
US9436351B2 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2016-09-06 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | System and method for user modification of metadata in a shell browser |
US7769794B2 (en) | 2003-03-24 | 2010-08-03 | Microsoft Corporation | User interface for a file system shell |
US20060036568A1 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2006-02-16 | Microsoft Corporation | File system shell |
US7712034B2 (en) | 2003-03-24 | 2010-05-04 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for shell browser |
US7234114B2 (en) | 2003-03-24 | 2007-06-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Extensible object previewer in a shell browser |
US7827561B2 (en) | 2003-03-26 | 2010-11-02 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for public consumption of communication events between arbitrary processes |
US20040215732A1 (en) * | 2003-03-26 | 2004-10-28 | Mckee Timothy P. | Extensible user context system for delivery of notifications |
US7865904B2 (en) | 2003-03-26 | 2011-01-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Extensible user context system for delivery of notifications |
US20050246331A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2005-11-03 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20040193621A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method utilizing virtual folders |
US7536386B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-05-19 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for sharing items in a computer system |
US7526483B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-04-28 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for virtual folder sharing including utilization of static and dynamic lists |
US7512586B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-03-31 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US7587411B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-09-08 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20040193672A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for virtual folder sharing including utilization of static and dynamic lists |
US7499925B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-03-03 | Microsoft Corporation | File system for displaying items of different types and from different physical locations |
US9361313B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2016-06-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20040193594A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | File system for displaying items of different types and from different physical locations |
US9361312B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2016-06-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on metadata |
US20060070007A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2006-03-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Rich drag drop user interface |
US7627552B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2009-12-01 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20100205186A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2010-08-12 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US20040193673A1 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2004-09-30 | Mohammed Samji | System and method for sharing items in a computer system |
US7925682B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2011-04-12 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method utilizing virtual folders |
US7707197B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2010-04-27 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for filtering and organizing items based on common elements |
US7650575B2 (en) | 2003-03-27 | 2010-01-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Rich drag drop user interface |
US20040262410A1 (en) * | 2003-04-11 | 2004-12-30 | Hull Gerry G. | Graphical thermostat and sensor |
US7853890B2 (en) | 2003-04-17 | 2010-12-14 | Microsoft Corporation | Address bar user interface control |
US8209624B2 (en) | 2003-04-17 | 2012-06-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Virtual address bar user interface control |
US20070168886A1 (en) * | 2003-04-17 | 2007-07-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Virtual Address Bar User Interface Control |
US7240292B2 (en) | 2003-04-17 | 2007-07-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Virtual address bar user interface control |
US7409644B2 (en) | 2003-05-16 | 2008-08-05 | Microsoft Corporation | File system shell |
US20070022110A1 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2007-01-25 | Saora Kabushiki Kaisha | Method for processing information, apparatus therefor and program therefor |
US10002354B2 (en) | 2003-06-26 | 2018-06-19 | Paypal, Inc. | Multi currency exchanges between participants |
US20050021590A1 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2005-01-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Resolving a distributed topology to stream data |
US7613767B2 (en) | 2003-07-11 | 2009-11-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Resolving a distributed topology to stream data |
US9727303B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Resuming synchronous playback of content |
US10228902B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-03-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10031715B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-07-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for dynamic master device switching in a synchrony group |
US11080001B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Concurrent transmission and playback of audio information |
US10365884B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-07-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Group volume control |
US10359987B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-07-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US11625221B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-04-11 | Sonos, Inc | Synchronizing playback by media playback devices |
US11556305B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-01-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing playback by media playback devices |
US10387102B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-08-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device grouping |
US11106425B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US10175930B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-01-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for playback by a synchrony group |
US11106424B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-08-31 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US10157035B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-12-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Switching between a directly connected and a networked audio source |
US10324684B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-06-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device synchrony group states |
US11635935B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-04-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US10303431B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-05-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US10216473B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-02-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device synchrony group states |
US10175932B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-01-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining content from direct source and remote source |
US10185541B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-01-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US9658820B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-05-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Resuming synchronous playback of content |
US10185540B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-01-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10613817B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-04-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for displaying a list of tracks scheduled for playback by a synchrony group |
US9727304B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining content from direct source and other source |
US9727302B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining content from remote source for playback |
US9733892B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining content based on control by multiple controllers |
US11132170B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-09-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US9734242B2 (en) * | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems and methods for synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices that independently source digital data |
US9733893B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining and transmitting audio |
US10303432B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-05-28 | Sonos, Inc | Playback device |
US10296283B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-05-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Directing synchronous playback between zone players |
US10289380B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-05-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10282164B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-05-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US9733891B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining content from local and remote sources for playback |
US9740453B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-08-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Obtaining content from multiple remote sources for playback |
US10747496B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-08-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10209953B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-02-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US20140277655A1 (en) * | 2003-07-28 | 2014-09-18 | Sonos, Inc | Systems and methods for synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices that independently source digital data |
US10445054B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2019-10-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for switching between a directly connected and a networked audio source |
US11200025B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-12-14 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US9778897B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-10-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Ceasing playback among a plurality of playback devices |
US11650784B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-05-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US9778900B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-10-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Causing a device to join a synchrony group |
US10970034B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-04-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio distributor selection |
US11550536B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-01-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Adjusting volume levels |
US10545723B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-01-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US11294618B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2022-04-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Media player system |
US10963215B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-03-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Media playback device and system |
US11550539B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2023-01-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10956119B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-03-23 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US11301207B1 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2022-04-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10949163B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2021-03-16 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device |
US10754613B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-08-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio master selection |
US10120638B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-11-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Synchronizing operations among a plurality of independently clocked digital data processing devices |
US9778898B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2017-10-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Resynchronization of playback devices |
US10157034B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-12-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Clock rate adjustment in a multi-zone system |
US10157033B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-12-18 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for switching between a directly connected and a networked audio source |
US10146498B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-12-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Disengaging and engaging zone players |
US10140085B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-11-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device operating states |
US10133536B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2018-11-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Method and apparatus for adjusting volume in a synchrony group |
US10754612B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2020-08-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device volume control |
US20050028107A1 (en) * | 2003-07-30 | 2005-02-03 | Gomes Luis M. | Editable data tooltips |
US8281242B2 (en) * | 2003-07-30 | 2012-10-02 | National Instruments Corporation | Editable data tooltips |
US20050050015A1 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2005-03-03 | Dirk Becker | Generic iViews |
US20050071764A1 (en) * | 2003-09-28 | 2005-03-31 | Denny Jaeger | Method for creating a collection of multimedia interactive graphic elements using arrow logic |
US20050076002A1 (en) * | 2003-10-06 | 2005-04-07 | Patrick Williams | Parameter assistant for automatically specifying parameter values for a software program |
US8392879B2 (en) | 2003-10-06 | 2013-03-05 | National Instruments Corporation | Parameter assistant for automatically specifying parameter values for a software program |
US7979886B2 (en) * | 2003-10-17 | 2011-07-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Container format for multimedia presentations |
US8555329B2 (en) | 2003-10-17 | 2013-10-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Container format for multimedia presentations |
US7644446B2 (en) | 2003-10-23 | 2010-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Encryption and data-protection for content on portable medium |
US7181463B2 (en) | 2003-10-24 | 2007-02-20 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for managing data using static lists |
US7711754B2 (en) | 2003-10-24 | 2010-05-04 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for managing data using static lists |
US8650596B2 (en) | 2003-11-03 | 2014-02-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Multi-axis television navigation |
US20050125734A1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2005-06-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Media processing methods, systems and application program interfaces |
US7733962B2 (en) | 2003-12-08 | 2010-06-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Reconstructed frame caching |
US20060184684A1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2006-08-17 | Weiss Rebecca C | Reconstructed frame caching |
US7900140B2 (en) | 2003-12-08 | 2011-03-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Media processing methods, systems and application program interfaces |
US20050204289A1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2005-09-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Media processing methods, systems and application program interfaces |
US7712108B2 (en) | 2003-12-08 | 2010-05-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Media processing methods, systems and application program interfaces |
US7818658B2 (en) * | 2003-12-09 | 2010-10-19 | Yi-Chih Chen | Multimedia presentation system |
US20060277454A1 (en) * | 2003-12-09 | 2006-12-07 | Yi-Chih Chen | Multimedia presentation system |
US7735096B2 (en) | 2003-12-11 | 2010-06-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Destination application program interfaces |
US20050132168A1 (en) * | 2003-12-11 | 2005-06-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Destination application program interfaces |
US20090228876A1 (en) * | 2003-12-25 | 2009-09-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronic, N.V. | Method and apparatus for processing multi-media script |
US20050154995A1 (en) * | 2004-01-08 | 2005-07-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Intelligent agenda object for showing contextual location within a presentation application |
US20090300501A1 (en) * | 2004-01-08 | 2009-12-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Intelligent agenda object for a presentation application |
US7620896B2 (en) * | 2004-01-08 | 2009-11-17 | International Business Machines Corporation | Intelligent agenda object for showing contextual location within a presentation application |
US7930637B2 (en) | 2004-01-08 | 2011-04-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Intelligent agenda object for a presentation application |
US7703017B2 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2010-04-20 | Pioneer Corporation | Program display method, program display apparatus, and program delivery and display system |
US20050151756A1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-07-14 | Pioneer Corporation | Information delivery display system and information delivery display method |
US20050166142A1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-07-28 | Pioneer Corporation | Information display method, information display device, and information delivery and display system |
US20050198678A1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-09-08 | Pioneer Corporation | Control information file creating device, information display device, control information file creation method, and information distribution display system |
US7277959B2 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2007-10-02 | Pioneer Corporation | Information delivery display system and information delivery display method |
US20050160368A1 (en) * | 2004-01-21 | 2005-07-21 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Systems and methods for authoring a media presentation |
US7434153B2 (en) * | 2004-01-21 | 2008-10-07 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Systems and methods for authoring a media presentation |
US20090172556A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2009-07-02 | Malmstrom R Dean | Change-alarmed, integrated console apparatus and method |
US20050174364A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2005-08-11 | Malmstrom R. D. | Computer presentation and command integration apparatus |
US20080174604A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2008-07-24 | Portalis Lc | Subsystem, shared-control apparatus and method |
US7353458B2 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2008-04-01 | Portalis, Lc | Computer presentation and command integration method |
US7779361B2 (en) | 2004-02-09 | 2010-08-17 | Malmstrom R Dean | Change-alarmed, integrated console apparatus and method |
US7496846B2 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2009-02-24 | Portalis, Lc | Computer presentation and command integration apparatus |
US7770131B2 (en) | 2004-02-09 | 2010-08-03 | Malmstrom R Dean | Subsystem, shared-control apparatus and method |
US20050174365A1 (en) * | 2004-02-09 | 2005-08-11 | Malmstrom R. D. | Computer presentation and command integration method |
US20050181348A1 (en) * | 2004-02-17 | 2005-08-18 | Carey Tadhg M. | E-learning system and method |
US7941739B1 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2011-05-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Timeline source |
US7546286B2 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2009-06-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Offline multi-table data editing and storage |
US20060095447A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2006-05-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Offline multi-table data editing and storage |
US20060161533A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2006-07-20 | Microsoft Corporation | Data source task pane |
US7934159B1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2011-04-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Media timeline |
US7546291B2 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2009-06-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Data source task pane |
US7664882B2 (en) | 2004-02-21 | 2010-02-16 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for accessing multimedia content |
US20050188413A1 (en) * | 2004-02-21 | 2005-08-25 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for accessing multimedia content |
US7609653B2 (en) | 2004-03-08 | 2009-10-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Resolving partial media topologies |
US7577940B2 (en) | 2004-03-08 | 2009-08-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Managing topology changes in media applications |
US20050195752A1 (en) * | 2004-03-08 | 2005-09-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Resolving partial media topologies |
US20050198623A1 (en) * | 2004-03-08 | 2005-09-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Managing topology changes in media applications |
US20050210389A1 (en) * | 2004-03-17 | 2005-09-22 | Targit A/S | Hyper related OLAP |
US8468444B2 (en) | 2004-03-17 | 2013-06-18 | Targit A/S | Hyper related OLAP |
US11467799B2 (en) | 2004-04-01 | 2022-10-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Guest access to a media playback system |
US10983750B2 (en) | 2004-04-01 | 2021-04-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Guest access to a media playback system |
US9977561B2 (en) | 2004-04-01 | 2018-05-22 | Sonos, Inc. | Systems, methods, apparatus, and articles of manufacture to provide guest access |
US11907610B2 (en) | 2004-04-01 | 2024-02-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Guess access to a media playback system |
US20050262254A1 (en) * | 2004-04-20 | 2005-11-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic redirection of streaming media between computing devices |
US7669206B2 (en) | 2004-04-20 | 2010-02-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic redirection of streaming media between computing devices |
US7657846B2 (en) | 2004-04-23 | 2010-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for displaying stack icons |
US20050240392A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-10-27 | Munro W B Jr | Method and system to display and search in a language independent manner |
US20050283742A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-12-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Stack icons representing multiple objects |
US7694236B2 (en) | 2004-04-23 | 2010-04-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Stack icons representing multiple objects |
US9189568B2 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2015-11-17 | Ebay Inc. | Method and system to display and search in a language independent manner |
US10068274B2 (en) | 2004-04-23 | 2018-09-04 | Ebay Inc. | Method and system to display and search in a language independent manner |
US7992103B2 (en) | 2004-04-26 | 2011-08-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Scaling icons for representing files |
US8707209B2 (en) | 2004-04-29 | 2014-04-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Save preview representation of files being created |
US20090055428A1 (en) * | 2004-04-29 | 2009-02-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Metadata editing control |
US8972342B2 (en) | 2004-04-29 | 2015-03-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Metadata editing control |
US20060004873A1 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2006-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Carousel control for metadata navigation and assignment |
US8108430B2 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2012-01-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Carousel control for metadata navigation and assignment |
US7496583B2 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2009-02-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Property tree for metadata navigation and assignment |
US8024335B2 (en) | 2004-05-03 | 2011-09-20 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for dynamically generating a selectable search extension |
US20050251731A1 (en) * | 2004-05-03 | 2005-11-10 | Valderas Harold M | Video slide based presentations |
US12224898B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2025-02-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Wireless device connection |
US11909588B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2024-02-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Wireless device connection |
US9960969B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2018-05-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US10979310B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2021-04-13 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US10439896B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2019-10-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US11456928B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2022-09-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US10097423B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2018-10-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Establishing a secure wireless network with minimum human intervention |
US9787550B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2017-10-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Establishing a secure wireless network with a minimum human intervention |
US10541883B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2020-01-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US11894975B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2024-02-06 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US10965545B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2021-03-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US9866447B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2018-01-09 | Sonos, Inc. | Indicator on a network device |
US11025509B2 (en) | 2004-06-05 | 2021-06-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device connection |
US20080163086A1 (en) * | 2004-06-18 | 2008-07-03 | Eral Foxenland | Method and Apparatus For Transitions in a User Interface |
US20050283723A1 (en) * | 2004-06-22 | 2005-12-22 | Rex Fish | Electronic reference system |
US20060001672A1 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2006-01-05 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Searchable registers |
US20060005120A1 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2006-01-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Aligned behavior in templated lists |
US7472347B2 (en) | 2004-06-30 | 2008-12-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Aligned behavior in templated lists |
AU2005201993B2 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2010-08-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Aligned behavior in templated lists |
US7707519B2 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2010-04-27 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Searchable registers |
US9053754B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2015-06-09 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Thumbnail generation and presentation for recorded TV programs |
US9355684B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2016-05-31 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Thumbnail generation and presentation for recorded TV programs |
US7986372B2 (en) | 2004-08-02 | 2011-07-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for smart media content thumbnail extraction |
US20060026524A1 (en) * | 2004-08-02 | 2006-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for smart media content thumbnail extraction |
US7761859B2 (en) | 2004-08-13 | 2010-07-20 | National Instruments Corporation | Application development environment with features for aiding a user in writing function calls |
US7587679B1 (en) * | 2004-08-25 | 2009-09-08 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | System and method for displaying elements using a single tab |
US8539379B2 (en) | 2004-08-25 | 2013-09-17 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | System and method for generating presentations |
US8024672B1 (en) * | 2004-08-25 | 2011-09-20 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | System and method for generating presentations |
US20060069797A1 (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2006-03-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for multimedia remoting over terminal server connections |
US7590750B2 (en) | 2004-09-10 | 2009-09-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for multimedia remoting over terminal server connections |
US7698645B2 (en) * | 2004-09-30 | 2010-04-13 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Presentation slide contents processor for categorizing presentation slides and method for processing and categorizing slide contents |
US10297061B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2019-05-21 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Maintaining graphical presentations based on user customizations |
US10319125B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2019-06-11 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Method, system, and computer-readable medium for creating and laying out a graphic within an application program |
US9747710B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2017-08-29 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Method, system, and computer-readable medium for creating and laying out a graphic within an application program |
US10573038B2 (en) | 2004-09-30 | 2020-02-25 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Editing the text of an arbitrary graphic via a hierarchical list |
US20060067578A1 (en) * | 2004-09-30 | 2006-03-30 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Slide contents processor, slide contents processing method, and storage medium storing program |
US20060093309A1 (en) * | 2004-10-05 | 2006-05-04 | Magix Ag | System and method for creating a photo movie |
US7903119B2 (en) * | 2004-10-29 | 2011-03-08 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Compression of image regions according to graphics command type |
US20060093230A1 (en) * | 2004-10-29 | 2006-05-04 | Hochmuth Roland M | Compression of image regions according to graphics command type |
US9443369B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2016-09-13 | Arthur J. Zito, Jr. | User-specific dispensing system |
US11710364B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2023-07-25 | Zito Llc | User-specific dispensing system |
US11127239B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2021-09-21 | Zito Llc | User-specific dispensing system |
US10867461B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2020-12-15 | Zito Llc | User-specific dispensing system |
US20060129977A1 (en) * | 2004-12-01 | 2006-06-15 | Segar Andrew P | Data editor |
US12198733B2 (en) | 2004-12-02 | 2025-01-14 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US11468916B2 (en) | 2004-12-02 | 2022-10-11 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US20190122700A1 (en) * | 2004-12-02 | 2019-04-25 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US11929101B2 (en) | 2004-12-02 | 2024-03-12 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US11783863B2 (en) | 2004-12-02 | 2023-10-10 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US11017815B2 (en) | 2004-12-02 | 2021-05-25 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US10679674B2 (en) * | 2004-12-02 | 2020-06-09 | Maxell, Ltd. | Editing method and recording and reproducing device |
US20090271432A1 (en) * | 2004-12-27 | 2009-10-29 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Template-based development of servers |
US8060542B2 (en) * | 2004-12-27 | 2011-11-15 | Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. | Template-based development of servers |
US20110107192A1 (en) * | 2004-12-31 | 2011-05-05 | National University Of Singapore | Authoring Tool and Method for Creating an Electrical Document |
US20060174216A1 (en) * | 2005-01-28 | 2006-08-03 | Trenten Peterson | Providing additional hierarchical information for an object displayed in a tree view in a hierarchical relationship with other objects |
US20060190817A1 (en) * | 2005-02-23 | 2006-08-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Filtering a collection of items |
US7383503B2 (en) | 2005-02-23 | 2008-06-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Filtering a collection of items |
WO2006096133A1 (en) * | 2005-03-10 | 2006-09-14 | Knowledge Director Pte. Ltd. | System and method for generation of multimedia learning files |
US20060224966A1 (en) * | 2005-03-30 | 2006-10-05 | Eberhard Bohn | Method of announcing a user of a computer and the activation and starting of several programs installed on a computer |
US20060236253A1 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2006-10-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Dialog user interfaces for related tasks and programming interface for same |
US8490015B2 (en) | 2005-04-15 | 2013-07-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Task dialog and programming interface for same |
US20060242604A1 (en) * | 2005-04-21 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Multiple roots in navigation pane |
US7614016B2 (en) | 2005-04-21 | 2009-11-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Multiple roots in navigation pane |
US8195646B2 (en) | 2005-04-22 | 2012-06-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems, methods, and user interfaces for storing, searching, navigating, and retrieving electronic information |
US20060242585A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Scenario specialization of file browser |
US8522154B2 (en) | 2005-04-22 | 2013-08-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Scenario specialization of file browser |
US20060242122A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems, methods, and user interfaces for storing, searching, navigating, and retrieving electronic information |
US20060242591A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | File dialog user interfaces and creation of same |
US20060242164A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems, methods, and user interfaces for storing, searching, navigating, and retrieving electronic information |
US20060242603A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2006-10-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic multi-dimensional scrolling |
US8166402B2 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2012-04-24 | Microsoft Corporation | User interface for managing master and layout relationships |
US20060259875A1 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2006-11-16 | Microsoft Corporation | User interface for managing master and layout relationships |
WO2006124140A2 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2006-11-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Inheritance model between masters, layouts and slides |
US20060265659A1 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2006-11-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Inheritance model between masters, layouts and slides |
US8086963B2 (en) | 2005-05-19 | 2011-12-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Inheritance model between masters, layouts and slides |
WO2006124140A3 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2008-02-14 | Microsoft Corp | Inheritance model between masters, layouts and slides |
US20060271550A1 (en) * | 2005-05-26 | 2006-11-30 | Siemens Communications, Inc. | Method and system for remote document editing using a wireless communication device |
US7546533B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2009-06-09 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US7493561B2 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2009-02-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US20060294468A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US20060294469A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US20060294046A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2006-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US7590939B2 (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2009-09-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Storage and utilization of slide presentation slides |
US8135755B2 (en) * | 2005-06-29 | 2012-03-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Templates in a schema editor |
US20070005634A1 (en) * | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Templates in a schema editor |
US7716168B2 (en) | 2005-06-29 | 2010-05-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Modifying table definitions within a database application |
US20070016872A1 (en) * | 2005-07-13 | 2007-01-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Rich drag drop user interface |
US10489044B2 (en) | 2005-07-13 | 2019-11-26 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Rich drag drop user interface |
US7665028B2 (en) | 2005-07-13 | 2010-02-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Rich drag drop user interface |
US20070043700A1 (en) * | 2005-08-18 | 2007-02-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Searching a file open dialog using a namespace extension |
US7599954B2 (en) | 2005-08-18 | 2009-10-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Customizing a file open dialog using a namespace extension to allow searching |
US20070050700A1 (en) * | 2005-08-30 | 2007-03-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Formattable spreadsheet table elements with automatic updating |
US20070074116A1 (en) * | 2005-09-29 | 2007-03-29 | Teleios, Inc. | Multi-pane navigation/synchronization in a multimedia presentation system |
US20070078894A1 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2007-04-05 | Rothman Michael A | System and method for unified SKU (stock keeping unit) enablement |
US20070083851A1 (en) * | 2005-10-06 | 2007-04-12 | Moda Co., Ltd. | Template-based multimedia editor and editing method thereof |
US20070112811A1 (en) * | 2005-10-20 | 2007-05-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Architecture for scalable video coding applications |
US20070101387A1 (en) * | 2005-10-31 | 2007-05-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Media Sharing And Authoring On The Web |
US8180826B2 (en) | 2005-10-31 | 2012-05-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Media sharing and authoring on the web |
US7773813B2 (en) | 2005-10-31 | 2010-08-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Capture-intention detection for video content analysis |
US8196032B2 (en) * | 2005-11-01 | 2012-06-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Template-based multimedia authoring and sharing |
US20070101271A1 (en) * | 2005-11-01 | 2007-05-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Template-based multimedia authoring and sharing |
US8413038B2 (en) * | 2005-11-02 | 2013-04-02 | Creative Technology Ltd | System for downloading digital content published in a media channel |
US20080276158A1 (en) * | 2005-11-02 | 2008-11-06 | Creative Technology Ltd | System for Downloading Digital Content Published in a Media Channel |
US7599918B2 (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2009-10-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic search with implicit user intention mining |
US20070162839A1 (en) * | 2006-01-09 | 2007-07-12 | John Danty | Syndicated audio authoring |
EP1987446A4 (en) * | 2006-01-13 | 2013-08-14 | Barclays Capital Inc | Method and system for integrating calculation and presentation technologies |
EP1987446A2 (en) * | 2006-01-13 | 2008-11-05 | Lehman Brothers Inc. | Method and system for integrating calculation and presentation technologies |
WO2007084362A3 (en) * | 2006-01-13 | 2008-04-10 | Lehman Brothers Inc | Method and system for integrating calculation and presentation technologies |
US20070168868A1 (en) * | 2006-01-13 | 2007-07-19 | Lehman Brothers Inc. | Method and system for integrating calculation and presentation technologies |
US20100287473A1 (en) * | 2006-01-17 | 2010-11-11 | Arthur Recesso | Video analysis tool systems and methods |
US7743026B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2010-06-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Redirection to local copies of server-based files |
US20070198657A1 (en) * | 2006-01-31 | 2007-08-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Redirection to local copies of server-based files |
WO2007092470A2 (en) * | 2006-02-06 | 2007-08-16 | Massachusetts Medical Society | Creation and use of an electronic presentation slide that includes multimedia content |
WO2007092470A3 (en) * | 2006-02-06 | 2008-07-31 | Massachusetts Medical Soc | Creation and use of an electronic presentation slide that includes multimedia content |
US20070186166A1 (en) * | 2006-02-06 | 2007-08-09 | Anderson Kent R | Creation and use of an electronic presentation slide that includes multimedia content |
US10956660B2 (en) | 2006-02-09 | 2021-03-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Automatically converting text to business graphics |
US20070188627A1 (en) * | 2006-02-14 | 2007-08-16 | Hiroshi Sasaki | Video processing apparatus, method of adding time code, and methode of preparing editing list |
US9025936B2 (en) * | 2006-02-14 | 2015-05-05 | Sony Corporation | Video processing apparatus, method of adding time code, and methode of preparing editing list |
US20070204238A1 (en) * | 2006-02-27 | 2007-08-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Smart Video Presentation |
US20070239780A1 (en) * | 2006-04-07 | 2007-10-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Simultaneous capture and analysis of media content |
US20070245258A1 (en) * | 2006-04-13 | 2007-10-18 | Codman Neuro Sciences Sàrl | Graphical user interface of an external control device for controlling an implantable medical device while minimizing human error |
US9980005B2 (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2018-05-22 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | System and/or method for distributing media content |
US8245123B2 (en) | 2006-05-05 | 2012-08-14 | Google Inc. | Effects applied to images in a browser |
US20110142361A1 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2011-06-16 | Google Inc. | Rollback in a browser |
US8230318B2 (en) | 2006-05-05 | 2012-07-24 | Google Inc. | Selective image editing in a browser |
US20100110104A1 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2010-05-06 | Google Inc. | Effects applied to images in a browser |
US20100111406A1 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2010-05-06 | Google Inc. | Selective image editing in a browser |
US20100110092A1 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2010-05-06 | Google Inc. | Distributed processing when editing an image in a browser |
US8161368B2 (en) * | 2006-05-05 | 2012-04-17 | Google Inc. | Distributed processing when editing an image in a browser |
US8233009B2 (en) | 2006-05-05 | 2012-07-31 | Google Inc. | Rollback in a browser |
US20070263010A1 (en) * | 2006-05-15 | 2007-11-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Large-scale visualization techniques |
WO2007140017A2 (en) * | 2006-05-26 | 2007-12-06 | Blowfish Works, Inc. | System and method for advertising |
WO2007140017A3 (en) * | 2006-05-26 | 2008-03-06 | Blowfish Works Inc | System and method for advertising |
US20070293998A1 (en) * | 2006-06-14 | 2007-12-20 | Underdal Olav M | Information object creation based on an optimized test procedure method and apparatus |
US8762165B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2014-06-24 | Bosch Automotive Service Solutions Llc | Optimizing test procedures for a subject under test |
US8423226B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2013-04-16 | Service Solutions U.S. Llc | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US20070294001A1 (en) * | 2006-06-14 | 2007-12-20 | Underdal Olav M | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US9081883B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2015-07-14 | Bosch Automotive Service Solutions Inc. | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US8412402B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2013-04-02 | Spx Corporation | Vehicle state tracking method and apparatus for diagnostic testing |
US8428813B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2013-04-23 | Service Solutions Us Llc | Dynamic decision sequencing method and apparatus for optimizing a diagnostic test plan |
US20070294619A1 (en) * | 2006-06-16 | 2007-12-20 | Microsoft Corporation | Generating media presentations |
US8261177B2 (en) * | 2006-06-16 | 2012-09-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Generating media presentations |
US20080005652A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2008-01-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Media presentation driven by meta-data events |
US20100324376A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2010-12-23 | Spx Corporation | Diagnostics Data Collection and Analysis Method and Apparatus |
US7979801B2 (en) | 2006-06-30 | 2011-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Media presentation driven by meta-data events |
US11445037B2 (en) | 2006-08-23 | 2022-09-13 | Ebay, Inc. | Dynamic configuration of multi-platform applications |
US10542121B2 (en) | 2006-08-23 | 2020-01-21 | Ebay Inc. | Dynamic configuration of multi-platform applications |
US20080070218A1 (en) * | 2006-08-30 | 2008-03-20 | The Boeing Company | System, method, and computer program product for delivering a training course |
US8647126B2 (en) | 2006-08-30 | 2014-02-11 | The Boeing Company | System and computer program product for developing and delivering a training course |
US9928026B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2018-03-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Making and indicating a stereo pair |
US10897679B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2021-01-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone scene management |
US9860657B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2018-01-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone configurations maintained by playback device |
US11540050B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2022-12-27 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US12167216B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2024-12-10 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US10306365B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2019-05-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US11385858B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2022-07-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Predefined multi-channel listening environment |
US12219328B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2025-02-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone scene activation |
US9766853B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-09-19 | Sonos, Inc. | Pair volume control |
US9756424B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-09-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel pairing in a media system |
US10448159B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2019-10-15 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US9749760B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-08-29 | Sonos, Inc. | Updating zone configuration in a multi-zone media system |
US10469966B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2019-11-05 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone scene management |
US11388532B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2022-07-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone scene activation |
US10555082B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2020-02-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US10136218B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2018-11-20 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US10848885B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2020-11-24 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone scene management |
US10228898B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2019-03-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Identification of playback device and stereo pair names |
US11082770B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2021-08-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel pairing in a media system |
US10028056B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2018-07-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Multi-channel pairing in a media system |
US9813827B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2017-11-07 | Sonos, Inc. | Zone configuration based on playback selections |
US10966025B2 (en) | 2006-09-12 | 2021-03-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US20080073936A1 (en) * | 2006-09-21 | 2008-03-27 | Jen-Her Jeng | Multi-Window Presentation System, Multi-Window File Editing System and Method Thereof |
US8972839B2 (en) * | 2006-10-02 | 2015-03-03 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Media presentations including related content |
US7861150B2 (en) | 2006-11-07 | 2010-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Timing aspects of media content rendering |
US20080109727A1 (en) * | 2006-11-07 | 2008-05-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Timing aspects of media content rendering |
WO2008058041A1 (en) * | 2006-11-07 | 2008-05-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Timing aspects of media content rendering |
US9880693B2 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2018-01-30 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Example based video editing |
US20080120550A1 (en) * | 2006-11-17 | 2008-05-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Example based video editing |
US8375302B2 (en) | 2006-11-17 | 2013-02-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Example based video editing |
US20130151351A1 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2013-06-13 | Daniel E. Tsai | Ad-hoc web content player |
US9417758B2 (en) | 2006-11-21 | 2016-08-16 | Daniel E. Tsai | AD-HOC web content player |
US9645700B2 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2017-05-09 | Daniel E. Tsai | Ad-hoc web content player |
US20080148153A1 (en) * | 2006-12-18 | 2008-06-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | System, method and medium organizing templates for generating moving images |
US8205159B2 (en) * | 2006-12-18 | 2012-06-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | System, method and medium organizing templates for generating moving images |
US20080163122A1 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2008-07-03 | Jason Wolf | File content preview tool |
US7587672B2 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2009-09-08 | Sap Ag | File content preview tool |
US8988418B1 (en) | 2007-01-05 | 2015-03-24 | Florelle, Inc. | System and method for parametric display of modular aesthetic designs |
US20140372942A1 (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2014-12-18 | Sony Corporation | Chronology providing method, chonology providing apparatus, and recording medium containing chronology providing program |
US8650489B1 (en) * | 2007-04-20 | 2014-02-11 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Event processing in a content editor |
US20080270941A1 (en) * | 2007-04-30 | 2008-10-30 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | User content management method in communication terminal |
US20080301539A1 (en) * | 2007-04-30 | 2008-12-04 | Targit A/S | Computer-implemented method and a computer system and a computer readable medium for creating videos, podcasts or slide presentations from a business intelligence application |
US20080281783A1 (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2008-11-13 | Leon Papkoff | System and method for presenting media |
US9773525B2 (en) * | 2007-08-16 | 2017-09-26 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Timeline management |
US8677241B2 (en) | 2007-09-10 | 2014-03-18 | Vantrix Corporation | Method and system for multimedia messaging service (MMS) to video adaptation |
US9794319B2 (en) | 2007-09-10 | 2017-10-17 | Vantrix Corporation | Modular transcoding pipeline |
WO2009033256A1 (en) * | 2007-09-10 | 2009-03-19 | Vantrix Corporation | Method and system for multimedia messaging service (mms) to video adaptation |
US20090067357A1 (en) * | 2007-09-10 | 2009-03-12 | Norton Richard Elliott | Method and system for multimedia messaging service (mms) to video adaptation |
US20090079744A1 (en) * | 2007-09-21 | 2009-03-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Animating objects using a declarative animation scheme |
US8220051B2 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2012-07-10 | Vantrix Corporation | Generation and delivery of multimedia content-adaptation notifications |
US20090088191A1 (en) * | 2007-09-28 | 2009-04-02 | Norton Richard Elliott | Generation and delivery of multimedia content-adaptation notifications |
US8621622B2 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2013-12-31 | Vantrix Corporation | Generation and delivery of multimedia content-adaptation notifications |
US8959635B2 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2015-02-17 | Vantrix Corporation | Generation and delivery of multimedia content-adaptation notifications |
US8661096B2 (en) * | 2007-11-05 | 2014-02-25 | Cyberlink Corp. | Collaborative editing in a video editing system |
US20090119369A1 (en) * | 2007-11-05 | 2009-05-07 | Cyberlink Corp. | Collaborative editing in a video editing system |
US20090125677A1 (en) * | 2007-11-13 | 2009-05-14 | Xavier Leveque | Intelligent caching of media files |
US8250241B1 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2012-08-21 | Vantrix Corporation | Intelligent caching of media files |
US8171167B2 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2012-05-01 | Vantrix Corporation | Intelligent caching of media files |
US8554810B2 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2013-10-08 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Information processing apparatus, information processing system, processing method thereof, and recording medium |
US9892173B2 (en) | 2007-11-15 | 2018-02-13 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Information processing apparatus, information processing system, processing method thereof, and recording medium for searching in a search folder set with a search condition |
US20090132498A1 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2009-05-21 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Information processing apparatus, information processing system, processing method thereof, and recording medium |
US20090138508A1 (en) * | 2007-11-28 | 2009-05-28 | Hebraic Heritage Christian School Of Theology, Inc | Network-based interactive media delivery system and methods |
US20090199106A1 (en) * | 2008-02-05 | 2009-08-06 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Communication terminal including graphical bookmark manager |
US20140130080A1 (en) * | 2008-02-06 | 2014-05-08 | Google Inc. | System and method for voting on popular video intervals |
US20090216584A1 (en) * | 2008-02-27 | 2009-08-27 | Fountain Gregory J | Repair diagnostics based on replacement parts inventory |
US20090216401A1 (en) * | 2008-02-27 | 2009-08-27 | Underdal Olav M | Feedback loop on diagnostic procedure |
US20110093466A1 (en) * | 2008-03-26 | 2011-04-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Heuristic event clustering of media using metadata |
US20090248688A1 (en) * | 2008-03-26 | 2009-10-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Heuristic event clustering of media using metadata |
US7860866B2 (en) | 2008-03-26 | 2010-12-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Heuristic event clustering of media using metadata |
US8051103B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2011-11-01 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US9454521B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2016-09-27 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US8037101B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2011-10-11 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US7933930B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2011-04-26 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US8516007B1 (en) * | 2008-04-08 | 2013-08-20 | United Services Automobile Association (Usaa) | Systems and methods for creating documents from templates |
US20090271239A1 (en) * | 2008-04-23 | 2009-10-29 | Underdal Olav M | Test requirement list for diagnostic tests |
US8239094B2 (en) | 2008-04-23 | 2012-08-07 | Spx Corporation | Test requirement list for diagnostic tests |
US8311058B2 (en) | 2008-05-10 | 2012-11-13 | Vantrix Corporation | Modular transcoding pipeline |
US20090280844A1 (en) * | 2008-05-10 | 2009-11-12 | Norton Richard Elliott | Modular transcoding pipeline |
US9075963B2 (en) * | 2008-05-22 | 2015-07-07 | A&E Television Networks | Systems and methods for generating and displaying an intellectual property rights profile for a media presentation |
US20100070522A1 (en) * | 2008-05-22 | 2010-03-18 | A&E Television Networks | Systems and methods for generating and displaying an intellectual property rights profile for a media presentation |
US9589381B2 (en) | 2008-06-12 | 2017-03-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Copying of animation effects from a source object to at least one target object |
US20090309881A1 (en) * | 2008-06-12 | 2009-12-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Copying of animation effects from a source object to at least one target object |
US7941458B2 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2011-05-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Abstraction layer for online/offline resource access |
US8849868B2 (en) | 2008-06-26 | 2014-09-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Abstraction layer for online/offline resource access |
US8380751B2 (en) | 2008-06-26 | 2013-02-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Abstraction layer for online/offline resource access |
US20110179071A1 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2011-07-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Abstraction layer for online/offline resource access |
US20090327345A1 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2009-12-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Abstraction layer for online/offline resource access |
US20090328234A1 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2009-12-31 | Condel International Technologies Inc. | Method and system for performing interoperable digital rights management among different operating system platforms |
US11354022B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2022-06-07 | Ebay Inc. | Multi-directional and variable speed navigation of collage multi-media |
US11682150B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2023-06-20 | Ebay Inc. | Systems and methods for publishing and/or sharing media presentations over a network |
US10706222B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2020-07-07 | Ebay Inc. | System and methods for multimedia “hot spot” enablement |
US10853555B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2020-12-01 | Ebay, Inc. | Position editing tool of collage multi-media |
US10157170B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2018-12-18 | Ebay, Inc. | System and methods for the segmentation of media |
US8627192B2 (en) * | 2008-07-03 | 2014-01-07 | Ebay Inc. | System and methods for automatic media population of a style presentation |
US11100690B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2021-08-24 | Ebay Inc. | System and methods for automatic media population of a style presentation |
US11017160B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2021-05-25 | Ebay Inc. | Systems and methods for publishing and/or sharing media presentations over a network |
US10282391B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2019-05-07 | Ebay Inc. | Position editing tool of collage multi-media |
US11373028B2 (en) | 2008-07-03 | 2022-06-28 | Ebay Inc. | Position editing tool of collage multi-media |
US20100005380A1 (en) * | 2008-07-03 | 2010-01-07 | Lanahan James W | System and methods for automatic media population of a style presentation |
US20100031152A1 (en) * | 2008-07-31 | 2010-02-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Creation and Navigation of Infinite Canvas Presentation |
US8954857B2 (en) | 2008-08-11 | 2015-02-10 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Sections of a presentation having user-definable properties |
US10423301B2 (en) | 2008-08-11 | 2019-09-24 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Sections of a presentation having user-definable properties |
US8108777B2 (en) | 2008-08-11 | 2012-01-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Sections of a presentation having user-definable properties |
US8850312B2 (en) * | 2008-12-24 | 2014-09-30 | Kyocera Document Solutions Inc. | Image forming apparatus and method of displaying preview image |
US20100162106A1 (en) * | 2008-12-24 | 2010-06-24 | Akihiko Ikazaki | Image forming apparatus and method of displaying preview image |
US20110113315A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2011-05-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Computer-assisted rich interactive narrative (rin) generation |
US20110113334A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2011-05-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Experience streams for rich interactive narratives |
US9092437B2 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2015-07-28 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Experience streams for rich interactive narratives |
US20110119587A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2011-05-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Data model and player platform for rich interactive narratives |
US8639086B2 (en) | 2009-01-06 | 2014-01-28 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Rendering of video based on overlaying of bitmapped images |
US20100218100A1 (en) * | 2009-02-25 | 2010-08-26 | HNTB Holdings, Ltd. | Presentation system |
US20100275123A1 (en) * | 2009-04-22 | 2010-10-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Media Timeline Interaction |
US8407596B2 (en) * | 2009-04-22 | 2013-03-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Media timeline interaction |
US20100271478A1 (en) * | 2009-04-23 | 2010-10-28 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Apparatus for playing back recorded video images related to event,and method thereof |
US9420239B2 (en) * | 2009-04-23 | 2016-08-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Apparatus for playing back recorded video images related to event, and method thereof |
US20100281386A1 (en) * | 2009-04-30 | 2010-11-04 | Charles Lyons | Media Editing Application with Candidate Clip Management |
US8522144B2 (en) * | 2009-04-30 | 2013-08-27 | Apple Inc. | Media editing application with candidate clip management |
US20100299131A1 (en) * | 2009-05-21 | 2010-11-25 | Nexidia Inc. | Transcript alignment |
US20100318916A1 (en) * | 2009-06-11 | 2010-12-16 | David Wilkins | System and method for generating multimedia presentations |
US20100321175A1 (en) * | 2009-06-23 | 2010-12-23 | Gilbert Harry M | Alerts Issued Upon Component Detection Failure |
US8648700B2 (en) | 2009-06-23 | 2014-02-11 | Bosch Automotive Service Solutions Llc | Alerts issued upon component detection failure |
US20160283060A1 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2016-09-29 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Aggregated, interactive communication timeline |
US20200064976A1 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2020-02-27 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Aggregated, interactive communication timeline |
US10860179B2 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2020-12-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Aggregated, interactive communication timeline |
US10466864B2 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2019-11-05 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Aggregated, interactive communication timeline |
US20110107221A1 (en) * | 2009-11-04 | 2011-05-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Web Based Sales Presentation Method and System With Synchronized Display |
US10567287B2 (en) | 2009-12-01 | 2020-02-18 | Vantrix Corporation | System and methods for efficient media delivery using cache |
US10097463B2 (en) | 2009-12-01 | 2018-10-09 | Vantrix Corporation | System and methods for efficient media delivery using cache |
US20110131298A1 (en) * | 2009-12-01 | 2011-06-02 | Courtemanche Marc | System and Methods for Efficient Media Delivery Using Cache |
US8516074B2 (en) | 2009-12-01 | 2013-08-20 | Vantrix Corporation | System and methods for efficient media delivery using cache |
US9465879B2 (en) * | 2010-01-14 | 2016-10-11 | Excalibur Ip, Llc | Search engine recency using content preview |
US9864804B2 (en) | 2010-01-14 | 2018-01-09 | Excalibur Ip, Llc | Search engine recency using content preview |
US20110173180A1 (en) * | 2010-01-14 | 2011-07-14 | Siva Gurumurthy | Search engine recency using content preview |
US10331761B2 (en) * | 2010-02-02 | 2019-06-25 | Think-Cell Software Gmbh | Method, computer readable storage medium and computer system for efficient agenda drafting, synchronization and display |
US20110191672A1 (en) * | 2010-02-02 | 2011-08-04 | Think-Cell Software Gmbh | Method, computer readable storage medium and computer system for efficient agenda drafting, synchronization and display |
US20110225525A1 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2011-09-15 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | System, method and computer program product for displaying data utilizing a selected source and visualization |
US20140129969A1 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2014-05-08 | Salesforce.Com, Inc | System, method and computer program product for displaying data utilizing a selected source and visualization |
US8656291B2 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2014-02-18 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | System, method and computer program product for displaying data utilizing a selected source and visualization |
US8825488B2 (en) | 2010-04-12 | 2014-09-02 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Method and apparatus for time synchronized script metadata |
US8825489B2 (en) | 2010-04-12 | 2014-09-02 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Method and apparatus for interpolating script data |
US20130120654A1 (en) * | 2010-04-12 | 2013-05-16 | David A. Kuspa | Method and Apparatus for Generating Video Descriptions |
US9066049B2 (en) | 2010-04-12 | 2015-06-23 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Method and apparatus for processing scripts |
US9191639B2 (en) * | 2010-04-12 | 2015-11-17 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Method and apparatus for generating video descriptions |
US9208599B2 (en) | 2010-06-17 | 2015-12-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Visual previews |
US20120017152A1 (en) * | 2010-07-15 | 2012-01-19 | Ken Matsuda | Media-Editing Application with a Free-Form Space for Organizing or Compositing Media Clips |
US8819557B2 (en) * | 2010-07-15 | 2014-08-26 | Apple Inc. | Media-editing application with a free-form space for organizing or compositing media clips |
US20120030277A1 (en) * | 2010-07-31 | 2012-02-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Preview publishing of reports |
US20130097477A1 (en) * | 2010-09-01 | 2013-04-18 | Axel Springer Digital Tv Guide Gmbh | Content transformation for lean-back entertainment |
US10095667B2 (en) | 2010-09-16 | 2018-10-09 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system of a user associating a first webpage web link and second webpage link and viewing of the contents of the webpage links by the selection of the first webpage link |
US11194955B2 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2021-12-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system of a user associating a first webpage web link and second webpage link and viewing of the contents of the webpage links by the selection of the first webpage link |
US10503815B2 (en) | 2010-09-16 | 2019-12-10 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system of a user associating a first webpage web link and second webpage link and viewing of the contents of the webpage links by the selection of the first webpage link |
US20150143217A1 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2015-05-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system of a user associating a first webpage web link and second webpage link and viewing of the contents of the webpage links by the selection of the first webpage link |
US20120072816A1 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2012-03-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Web link association method and system |
US9727540B2 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2017-08-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system of a user associating a first webpage web link and second webpage link and viewing of the contents of the webpage links by the selection of the first webpage link |
US9003272B2 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2015-04-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system of a user associating a first webpage link and second webpage link and viewing of the contents of the webpage links by the selection of the first webpage link |
US20120096425A1 (en) * | 2010-10-15 | 2012-04-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Software Map |
US8910111B2 (en) * | 2010-10-15 | 2014-12-09 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Software map to represent information regarding software development events |
US20140289701A1 (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2014-09-25 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Enhanced Timelines in Application Development Environments |
US20120143923A1 (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2012-06-07 | Whitney Benjamin Taylor | Method and system of hierarchical metadata management and application |
US8949782B2 (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2015-02-03 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Enhanced timelines in application development environments |
US9245058B2 (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2016-01-26 | Titus Inc. | Method and system of hierarchical metadata management and application |
US20120150801A1 (en) * | 2010-12-08 | 2012-06-14 | Microsoft Corporation | Platform agnostic file attribute synchronization |
US20120173985A1 (en) * | 2010-12-29 | 2012-07-05 | Tyler Peppel | Multi-dimensional visualization of temporal information |
US11977994B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2024-05-07 | Tickr, Inc. | Multi-dimensional visualization of temporal information |
US9881257B2 (en) * | 2010-12-29 | 2018-01-30 | Tickr, Inc. | Multi-dimensional visualization of temporal information |
US11758327B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2023-09-12 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US12248732B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2025-03-11 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device configuration and control |
US11429343B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2022-08-30 | Sonos, Inc. | Stereo playback configuration and control |
US11265652B2 (en) | 2011-01-25 | 2022-03-01 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback device pairing |
US8954477B2 (en) | 2011-01-28 | 2015-02-10 | Apple Inc. | Data structures for a media-editing application |
US9870802B2 (en) | 2011-01-28 | 2018-01-16 | Apple Inc. | Media clip management |
US20120198317A1 (en) * | 2011-02-02 | 2012-08-02 | Eppolito Aaron M | Automatic synchronization of media clips |
US8621355B2 (en) * | 2011-02-02 | 2013-12-31 | Apple Inc. | Automatic synchronization of media clips |
US11747972B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2023-09-05 | Apple Inc. | Media-editing application with novel editing tools |
US9997196B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2018-06-12 | Apple Inc. | Retiming media presentations |
US10324605B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2019-06-18 | Apple Inc. | Media-editing application with novel editing tools |
US11157154B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2021-10-26 | Apple Inc. | Media-editing application with novel editing tools |
WO2012141856A1 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2012-10-18 | Fmr Llc | Augmented reality system for re-casting a seminar with private calculations |
US9424579B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2016-08-23 | Fmr Llc | System for group supervision |
US10114451B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2018-10-30 | Fmr Llc | Augmented reality in a virtual tour through a financial portfolio |
US20120243848A1 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2012-09-27 | David Martin | Augmented Reality System for Re-Casting A Seminar with Private Calculations |
US9973630B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2018-05-15 | Fmr Llc | System for group supervision |
US20140153905A1 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2014-06-05 | Fmr Llc | Augmented Reality System for Re-casting a Seminar With Private Calculations |
US10455089B2 (en) | 2011-03-22 | 2019-10-22 | Fmr Llc | Augmented reality system for product selection |
US8644673B2 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2014-02-04 | Fmr Llc | Augmented reality system for re-casting a seminar with private calculations |
US9264655B2 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2016-02-16 | Fmr Llc | Augmented reality system for re-casting a seminar with private calculations |
US20120290951A1 (en) * | 2011-05-12 | 2012-11-15 | Shingo Utsuki | Content sharing system |
US8365069B1 (en) * | 2011-08-17 | 2013-01-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Web content management based on timeliness metadata |
US12155527B2 (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2024-11-26 | Sonos, Inc. | Playback devices and bonded zones |
US9552147B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2017-01-24 | Facebook, Inc. | Hierarchical user interface |
US9098168B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-08-04 | Facebook, Inc. | Spring motions during object animation |
US10775991B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2020-09-15 | Facebook, Inc. | Overlay images and texts in user interface |
US9229613B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2016-01-05 | Facebook, Inc. | Transitions among hierarchical user interface components |
US9239662B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2016-01-19 | Facebook, Inc. | User interface editor |
US9557876B2 (en) * | 2012-02-01 | 2017-01-31 | Facebook, Inc. | Hierarchical user interface |
US9235317B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2016-01-12 | Facebook, Inc. | Summary and navigation of hierarchical levels |
US9606708B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2017-03-28 | Facebook, Inc. | User intent during object scrolling |
US9645724B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2017-05-09 | Facebook, Inc. | Timeline based content organization |
US9235318B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2016-01-12 | Facebook, Inc. | Transitions among hierarchical user-interface layers |
US8990691B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-03-24 | Facebook, Inc. | Video object behavior in a user interface |
US20130198661A1 (en) * | 2012-02-01 | 2013-08-01 | Michael Matas | Hierarchical User Interface |
US8976199B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-03-10 | Facebook, Inc. | Visual embellishment for objects |
US8984428B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-03-17 | Facebook, Inc. | Overlay images and texts in user interface |
US8990719B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-03-24 | Facebook, Inc. | Preview of objects arranged in a series |
US11132118B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2021-09-28 | Facebook, Inc. | User interface editor |
US9003305B2 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2015-04-07 | Facebook, Inc. | Folding and unfolding images in a user interface |
US9729115B2 (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2017-08-08 | Sonos, Inc. | Intelligently increasing the sound level of player |
US10063202B2 (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2018-08-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Intelligently modifying the gain parameter of a playback device |
US10720896B2 (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2020-07-21 | Sonos, Inc. | Intelligently modifying the gain parameter of a playback device |
US9075884B2 (en) * | 2012-06-08 | 2015-07-07 | Apple Inc. | Collecting web pages/links from communications and documents for later reading |
US20130332807A1 (en) * | 2012-06-08 | 2013-12-12 | Apple Inc. | Collecting Web Pages/Links from Communications and Documents for Later Reading |
US8843535B2 (en) * | 2012-06-25 | 2014-09-23 | Oracle International Corporation | Framework for applying metadata for multiple files managed using a content management system |
US20150006497A1 (en) * | 2012-06-27 | 2015-01-01 | Joel Chetzroni | Slideshow Builder and Method Associated Thereto |
US10025857B2 (en) * | 2012-06-27 | 2018-07-17 | Joel Chetzroni | Slideshow builder and method associated thereto |
US10084611B2 (en) * | 2012-06-29 | 2018-09-25 | Siemens Schweiz Ag | Programmable symbol animation pre-processor for building automation graphics |
US20140013268A1 (en) * | 2012-07-09 | 2014-01-09 | Mobitude, LLC, a Delaware LLC | Method for creating a scripted exchange |
US20150161565A1 (en) * | 2012-08-24 | 2015-06-11 | SNN, Inc. | Methods and systems for producing, previewing, and publishing a video press release over an electronic network |
US9171289B2 (en) * | 2012-08-24 | 2015-10-27 | SNN Incorporated | Methods and systems for producing, previewing, and publishing a video press release over an electronic network |
US9811470B2 (en) | 2012-08-28 | 2017-11-07 | Vantrix Corporation | Method and system for self-tuning cache management |
US9112922B2 (en) | 2012-08-28 | 2015-08-18 | Vantrix Corporation | Method and system for self-tuning cache management |
US10306364B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2019-05-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio processing adjustments for playback devices based on determined characteristics of audio content |
US20140109012A1 (en) * | 2012-10-16 | 2014-04-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Thumbnail and document map based navigation in a document |
US10423716B2 (en) * | 2012-10-30 | 2019-09-24 | Sergey Anatoljevich Gevlich | Creating multimedia content for animation drawings by synchronizing animation drawings to audio and textual data |
US20150278181A1 (en) * | 2012-10-30 | 2015-10-01 | Sergey Anatoljevich Gevlich | Method and system for creating multimedia presentation prototypes |
CN105074769A (en) * | 2013-01-24 | 2015-11-18 | 盆唐首尔大学校医院 | Method and apparatus for displaying data on basis of electronic medical record system |
US20150363058A1 (en) * | 2013-01-24 | 2015-12-17 | Seoul National University Bundang Hospital | Method and apparatus for displaying data on basis of electronic medical record system |
US11553228B2 (en) | 2013-03-06 | 2023-01-10 | Arthur J. Zito, Jr. | Multi-media presentation system |
EP3518168A1 (en) | 2013-03-06 | 2019-07-31 | Arthur J. Zito, Jr. | Multi-media presentation system |
US12141524B2 (en) | 2013-05-07 | 2024-11-12 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Variable dimension version editing for graphical designs |
US11409957B2 (en) * | 2013-05-07 | 2022-08-09 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Variable dimension version editing for graphical designs |
US10015217B2 (en) * | 2013-06-04 | 2018-07-03 | Dropbox, Inc. | System and method for group participation in a digital media presentation |
US20160277459A1 (en) * | 2013-06-04 | 2016-09-22 | Dropbox, Inc. | System and method for group participation in a digital media presentation |
US10282075B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2019-05-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Automatic presentation of slide design suggestions |
CN110072026A (en) * | 2013-06-24 | 2019-07-30 | 微软技术许可有限责任公司 | The automatic presentation of lantern slide design recommendation |
US11010034B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2021-05-18 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Automatic presentation of slide design suggestions |
US10372790B2 (en) * | 2013-06-27 | 2019-08-06 | Plotagon Ab Corporation | System, method and apparatus for generating hand gesture animation determined on dialogue length and emotion |
US10091291B2 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2018-10-02 | SpeakWorks, Inc. | Synchronizing a source, response and comment presentation |
US9591072B2 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2017-03-07 | SpeakWorks, Inc. | Presenting a source presentation |
US20150006759A1 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2015-01-01 | SpeakWorks, Inc. | Presenting a source presentation |
US10025464B1 (en) * | 2013-10-07 | 2018-07-17 | Google Llc | System and method for highlighting dependent slides while editing master slides of a presentation |
US10627997B1 (en) | 2013-10-07 | 2020-04-21 | Google Llc | System and method for highlighting dependent slides while editing master slides of a presentation |
US10303418B2 (en) | 2013-11-08 | 2019-05-28 | Dropbox, Inc. | Content item presentation system |
US9781513B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2017-10-03 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio output balancing |
US9794707B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2017-10-17 | Sonos, Inc. | Audio output balancing |
US20160234267A1 (en) * | 2015-02-06 | 2016-08-11 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Sharing digital content using an interactive send service system |
US10346459B1 (en) * | 2015-02-17 | 2019-07-09 | Humanlearning Ltd. | Capture and annotation of segmented content representing insights |
US12026431B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2024-07-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple groupings in a playback system |
US11403062B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2022-08-02 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple groupings in a playback system |
US9824291B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2017-11-21 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Image analysis based color suggestions |
US10534748B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2020-01-14 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Content file suggestions |
US10528547B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2020-01-07 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Transferring files |
US20180239142A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2018-08-23 | Shenzhen Royole Technologies Co. Ltd. | Head-mounted display device and control method thereof |
US10545345B2 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2020-01-28 | Shenzhen Royole Technologies Co., Ltd. | Head-mounted display device with function of touch input and touch control method thereof |
US11995374B2 (en) | 2016-01-05 | 2024-05-28 | Sonos, Inc. | Multiple-device setup |
US11157545B2 (en) * | 2016-04-15 | 2021-10-26 | Grass Valley Limited | Media file systems and methods of storing media files in a media file system |
US12204582B2 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2025-01-21 | Grass Valley Limited | Media file systems and methods of storing media files in a media file system |
US11669563B2 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2023-06-06 | Grass Valley Limited | Media file systems and methods of storing media files in a media file system |
US12242769B2 (en) | 2016-10-17 | 2025-03-04 | Sonos, Inc. | Room association based on name |
US11481182B2 (en) | 2016-10-17 | 2022-10-25 | Sonos, Inc. | Room association based on name |
US20180121084A1 (en) * | 2016-10-28 | 2018-05-03 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Information display device |
CN108021311A (en) * | 2016-10-28 | 2018-05-11 | 夏普株式会社 | Information display device |
US10665267B2 (en) | 2017-03-01 | 2020-05-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Correlation of recorded video presentations and associated slides |
US11023121B2 (en) * | 2017-06-05 | 2021-06-01 | 9224-5489 Quebec Inc. | Method of transversally aligning information elements along axes |
CN107463338A (en) * | 2017-08-15 | 2017-12-12 | 郑州云海信息技术有限公司 | A kind for the treatment of method and apparatus of logical volume |
CN108536431A (en) * | 2018-04-04 | 2018-09-14 | 浙江小泰科技有限公司 | A kind of global command's row creates front end project approach and system |
US10943127B2 (en) * | 2018-06-01 | 2021-03-09 | StageClip Limited | Media processing |
US12164858B2 (en) | 2018-08-21 | 2024-12-10 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Multi-view masters for graphical designs |
US11550988B2 (en) | 2018-08-21 | 2023-01-10 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Multi-view masters for graphical designs |
US11405672B2 (en) | 2019-06-14 | 2022-08-02 | A&E Television Networks | Intellectual property rights management software systems for video content and methods of their manufacture and use |
US11044504B2 (en) | 2019-06-14 | 2021-06-22 | A&E Television Networks | Intellectual property rights management software systems for video content and methods of their manufacture and use |
US11449664B1 (en) * | 2019-07-01 | 2022-09-20 | Instasize, Inc. | Template for creating content item |
US11676316B1 (en) | 2019-07-01 | 2023-06-13 | Instasize, Inc. | Shareable settings for modifying images |
US11868701B1 (en) | 2019-07-01 | 2024-01-09 | Instasize, Inc. | Template for creating content item |
US11645047B2 (en) | 2019-09-13 | 2023-05-09 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Focused specification generation for interactive designs |
US12159026B2 (en) * | 2020-06-16 | 2024-12-03 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Audio associations for interactive media event triggering |
US11762531B2 (en) | 2020-10-28 | 2023-09-19 | Axure Software Solutions, Inc. | Stateful widget container management for interactive designs |
CN113760828A (en) * | 2021-08-04 | 2021-12-07 | 广东能龙教育股份有限公司 | Courseware development processing method, control platform, control device and storage medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP1376406A2 (en) | 2004-01-02 |
EP1376406A3 (en) | 2006-04-19 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20040001106A1 (en) | System and process for creating an interactive presentation employing multi-media components | |
US7631254B2 (en) | Automated e-learning and presentation authoring system | |
US7526726B1 (en) | System and method for generating presentations | |
US20100083173A1 (en) | Method and system for applying metadata to data sets of file objects | |
US8555170B2 (en) | Tool for presenting and editing a storyboard representation of a composite presentation | |
US10956660B2 (en) | Automatically converting text to business graphics | |
US10699063B2 (en) | Authoring content for digital books | |
US20060282776A1 (en) | Multimedia and performance analysis tool | |
US20050071736A1 (en) | Comprehensive and intuitive media collection and management tool | |
US9275021B2 (en) | System and method for providing a two-part graphic design and interactive document application | |
US20080010585A1 (en) | Binding interactive multichannel digital document system and authoring tool | |
US20150339375A1 (en) | Web application for debate maps | |
US20070198952A1 (en) | Methods and systems for authoring of a compound document following a hierarchical structure | |
US20130179761A1 (en) | Systems and methods for creating, editing and publishing cross-platform interactive electronic works | |
US20020147740A1 (en) | Animation on-object user interface | |
US20020113803A1 (en) | Collaborative computer-based production system including annotation, versioning and remote interaction | |
Zellweger | Active paths through multimedia documents | |
US20110035692A1 (en) | Scalable Architecture for Dynamic Visualization of Multimedia Information | |
Tacchetti | User's Guide for ELAN Linguistic Annotator | |
US20040145611A1 (en) | Method, program, and system for editing contents of multimedia | |
JP2003248730A (en) | System for content reuse process, and method for content reuse process | |
Towers | Dreamweaver 4 for Windows and Macintosh | |
KR100577611B1 (en) | Multimedia authoring method | |
Lowery | Dreamweaver MX 2004 bible | |
US20140289606A1 (en) | Systems and Methods For Attribute Indication and Accessibility in Electronics Documents |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: MICROSOFT CORPORATION, WASHINGTON Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:DEUTSCHER, JOHN;GOGIA, SUNIT;REEL/FRAME:013088/0684 Effective date: 20020610 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, WASHINGTON Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MICROSOFT CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:034766/0001 Effective date: 20141014 |